SPS-300_AU_User_Manual
SPS-300
Programming &
Operation Manual
All specifications are subject to change without notice
JK68-60300B (Prevision.04 Dec 13)
From SPS-300 v1.010 to v1.011
ATTENTION
The product that you have purchased contains a rechargeable MS Lithium battery. This battery is recyclable. At the end of its useful life,
under various state and local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of the battery into the municipal waste system.
Check with your local solid waste officials for details concerning recycling options or proper disposal.
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required
to take adequate measures.
Precaution Statements
Follow these safety, servicing and ESD precautions to prevent damage and to protect against potential hazards such as
electrical shock.
1-1
Safety Precautions
1. Be sure that all built-in protective devices are
replaced. Restore any missing protective shields.
2. When reinstalling the chassis and its assemblies,
be sure to restore all protective devices, including
nonmetallic control knobs and compartment
covers.
3. Make sure there are no cabinet openings through
which people - particularly children - might insert
fingers and contact dangerous voltages. Such
openings include excessively wide cabinet
ventilation slots and improperly fitted covers and
drawers.
4. Design Alteration Warning:
Never alter or add to the mechanical or electrical
design of the SECR. Unauthorized alterations
might create a safety hazard. Also, any design
changes or additions will void the manufacturer’s
warranty.
5. Components, parts and wiring that appear to have
overheated or that are otherwise damaged should
be replaced with parts that meet the original
specifications. Always determine the cause of
damage or over- heating, and correct any potential
hazards.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose used batteries according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Observe the original lead dress, especially near the
following areas : sharp edges, and especially the
AC and high voltage supplies. Always inspect for
pinched, out-of-place, or frayed wiring. Do not
change the spacing between comp-onents and the
printed circuit board. Check the AC power cord
for damage. Make sure that leads and components
do not touch thermally hot parts.
7. Product Safety Notice:
Some electrical and mechanical parts have special
safety-related characteristics which might not be
obvious from visual inspection. These safety
features and the protection they give might be lost
if the replacement component differs from the
original - even if the replacement is rated for
higher voltage, wattage, etc.
Components that are critical for safety are
indicated in the circuit diagram by shading, ( )
or ( ). Use replacement components that have
the same ratings, especially for flame resistance
and dielectric strength specifications. A
replacement part that does not have the same
safety characteristics as the original might create
shock, fire or other hazards.
ATTENTION
ll y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type
ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
SAFETY NOTICE : "For pluggable equipment, the socket-outlet shall be installed near
the equipment and shall be easily accessible."
1-2
Servicing Precautions
WARNING: First read the-Safety Precautions-section of this manual. If some unforeseen circumstance creates a
conflict between the servicing and safety precautions, always follow the safety precautions.
WARNING: An electrolytic capacitor installed with the wrong polarity might explode.
1. Servicing precautions are printed on the cabinet.
Follow them.
2. Always unplug the units AC power cord from the
AC power source before attempting to:
(a) Remove or reinstall any component or assembly
(b) Disconnect an electrical plug or connector
(c) Connect a test component in parallel with an
electrolytic capacitor
3. Some components are raised above the printed
circuit board for safety. An insulation tube or tape
is sometimes used. The internal wiring is
sometimes clamped to prevent contact with
thermally hot components. Reinstall all such
elements to their original position.
4. After servicing, always check that the screws,
components and wiring have been correctly
reinstalled. Make sure that the portion around the
serviced part has not been damaged.
1-3
5. Check the insulation between the blades of the AC
plug and accessible conductive parts
(examples : metal panels and input terminals).
6. Insulation Checking Procedure:
Disconnect the power cord from the AC source and
turn the power switch ON. Connect an insulation
resistance meter (500V) to the blades of AC plug.
The insulation resistance between each blade of
the AC plug and accessible conductive parts (see
above) should be greater than 1 megohm.
7. Never defeat any of the B+ voltage interlocks.
Do not apply AC power to the unit (or any of its
assemblies) unless all solid-state heat sinks are
correctly installed.
8. Always connect an instrument’s ground lead to the
instrument chassis ground before connecting the
positive lead ; always remove the instrument’s
ground lead last.
Precautions for Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESDs)
1. Some semiconductor (solid state) devices are easily
damaged by static electricity. Such components are
called Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESDs);
examples include integrated circuits and some fieldeffect transistors. The following techniques will
reduce the occurrence of component damage caused
by static electricity.
2. Immediately before handling any semiconductor
components or assemblies, drain the electrostatic
charge from your body by touching a known earth
ground. Alternatively, wear a discharging wriststrap device. (Be sure to remove it prior to applying
power - this is an electric shock precaution.)
3. After removing an ESD-equipped assembly, place
it on a conductive surface such as aluminum foil to
prevent accumulation of electrostatic charge.
4. Do not use freon-propelled chemicals. These can
generate electrical charges that damage ESDs.
5. Use only a grounded-tip soldering iron when
soldering or unsoldering ESDs.
6. Use only an anti-static solder removal device.
Many solder removal devices are not rated as antistatic; these can accumulate sufficient electrical
charge to damage ESDs.
7. Do not remove a replacement ESD from its
protective package until you are ready to install it.
Most replacement ESDs are packaged with leads
that are electrically shorted together by conductive
foam, aluminum foil or other conductive materials.
8. Immediately before removing the protective
material from the leads of a replacement ESD,
touch the protective material to the chassis or
circuit assembly into which the device will be
installed.
9. Minimize body motions when handling unpackaged
replacement ESDs. Motions such as brushing
clothes together, or lifting a foot from a carpeted
floor can generate enough static electricity to
damage an ESD.
Contents
Introduction
1 About the SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Registers ............................................................... 1 Using This Manual .................................................................................................................... 2 Using Flowcharts......................................................................................................... 2 Basic Features and Functions .................................................................................................... 3 LCD Operator Display ................................................................................................ 3 VFD Customer Display ............................................................................................... 7 Control Lock and Keys................................................................................................ 8 Keyboards.................................................................................................................... 9 Internal Printers ......................................................................................................... 12 Communication Ports ................................................................................................ 13 Miscellaneous Hardware ........................................................................................... 13 Optional Hardware .................................................................................................... 14 Software Features ...................................................................................................... 14 Getting Started
15 Australian / New Zealand Default Programming .................................................................... 15 Getting Started Steps ............................................................................................................... 15 Steps In this chapter: ................................................................................................. 15 Unpacking................................................................................................................................ 16 Installing the Paper .................................................................................................................. 17 SPS-320/325 - Single Station Printer ........................................................................ 17 SPS-340/345 - Two Station Printer ........................................................................... 18 Memory Clear .......................................................................................................................... 21 Initial Clear (Status Clear) ......................................................................................... 21 Clerk Sign-On/Sign-Off .......................................................................................................... 23 Push Entry ................................................................................................................. 23 Code Entry................................................................................................................. 23 Sign-Off Clerk ........................................................................................................... 23 Stay Down or Pop-up Clerk ...................................................................................... 23 Clerk Sign On Instructions ........................................................................................ 24 Clerk Sign Off Instructions ....................................................................................... 24 Operating Instructions
25 Function Keys Description ...................................................................................................... 25 Ethernet (IRC) Status Test ....................................................................................................... 31 Trouble Shooting ....................................................................................................... 31 Operator Display Screen .......................................................................................................... 32 Operator Display Example ........................................................................................ 32 Clerk Time Keeping ................................................................................................................ 33 Receipt On and Off .................................................................................................................. 35 Receipt on Request .................................................................................................... 36 Item Registrations .................................................................................................................... 37 PLU Look-Up Keys and Function Look-Up Keys .................................................... 37 SPS-300
Contents • i
Keyboard PLU Entry - Open Price / Preset Price Override....................................... 38 Keyboard PLU Entry - Preset Price ........................................................................... 38 Keyboard PLU Entry - Repeat................................................................................... 39 Keyboard PLU Entry - Multiplication ....................................................................... 40 Keyboard PLU Entry - Direct Multiplication with Preset Price ................................ 40 Keyboard PLU Entry - Split Pricing.......................................................................... 42 Keyboard PLU Entry - Single Item ........................................................................... 42 Code PLU Entry - Open Price ................................................................................... 43 Code PLU Entry - Preset Price / Single Item ............................................................ 43 Code PLU Entry - Preset Price Override ................................................................... 44 Code PLU Entry - Repeat .......................................................................................... 44 Code PLU Entry - Multiplication .............................................................................. 45 Code PLU Entry - Multiplication with Decimal Point .............................................. 45 Code PLU Entry - Split Pricing ................................................................................. 46 Barcode PLU Entry - Open Price, Single Item .......................................................... 47 Barcode PLU Entry - Open Price, Multiple Items ..................................................... 47 Barcode PLU Entry - Preset Price Override, Single Item.......................................... 48 Barcode PLU Entry - Preset Price Override, Multiple Items .................................... 48 PLU Price Inquiry...................................................................................................... 49 Modifier Key ............................................................................................................. 50 Price Level Key ......................................................................................................... 51 Promo ........................................................................................................................ 52 Waste ......................................................................................................................... 53 Not Found PLU function ......................................................................................................... 54 Enter Not Found PLU Programming ......................................................................... 54 Quick Entry ............................................................................................................... 54 Detail Entry ............................................................................................................... 56 Not Found PLU Report ............................................................................................. 58 Modify a Programmed Not Found PLU .................................................................... 58 Shifting or Exempting Tax ...................................................................................................... 59 Shifting Tax ............................................................................................................... 59 Exempting Tax .......................................................................................................... 61 Percent Key Operations ........................................................................................................... 63 Preset Percent Discount on an Item ........................................................................... 64 Enter a Percent Discount on an Item ......................................................................... 64 Preset Percent Discount on Sale Total ....................................................................... 65 Enter a Percent Discount on Sale Total ..................................................................... 65 Surcharge Operation .................................................................................................. 65 Dollar Amount Discount on Sale............................................................................... 66 Dollar Amount Discount on Item .............................................................................. 66 Return Merchandise Registrations ........................................................................................... 67 Voids and Corrections ............................................................................................................. 68 Error Correction (Void Last Item) ............................................................................. 68 Void Previous Item .................................................................................................... 68 Cancel ........................................................................................................................ 69 Void Mode Operations .............................................................................................. 69 #/No Sale Operations ............................................................................................................... 70 No Sale - Open Drawer ............................................................................................. 70 Non Add # - Add Information ................................................................................... 70 Received On Account Operations............................................................................................ 71 Paid Out Operations ................................................................................................................. 72 Subtotaling a Sale .................................................................................................................... 73 Eat In/Take Out/Drive Thru Sales ........................................................................................... 73 Drive Through Operation ........................................................................................................ 73 Quick EJ (Electronic Journal) Lookup .................................................................................... 74 ii • Contents
SPS-300
Totaling and Tendering ........................................................................................................... 75 Totaling a Cash Sale .................................................................................................. 75 Totaling a Check Sale................................................................................................ 75 Tendering a Cash Sale ............................................................................................... 76 Tendering a Check Sale ............................................................................................. 76 Totaling a Charge (EFTPOS) Sale ............................................................................ 77 Tendering a Charge (EFTPOS) Sale ......................................................................... 78 Cash Out within a Charge (EFTPOS) Sale................................................................ 78 Check (Cheque) Cashing ........................................................................................... 79 Split Tender ............................................................................................................... 80 Post Tender ................................................................................................................ 81 Currency Conversion................................................................................................. 82 Check Track System (Account Management) ......................................................................... 83 Overview ................................................................................................................... 83 Soft Check ................................................................................................................. 83 Hard Check ................................................................................................................ 83 Multiple Registers Check Track System (Account Management) ............................. 84 Clerk Interrupt ........................................................................................................... 84 Table Management .................................................................................................... 87 Programming ............................................................................................................. 87 Open a Guest Check /Account with Scanner ............................................................ 87 Basic Operation ......................................................................................................... 88 Advanced Operation - Table Transfer ....................................................................... 92 Additional Operation - Guest Number and Tip ......................................................... 95 Scale Operations ...................................................................................................................... 96 Direct Scale Entry ..................................................................................................... 97 Tare Weight Entry ..................................................................................................... 98 Manual Tare Weight Entry ........................................................................................ 99 Automatic Scale Entry............................................................................................. 100 Manual Weight Entry .............................................................................................. 100 X Mode
101 Manager Mode ....................................................................................................................... 101 Manager Operation ................................................................................................................ 102 X Reports ............................................................................................................................... 103 X Report Options Table .......................................................................................... 104 Cash Declaration.................................................................................................................... 105 Register Print Format ............................................................................................................. 106 Stop Receipt Printing ............................................................................................................. 107 Stop Journal Printing ............................................................................................................. 107 Training Mode ....................................................................................................................... 108 E.J. Operation ........................................................................................................................ 109 Not Found PLU Report.......................................................................................................... 110 Z Mode
111 Reset Report Mode ................................................................................................................ 111 Z Reports ............................................................................................................................... 112 Z Report Options Table ........................................................................................... 113 Reset Electronic Journal ........................................................................................................ 114 PC Communication ................................................................................................................ 114 Mix & Match Program........................................................................................................... 115 Mix & Match Program Scan .................................................................................................. 115 PLU Lookup Program ........................................................................................................... 116 SPS-300
Contents • iii
Age Verification .................................................................................................................... 117 Reset Not Found PLU Report ................................................................................................ 118 Service Mode Programming
119 Overview................................................................................................................................ 119 Memory All Clear .................................................................................................................. 121 Memory All Clear (RAM All Clear) ....................................................................... 121 Hardware Test ........................................................................................................................ 125 Hardware Test Table ............................................................................................... 126 Clear All Totals ...................................................................................................................... 127 Clear Grand Total .................................................................................................................. 128 Clear/Delete PLU File ........................................................................................................... 129 FlashROM Information.......................................................................................................... 130 Memory Allocation ................................................................................................................ 131 Function Key Assignment ..................................................................................................... 132 Function Code Table ............................................................................................... 134 IRC Options ........................................................................................................................... 135 IRC Options Table ................................................................................................... 135 RS232C/USB Port 1/2/3/4 Options ....................................................................................... 136 RS232C Settings Screen Program Notes ................................................................. 138 SD Card Operation ................................................................................................................ 139 Programs Backup and Restore................................................................................. 139 SD Card Operation Table ........................................................................................ 140 Load/Save Receipt Images..................................................................................................... 141 1. Preparing a Graphic Logo Bitmap for an SPS-300 Series ................................... 141 2. Use the PC Utility to Convert the Image ............................................................. 142 3. Copy the Images to an SD Card .......................................................................... 143 4. Load the Images to the Register .......................................................................... 143 Flash ROM Updates............................................................................................................... 144 Flash ROM Update by SD ....................................................................................... 144 Flash ROM update via PC by Flash Utility ............................................................. 145 Program Mode Programming
149 Default Programming ............................................................................................................ 149 Descriptor Programming Methods ......................................................................................... 149 Program Overlay Method ........................................................................................ 149 Descriptor Code Method ......................................................................................... 151 Program Mode Menu ............................................................................................................. 153 PLU Programming ................................................................................................................. 154 To Add/Modify PLU ............................................................................................... 154 PLU Options - Reference Information .................................................................... 156 To Delete PLU ......................................................................................................... 159 Group Programming .............................................................................................................. 162 Group Programming - Reference Information ........................................................ 163 Sales Tax Programming ......................................................................................................... 165 Programming a VAT (Value Added Tax) ............................................................... 166 Programming an Add-On Tax Rate Percentage ...................................................... 167 Programming a Tax Table ....................................................................................... 168 Programming a Canadian GST ................................................................................ 171 System Option Programming (for v01.011 and later) ........................................................... 172 System Options - Reference Information ................................................................ 174 Price Embedded Barcode Format .......................................................................................... 179 Print Option Programming (for v01.011 and later) ............................................................... 180 iv • Contents
SPS-300
Print Options - Reference Information .................................................................... 182 Currency Symbol Programming ............................................................................................ 187 Clerk Programming ............................................................................................................... 188 Clerk Programming - Reference Information .......................................................... 189 Function Key Programming .................................................................................................. 190 NON ADD # / NO SALE ........................................................................................ 191 % 1 ~ 5 .................................................................................................................... 193 ADD CHECK (Tray Total) ..................................................................................... 196 CANCEL ................................................................................................................. 198 CASH ...................................................................................................................... 199 CHARGE 1 ~ 8 ....................................................................................................... 201 CHECK (Cheque) CASHING - CHKCASH .......................................................... 203 CHECK (Cheque) ENDORSEMENT - CHKENDOR ........................................... 204 CHECK (Cheque) ................................................................................................... 205 CHECK # (for Account Management) .................................................................... 207 CURRENCY CONVERSION 1 ~ 4 - CONV 1 ~ 4................................................ 209 EAT-IN - EATIN TAKE OUT - TKOUT DRIVE THROUGH - DVTHR ........... 210 ERROR CORRECT - ERRCORR .......................................................................... 211 FOOD STAMP SUBTOTAL - F/S SUB ................................................................ 212 FOOD STAMP TENDER - F/S TEND................................................................... 213 FUNCTION LOOK UP(FLU) #1 ~ 2 - FUNCLK1 ~ 2 .......................................... 215 GUEST (for Account Management) ........................................................................ 217 PRICE LEVEL 1 ~ 5 - LEVEL 1 ~ 5 ...................................................................... 218 MACRO 1 ~ 10, 11 ~ 20 (Program Screen Added in FlashROM v1.011) ............. 219 MDSE RETURN ..................................................................................................... 220 MODIFIER 1 ~ 5 - MOD1 ~ 5 ................................................................................ 221 PREVIOUS BALANCE - PBAL ............................................................................ 224 PAID OUT 1 ~ 3 - PO1 ~ 3..................................................................................... 225 PRINT CHECK - PRINT CHK (for Account Management - Soft Check) .............. 226 PROMOTION - PROMO ....................................................................................... 227 RECEIVED ON ACCOUNT 1 ~ 3 - RA 1 ~ 3 ....................................................... 228 SCALE .................................................................................................................... 229 SERVICE (New Balance for Account Management) .............................................. 230 SUBTOTAL ............................................................................................................ 232 TABLE # - TABLE ................................................................................................. 233 TARE ...................................................................................................................... 234 TAX EXEMPT - TAXEXMT ................................................................................. 235 TIME IN/OUT......................................................................................................... 236 TIP ........................................................................................................................... 237 VALIDATION ........................................................................................................ 238 VOID ITEM - VOID ............................................................................................... 239 WASTE ................................................................................................................... 240 FINALISE (for Account Management) ................................................................... 241 PLU LOOKUP 1 ~ 15 (Program Screen Added in FlashROM v1.011) ................. 242 Logo Descriptor ..................................................................................................................... 243 Preamble .................................................................................................................. 244 Postamble ................................................................................................................ 245 Endorsement Message ............................................................................................. 246 Financial Report ...................................................................................................... 247 Clerk Report ............................................................................................................ 249 Mix & Match Name ................................................................................................ 251 NLU Code Number (Keyboard PLU’s) ................................................................................. 252 Download Programs .............................................................................................................. 253 To All Registers in IRC Network ............................................................................ 253 To Selected Register(s) in IRC Network ................................................................. 254 SPS-300
Contents • v
Clerk In/Out ........................................................................................................................... 256 PLU Stock .............................................................................................................................. 257 Drawer Limit.......................................................................................................................... 258 Check Change Limit .............................................................................................................. 258 Time & Date .......................................................................................................................... 259 Tare Weight ........................................................................................................................... 259 Macro ..................................................................................................................................... 260 Programming a New Macro .................................................................................... 261 Editing an Existing Macro ....................................................................................... 262 Machine No. .......................................................................................................................... 263 Training Mode Password ....................................................................................................... 263 Program Scan ......................................................................................................................... 264 Sample Reports
267 Financial ................................................................................................................................ 267 Time ....................................................................................................................................... 271 PLU ........................................................................................................................................ 272 Clerk ...................................................................................................................................... 273 Individual Clerk ..................................................................................................................... 274 Groups ................................................................................................................................... 275 Stock ...................................................................................................................................... 276 Clerk Time Report ................................................................................................................. 277 Check File .............................................................................................................................. 278 Appendix
279 System Option Programming (for v01.010 and earlier) ........................................................ 279 System Options - Reference Information ................................................................ 281 Print Option Programming (for v01.010 and earlier) ............................................................ 287 Print Options - Reference Information .................................................................... 288 Glossary of Terms
vi • Contents
293 SPS-300
Introduction
About the SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Registers
Congratulations! You have selected a very flexible electronic cash register designed for years of
reliable service. SPS-300 will fit many shops and restaurants, providing fast transaction processing,
security, and detailed sales information.
The SPS-300 features a unique operator screen that allows you to view itemized transaction
information, as well as providing on screen programming that is simple and easy to use. The
keyboard has 150/98 individual key locations. All locations are programmable so that your dealer can
customize the keyboard to fit your needs exactly.
Single Printer Station
(Receipt Printer)
Two Printer Stations
(Receipt and Journal Printers)
SPS-320
Receipt Printer
Flat Keyboard
SPS-340
Receipt and Journal Printers
Flat Keyboard
SPS-325
Receipt Printer
Raised Keyboard
SPS-345
Receipt and Journal Printers
Raised Keyboard
Flat Keyboard
(150 Buttons)
Raised Keyboard
(91/98 buttons)
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Introduction • 1
Using This Manual
This manual provides you with a means to use your SAM4s cash register to its fullest potential. It is
divided into eight sections:
•
Introduction - the section you are reading now; provides a basic idea about the register and
how to use this manual.
•
Getting Started - provides quick start steps to help you get up and running for basic
applications.
•
Operations - guides you through the basic operation sequences.
•
Management Mode (X Mode) Functions - Manager procedures, including X reports are
detailed here.
•
Reset Report Mode (Z Mode) Functions - Z (reset) reports are detailed.
•
S-Mode Programming - provides instructions for secure programming – usually done by
the installing dealer prior to installation.
•
P-Mode Programming - provides complete programming instructions, including PLU,
function key programs, and system options. This section is recommended for use by
storeowners and managers. Call your SAM4s dealer if you find you need programming
assistance.
•
Sample Reports - provides a sample of each register report.
These SAM4s Cash Registers allows many different user applications. This manual was written with
this in mind. Although we have tried to touch on all available options, your specific application may
differ.
If you have questions concerning the configuration of your Sam4S Cash Register, contact your
authorised SAM4s dealer.
Using Flowcharts
Flowcharts are used to supplement step-by-step instructions throughout this manual. For example, the
following flowchart describes how to register $1.00 into the PLU1 key:
1
0
0
PLU #1
This flowchart means:
1. Press numeric key 1.
2. Press numeric key 0.
3. Press numeric key 0.
4. Press PLU #1.
Follow the flowchart from left to right, pressing the keys in the order they are shown. Numeric
keypad entries are shown as square keys. PLU and function keys are shown as rectangular keys.
2 • Introduction
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Basic Features and Functions
LCD Operator Display
The SPS-300 Series come with a liquid crystal screen, allowing you to view up to 8 lines of
information with up to 32 characters per line. The display is backlighted and view angle is adjustable
to provide excellent visibility, regardless of lighting conditions.
When the control lock is in the OFF position, the message OFF MODE is displayed and the register
can not be operated. When the control lock is in the REG or VOID positions the appropriate
message, VOID MODE or REGISTER MODE is displayed with the message "CLOSED". You
must sign on a clerk to remove the "CLOSED message and begin operation. When the control lock is
in the X, Z, PGM or SM positions, the appropriate menu is displayed.
OFF
REG
REGISTER MODE
██████████
█ CLOSED █
██████████
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Introduction • 3
VOID
VOID MODE
██████████
█ CLOSED █
██████████
MANAGER / X
MANAGER MODE
0.MANAGER OPERATION
1.X REPORTS
2.DECLARATION
3.REG. PRINT FORMAT
4.STOP RECEIPT PRINTING
5.STOP JOURNAL PRINTING
6.TRAIN MODE
È
The symbol on the
corner indicates that
there are more
options.
♦ Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the MANAGER MODE menu:
MANAGER MODE
7.E.J. OPERATION
8.NOT FOUND PLU
Ç
RESET REPORT / Z
RESET REPORT MODE
0.Z REPORTS
1.RESET E.J
2.PC COMMUNICATION
3.MIX & MATCH PROGRAM
4.MIX & MATCH SCAN
5.PLU LOOKUP PROGRAM
6.AGE VERIFICATION
È
♦ Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the RESET REPORT MODE menu:
RESET REPORT MODE
7.RESET NOT FOUND PLU
4 • Introduction
Ç
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
PGM
PROGRAM MODE
0.PLU
1.GROUP
2.SALES TAX
3.SYSTEM OPTION
4.PRINT OPTION
5.FUNCTION KEYS
6.CLERK
È
♦ Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the PROGRAM MODE menu:
PROGRAM MODE
7.LOGO DESCRIPTIOR
8.NLU CODE# PROGRAM
9.DOWNLOAD PROGRAMS
00.MORE
Ç
♦ Press 00 to view the MORE PROGRAMS menu:
PROGRAM MODE
0.CLERK IN/OUT
1.PLU STOCK
2.DRAWER LIMIT
3.CHECK CHANGE LIMIT
4.TIME & DATE
5.TARE WEIGHT
6.MACRO
page2 È
♦ Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the PROGRAM MODE page 2 menu:
PROGRAM MODE
7.MACHINE NO.
8.PC SCHEDULE TIME
9.TRAINING MODE P/W
00.SCAN
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
page2 Ç
Introduction • 5
SM
SERVICE MODE
0.H/W TEST
1.CLEAR ALL TOTALS
2.CLEAR GRAND TOTAL
3.CLEAR PLU FILE
4.FLASHROM INFORMATION
5.MEMORY ALLOCATION
6.KEY ASSIGNMENT
È
♦ Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the SERVICE MODE menu:
SERVICE MODE
7.IRC OPTIONS
8.RS232C PORT
9.SD CARD OPERATION
6 • Introduction
Ç
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
VFD Customer Display
The rear display is a 10 digit florescent display that allows your customer to monitor the transaction
and view the sale total. The rear display can be turned horizontally for easy customer viewing.
Rear Display Information
Item Count
Amount
The number of times an item has been repeated is displayed
The amount of the item, subtotal or total, is displayed in the
rightmost portion of the display
Rear Display Message
RPT
Change Due
Negative Entry
Subtotal
Total of Sale
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Introduction • 7
Control Lock and Keys
SPS-300 Series has a control lock in order to access following control lock positions.
The control lock has 7 positions, accessed with 5 keys. Each ECR is shipped with two full sets of
keys.
VOID Use to void (correct) items outside of a sale.
OFF
VOID
REG
X
Z
P
OFF
The register is inoperable.
REG
Use for normal registrations.
X Use to read register reports.
Z Use to read register reports and reset totals to zero.
P
S
Use to program the register.
S
The S position is a hidden position reserved for
dealer access.
Before performing any operations in Register Mode a clerk must be signed on. See “Clerk SignOn/Sign-Off” for a description of clerk operations.
Control Keys
SPS-300 Series includes two sets of keys that may be used to access the following control
lock positions.
Key
Positions Accessible
OFF
REG
Keys Removable from
√
√
REG Key
√
√
8 • Introduction
VOID
X
Z
PGM
VD Key
√
√
√
√
Z Key
√
√
√
√
√
P Key
√
√
√
√
√
√
C Key
√
√
√
√
√
√
S
√
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Keyboards
SPS-320/340 Keyboard
The SPS-320/340 keyboard includes 150 key positions with the default legends and key
assignments as shown below. This configuration has 100 keyboard NLU locations. The
keyboard legend sheet can be replaced by lifting the protective plastic cover.
Programmable key locations are shown with a bold border.
NOTE: NLU - Number Look Up. Preset PLU or open price entry PLU.
1
11
21
31
41
51
61
71
81
91
2
12
22
32
42
52
62
72
82
92
3
13
23
33
43
53
63
73
83
93
4
14
24
34
44
54
64
74
84
94
5
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85
6
16
26
36
46
56
66
76
7
17
27
37
47
57
67
8
18
28
38
48
58
9
19
29
39
49
10
20
30
40
50
RECEIPT JOURNAL ERRO
R
FEED FEED*
VOID
CLERK
%1
RA
PO
# / NS RETURN
%2
TAKE
OUT
EAT
IN
DRIVE
CANCEL
THRU
%3
CHECK
TABLE PRINT
SERVICE
#
#
CHECK
95
FUNC
LOOKUP
1
PAGE
PAGE
YES/NO
CONV
UP
DOWN
1
86
96
FUNC
LOOKUP CLEAR
2
77
87
97
MACRO
1
68
78
88
98
59
69
79
89
60
70
80
90
PLU
X/TIME
ADD
CHECK
7
8
9
CHARGE
1
MACRO
2
4
5
6
CHECK
99
MACRO
3
1
2
3
SUBTL
100
MACRO
4
0
00
y
CASH
FUNCTION
LOOK-UP 1 MENU
FUNCTION
LOOK-UP 2 MENU
1. CANCEL
2. MDSE RETURN
3. RA1
4. PO1
5. TIP
6. TAX EXMT
7. CONV1
8. TIME IN/OUT
1. CHARGE1
2. CHARGE2
3. CHARGE3
4. CHARGE4
5. CHARGE5
6. CHARGE6
7. CHARGE7
8. CHARGE8
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Introduction • 9
SPS-320/340 (150 Buttons)Alpha Keyboard Overlay
RECEIPT JOURNAL
FEED FEED*
’
”
<
>
-
+
=
:
?
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
(
)
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
;
CLEAR
PLU
X/TIME
Z
X
C
V
B
N
M
,
.
/
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
SUBTL
0
00
y
CASH
BACK
CAPS DOUBLE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE CAPS DOUBLE
SPACE
NOTE: * The JOURNAL FEED key is replaced with PRICE INQ. key on SPS-320 (150
Buttons)
10 • Introduction
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
SPS-325/345 Keyboard
The SPS-325/345 keyboard includes 91 (or 98) key positions with the default legends and
key assignments as shown below. This configuration has 56 keyboard NLU locations. The
keyboard legend label can be replaced by removing the protective plastic key cap.
Programmable key locations are shown with a bold border.
NOTE: NLU - Number Look Up. Preset PLU or open price entry PLU.
1
8
15
22
29
36
43
50
RECEIPT JOURNAL
# / NS
FEED FEED*
2
9
16
23
30
37
44
51
PAGE YES/NO PAGE
UP
DOWN
3
10
17
24
31
38
45
52
4
11
18
25
32
39
46
53
7
8
9
5
12
19
26
33
40
47
54
4
5
6
6
13
20
27
34
41
48
55
1
2
3
7
14
21
28
35
42
49
56
0
00
y
CLEAR
PLU
ERRO CLERK
R
VOID
FUNC
LOOKUP
1
FUNC
X/TIME CANCEL LOOKUP
2
CHECK
CHARGE
1
SUB TOTAL
CASH
TEND
SPS-325/345 (91 (or 98) Buttons) Alpha Keyboard Overlay
A
H
O
V
#
)
”
SPACE
B
I
P
W
$
-
,
SPACE
C
J
Q
X
%
+
.
CAPS
CLEAR
PLU
X/TIME
D
K
R
Y
^
=
/
DOUBLE
7
8
9
E
L
S
Z
&
;
<
BACK
SPACE
4
5
6
F
M
T
!
*
:
>
1
2
3
G
N
U
@
(
’
?
0
00
y
RECEIPT JOURNAL
FEED FEED*
SUB TOTAL
CASH
TEND
NOTE: * The JOURNAL FEED key is replaced with MACRO 1 key on SPS-325 (91 (or
98) Buttons) and not available on Alpha Keyboard Overlay.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Introduction • 11
Internal Printers
SPS-320/325 Models feature a single receipt printer.
Used as a Receipt Printer
Used as a Journal Printer
SPS-340/345 Models feature separate receipt and journal printers.
Printer Specifications
12 • Introduction
Paper:
57mm (2 ¼”) Thermal Paper
Paper Loading:
Drop-in Loading
Print Speed:
22 Lines per second
Auto Paper Cutter:
On Receipt Printer
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Communication Ports
SPS-300 Series has four communication ports standard - COM #1 and #2 are DB9 male serial port,
COM #3 is RJ-45 serial port and COM #4 is a female Virtual COM USB port. Also a Drawer Port for
the second cash drawer.
In the standard arrangement - Com #4 is a female Virtual COM USB (A type), the function is for PC
Communication only. A Virtual Com Port driver has to be installed in the PC to use the feature.
A LAN port for IRC network communication. Up to 16 registers can link together using Ethernet
switch hubs and communicate via the network.
Alternatively, a dual RJ-45 serial port module can replace the USB/Serial module is available for
modification.
Miscellaneous Hardware
•
Cash Drawer - Sturdy Metal Cash Drawer with removable 4 Bill/8 Coin drawer insert with
Media insert slot.
•
Clock - 24-hour real-time clock with automatic day and date change.
•
SD Card Reader - a facility to backup/restore programs and receipt image logos, backup
reports and flash firmware on the SPS-300 Series. Support up to 32GB SDHC.
NOTE: The bigger the SD card volume, the longer waiting time for SPS-300 Series to map
the storage area on the SD card.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Introduction • 13
Optional Hardware
•
PC Link.
•
Load cell scale.
•
Kitchen printer / Bill Printer / Slip Printer / Journal Printer.
•
Barcode scanner.
•
Pole Display.
•
Cash Drawer.
•
Magnetic Card Reader Module.
•
iButton system (Dallas Key Module with Dallas Keys).
•
CCTV link
Software Features
•
Up to 5 price levels for each PLU.
•
Up to 5 PLU modifier keys.
•
18 single space character programmable descriptors for PLUs , Function Keys, Clerk Names,
Group Names and Reporting Fields.
•
32 single space character by 6 lines programmable descriptors for both receipt header and
footer.
•
Pre- and Post- receipt graphic logos.
•
2000 PLU (Price LookUp) spaces are default, up to 15,000 PLU spaces are able to allocated
with 16MB memory. First 300 of them have been pre-programmed (PLU1 ~ PLU300) - with
Preset Price, Overridable Preset Price, Link to Tax1(10% GST). On SPS-320/340, PLU1 ~
PLU100 are on the Keyboard for direct registrations.
•
99 PLU Group totals.
•
Up to 99 clerks with separate report totals.
•
200 lines of receipt buffer for item registration.
•
Link up to 16 registers together to IRC Communication.
•
15 PLU Lookup windows to allocate up to 8 PLUs per PLU Lookup window.
•
2 Function Key Lookup windows to allocate up to 8 Function Keys per Function Key Lookup
window.
14 • Introduction
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Getting Started
Australian / New Zealand Default Programming
•
All keyboard PLUs are Taxable by GST (Tax1), Preset Price and Overridable on Preset
Price, without entry limits by default status programming of "400000000".
•
The default program is set to 10.000% GST (VAT) on Tax 1 and the description is set to
GST already.
•
Descriptor programming method is preset to Alpha Overlay method.
Getting Started Steps
Using the Quick Start Instructions provided here you can configure your register for use in your retail
store. Basic setup instructions include: programming prices, descriptors, and loading a tax percentage.
Your Sam4S ECR is now fully functional for many basic-use applications.
Detailed programming steps are found in P-Mode Programming section of this manual. A qualified
dealer will survey your needs and deliver a more sophisticated program. Security options set as
needed, receipt messages/logos and other commonly used features can be deployed. Dealers will
normally charge a program/installation fee for this service.
Steps In this chapter:
1. Unpacking
2. Installing the Paper
3. Clearing All Memory
NOTE: When an SPS-300 Series cash register is brand new from the box, the register will
need a Memory All Clear to reset with default Australian program. Please see
Service Mode Programming -> Memory All Clear for detail.
4. Clerk sign-on/off
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Getting Started • 15
Unpacking
1. Unpack and unwrap the cash register.
2. Located in the packing are the following items:
•
Paper roll:
=> SPS-320/325: 1 roll of paper,
=> SPS-340/345: 2 rolls of paper
•
1 paper spindle,
•
2 sets of control keys,
•
Operation and Program Manual,
3. Remove the cardboard protectors from the cash drawer.
4. Plug the register into a grounded outlet (three prong), have the mode keys ready for use.
16 • Getting Started
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Installing the Paper
SPS-320/325 - Single Station Printer
The SPS-320/325 models are equipped with single printer for receipt printing. Paper loading for
these models is shown below:
1. Remove the printer cover.
2. Push the blue cap lever and then lift up to open the paper cover.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Getting Started • 17
3. Ensure that the paper is being fed from the bottom of the roll and then close the paper
cover slowly until it locks firmly.
4. Pass the leading edge of the paper through the cutter slot. Tear off the excess paper.
Replace the printer cover.
SPS-340/345 - Two Station Printer
The SPS-340/345 models are equipped with separate printers for receipt and journal printing. Paper
loading for these models is shown below:
1. Remove the printer cover.
18 • Getting Started
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
2. Push the blue cap lever and then lift up to open the paper cover.
3. Ensure that the paper is being fed from the bottom of the roll and then close the paper
cover slowly until it locks firmly
4. Pass the leading edge of the paper through the cutter slot. Tear off the excess paper.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Getting Started • 19
5. Push the blue cap lever and then lift up to open the journal paper cover.
6. Ensure that the paper is being fed from the bottom of the roll and then close the paper
cover slowly until it locks firmly.
7. If you wish to use the printer to print a sales journal, insert the paper into the paper takeup spool. Wind the paper two or three turns around the spool shaft and install the spool in
the mount and insure that the paper is being fed from the bottom of the roll.
20 • Getting Started
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Memory Clear
Initial Clear (Status Clear)
CAUTION: Do not share this information with unauthorized users. Distribute the S Mode
and/or P Mode key only to those you may want to perform this function.
The initial clear function allows you to exit any register activity and return to a beginning or
cleared state. Any transaction that is in progress will be exited and totals for that transaction will not
be updated. You will not lose your programs and settings!
Here are some reasons you may want to perform an initial clear:
•
The register is in an unknown state, and you wish to exit the current program or transaction
without following normal procedures.
•
You have performed a function that includes a compulsory activity and you wish to bypass
the compulsion.
•
An initial clear may be necessary as part of servicing, or troubleshooting.
To Perform an Initial Clear:
1. Turn the power switch located on the right side of the register to the OFF position..
2. Turn the control lock to the PGM position.
3. For All Models (SPS-320/325/340/345), press and hold the button position where the
SUBTOTAL (SUBTL) button is located on the default keyboard layout.
↑ SPS-320/340
↑ SPS-325/345
4. While continuing to hold the SUBTOTAL (SUBTL) button, turn the power switch to the
ON position.
5. After the BEEP, release SUBTOTAL (SUBTL) button. The display now shows
INITIAL CLEAR SERVICE.
INITIAL CLEAR SERVICE
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Getting Started • 21
6. Then Please Wait .... and then message about Ethernet Link test result prints.
Please Wait ....
When IRC network is functioning, a “**
ETHERNET LINK SUCCESS!!! **”
will print.
Receipt Example:
** ETHERNET LINK SUCCESS!!! **
or…
When test result fails, an “**
ETHERNET LINK FAIL!!! **” will
print. This is when the register is either a
Standalone unit, or there is a problem on
the IRC network.
Receipt Example:
** ETHERNET LINK FAIL!!! **
7. Then INITIAL CLEAR OK ! prints to mark the completion of initial clear procedure.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
================================
INITIAL CLEAR OK !
================================
CLERK 00
000002
00000
8. The display now shows PROGRAM MODE CLOSED.
NOTE: Please see Clerk Sign-On/Sign-Off for detail when CLOSED appears on the
display after IRC Status Test.
22 • Getting Started
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Clerk Sign-On/Sign-Off
The number of clerks available is determined by memory allocation. See Memory Allocation in the
Service Mode Programming chapter.
You can choose a Push button or Code entry (keyboard code, MSR or iButton) clerk system:
Push Entry
The simplest clerk system is the push button system. This is also the default system; the register will
operate this way unless it is programmed otherwise. You simply press the CLERK key to sign on and
0 then CLERK key to sign off the clerk. You can operate only one clerk when you choose this
method.
See options CLERK ENTRY and CLERK ASSIGNED WHEN CLERK KEY IS PUSHED 1-10)
in 3.System Option Æ pg(page) 1 in the Program Mode Programming chapter.
Code Entry
You can provide maximum security in a multiple clerk system with the code entry system. Enter the
clerk secret code, then press the CLERK key to sign on the register.
See options CLERK ENTRY in 3.System Option Æ pg(page) 1 in the Program Mode
Programming chapter. Also Clerk in the Program Mode Programming chapter to program Clerk
secret code.
Sign-Off Clerk
You can sign off a clerk by pressing 0, then press the CLERK key with default clerk system.
Stay Down or Pop-up Clerk
You can also select stay down or pop-up mode for clerk operation:
Stay down means that once a clerk is signed on, the same clerk will remain signed on until the clerk
signs off. A stay down clerk system might be used when only one operator uses the register at a time,
and a different operator begins when a work shift is changed.
Pop-up means that the clerk is automatically signed off in the end of each transaction. Therefore, to
begin a transaction, you must first sign a clerk on. A pop-up clerk system might be used in a
department store, where several clerks might use the register during the same shift and clerk sales
information is required.
See options CLERK IS in 3.System Option Æ pg(page) 2 in the Program Mode Programming
chapter.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Getting Started • 23
Clerk Sign On Instructions
When a clerk is not signed on, the message "CLOSED" is shown on the display. The current clerk
must be signed off before a new clerk can be signed on.
Push Button
CLERK
Code Entry
CLERK
•
Clerk Code (up to 9 digits)
•
Swipe clerk card
•
Attached iButton (Dallas key)
Clerk Sign Off Instructions
•
0
CLERK
•
Swipe clerk card
•
Removed iButton (Dallas key)
24 • Getting Started
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions
Function Keys Description
Function keys are listed in alphabetical order. Some of the keys described below are not included on
the default keyboard. See “Service Mode Æ 6.KEY ASSIGNMENT” to add or change
programmable keys.
KEY
Description
NLUs (1 - 300)
A Number LookUp. Use to link to a PLU#. The default program presets NLU#1
links to PLU#1, NLU#2 links to PLU#2… NLU#300 links to PLU#300. This
linkage is programmable. NLU#1 to #100 are preset to default keyboard layout.
When total number of PLUs is equal or less than 300, if more items are needed to
allocate on the keyboard, just allocate more NLU keys to the keyboard, or, if
different item is needed to allocate on the keyboard, just allocate different NLU key
to the keyboard. Please see Service Mode Æ 6.KEY ASSIGNMENT for detail.
When number of PLUs is greater than 300, and different item is needed to allocate
on the keyboard, you only needs to link the item (PLU#) to an NLU that already
locates on the keyboard. Please see Program Mode Æ 8.NLU CODE#
PROGRAM for detail.
NUMERIC
KEYPAD: (0 - 9,
00, DECIMAL)
#/NS
(Non Add # /
No Sale)
Use the numeric keypad to enter amounts and other numeric values.
The decimal key is used for decimal multiplication, when setting or entering
fractional percentage discounts, or when programming fractional tax rates. Do not
use the decimal key when making dollar amount entries into PLUs.
Press #/NS as “No Sale” to open the cash drawer when you have not already started
a transaction. Also, #/NS can be used as “Non Add #” to print any non-adding
number (up to 9 digits) on the printer paper by pressing this button after the number
entered.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 25
KEY
Description
% (1 - 5)
Up to five % keys may be placed on the keyboard. Each % key is set with a specific
function, function combined with percentage rate (%) or dollar amount
(AMOUNT), and for item (ITEM) or for sale (SALE), and is a discount (NEG) or
a surcharge (POS). The percentage rate or dollar amount may be entered (OPEN) or
preprogrammed (PRESET).
Or the % keys can be programmed with a negative open or preset price, thus acting
as coupon keys.
X/TIME
(PRT SCREEN)
Enter a quantity, then press the X/TIME key to enter multiple items. Also use to
enter “split pricing” items, such as 1 item at 3 for $.89.
When pressed directly, the X/TIME key will cause the information displayed on the
screen to be printed. (The print screen function is allowed or disallowed by a system
option. See Program Mode Æ 3.SYSTEM OPTION Æ pg 8 (page 8) Æ
ALLOW PRINT SCREEN ON X/TIME KEY)
ADD CHECK
Use ADD CHECK key to combine individual trays (such as in a cafeteria situation)
that will be paid together. Each tray subtotal can advance the consecutive number,
depending on programming.
CANCEL
Press CANCEL to void (or erase) a transaction without updating PLU, or function key
totals. The cancel function may only be used prior to tendering. Once tendering begins,
the cancel function may no longer be used. The CANCEL key corrects the appropriate
totals and counters and the Financial report records total of transactions cancelled.
CASH
(ENTER)
Use CASH key to calculate the sale total including tax, finalises the sale, and opens
the cash drawer. Change computation is allowed by entering an amount before
pressing the CASH key. The cash drawer will open only if the amount tendered is
equal to or greater than the total amount of the sale. Post tendering is also available
should a second change calculation be necessary. Re-enter the tendered amount and
press the CASH key to show the new change computation.
Press the CASH key a second time to issue a buffered receipt (up to 200 lines)
when the Receipt ON/OFF function is OFF.
The CASH key doubles as an ENTER key. When you are performing manager
functions, or programming, use the ENTER key to advance to the next item or
screen.
CHARGE (1 - 8)
(for EFTPOS)
Use CHARGE key to finalise charge sales. Calculates the sale total including tax,
finalises the sale, and opens the cash drawer. Change computation is allowed by
entering an amount before pressing the CHARGE key. The cash drawer will open
only if the amount tendered is equal to or greater than the total amount of the sale.
Change issued will be subtracted from the cash-in-drawer total.
CHECK
CASHING
Use CHECK CASHING key to exchange a check for cash. Cash-in-drawer and checkin-drawer totals are adjusted.
CHECK
ENDORSEMENT
Use CHECK ENDORSE key to print a check endorsement message on an optional
slip printer. The endorsement message has to be programmed prior to use this feature.
26 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
KEY
Description
CHECK
(CHEQUE)
Use CHECK key to finalise check sales. Calculates the sale total including tax,
finalises the sale, and opens the cash drawer. Change computation is allowed by
entering an amount before pressing the CHECK key. The cash drawer will open
only if the amount tendered is equal to or greater than the total amount of the sale.
Change issued will be subtracted from the cash-in-drawer total.
CHECK #
(for Account #)
The CHECK # key is used to begin a new, or access an existing balance (hard
check) or itemised bill (soft check) account.
Check track numbers that are entered manually may be set at a fixed length of one to
nine digits (preceding 0s will be ignored). Check track numbers assigned
automatically will begin with #1.
Existing checks are accessed by entering the check track number and pressing the
CHECK # key.
CHECK # key has the setting needed to utilise Drive Through system along with
P/BAL key. (IRC Settings may also need in multi-registers environment.)
CLEAR
(ESC)
Press CLEAR key to clear numeric errors made on keyboard prior to pressing the
registration key. Also press to stop the error alarm when incorrect entries are made.
The CLEAR key doubles as an ESC (Escape) key. When you are performing
manager functions, or programming, use the ESC key to back up, or return to the
previous screen.
CLERK
The register will not operate in VOID, REG, X, Z modes unless a clerk has been signed
on. Clerk sign-on is accomplished by “direct” or “secret code” sign-on.
All entries made on the register will report to one of the clerk totals. When a clerk is
signed on, all entries following will add to that clerk’s total until another clerk is signed
on. However, a clerk cannot be changed in the middle of a transaction.
To sign a clerk off, thereby displaying the “CLOSED” message on the display, enter 0,
and then press the CLERK key. This disables the register until another clerk is signed
on. The current clerk must first be signed off before another clerk may be signed on.
CONV (1 - 4)
(Currency
Conversion)
The currency conversion function, allowed after subtotal, converts and displays the new
subtotal at a pre-programmed exchange rate. Tendering is allowed after using the
currency conversion function. Change is calculated and issued in home currency. The
amount of foreign currency tendered is stored in a separate total on the Financial report,
but not added to the drawer total.
EAT-IN
TAKE OUT
DRIVE THRU
Eat-In, Take Out and Drive Thru are subtotal functions. In areas that have different
tax rules for eat-in and take out sales, the EAT-IN, TAKE OUT and DRIVE
THRU keys can be programmed to automatically charge or exempt taxes.
Sales may not be split between Eat-In, Take Out and Drive Thru.
The EAT-IN, TAKE OUT and DRIVE THRU keys maintain separate totals on the
Financial report and will also print at the top of KP dockets.
DRIVE THRU feature will need settings on CHECK # and need P/BAL key to
work. (IRC Settings may also need in multi-registers environment.)
ERROR
CORRECT
Press ERROR CORRECT key to void (or erase) the last item entered.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 27
KEY
Description
F/S SHIFT
When pressed before a PLU entry, the F/S SHIFT key reverses the preprogrammed
food stamp status of the PLU. For example, an item not food stamp eligible can be
made food stamp eligible.
F/S SUB
Displays the amount of the sale that is food stamp eligible.
F/S TEND
Use to tender food stamps for eligible sales.
FUNCLK 1 - 2
(FUNCTION
LOOKUP)
Press a FUNCLK (Function Lookup) key to display a list of functions that may not
be located on the keyboard. Total of 8 functions can be listed on a function look up
screen.
GUEST
Use to enter the count of guests served as part of a guest check. The entry of a guest
count can be enforced when opening a guest check, or for all transactions.
MACRO 1 - 10, 11
- 20
Macro keys may be programmed to record, and then later perform, up to 50
keystrokes (exclude the MODE selection).
For example, a macro key could be set to tender (preset tender) a common currency,
such as $5 into the cash key.
MDSE RETURN
Used MDSE RETURN to return or refund merchandise. Returning an item will also
return any tax which may have been applied.
MODIFIER 1 - 5
The MODIFIER key alters the next PLU registered, either by changing the code
number of the PLU so that a different item is registered, or by adding the modifier
descriptor (and not changing the code of the subsequent PLU.)
PBAL
Use PBAL key to enter the amount of an outstanding balance. The PBAL key will
take the recall function if the drive thru feature is enabled in CHECK # key
programming.
Also PBAL key can be used in Drive Through system to recall Guest Checks automatically from the lowest Check #.
PAGE DOWN
When transactions contain more items than can be displayed on the screen at one
time, press the PAGE DOWN key to view items at the end of the transactions. Look
for the Ç, ↕ and È arrows on the top-right corner of the screen.
PAGE UP
When transactions contain more items than can be displayed on the screen at one
time, press the PAGE UP key to view items at the beginning of the transactions.
Look for the Ç, ↕ and È arrows on the top-right corner of the screen.
PO 1 - 3
(PAID OUT)
The PO (Paid Out) key is use to record money taken from the register to pay invoices,
etc. The amount paid out, depends on tendered method, will subtracts from its total. The
PO operations are allowed outside of a sale only.
PAPER FEED
Advances the receipt printer paper one line, or continuously until the key is released.
PLU
The PLU key is used to register Price Look-Ups by number entry. PLUs can be
programmed open or preset, and positive or negative.
PLU LOOKUP
1 - 15
Use PLU LOOKUP keys to view a list of up to 8 PLUs on the display. With the
PLU list in view, a PLU can be registered by pressing the digit representing the
PLU. Up to fifteen PLU LOOKUP keys can be placed on the keyboard.
PRICE INQUIRY
Use to display the price of a PLU without registering the item.
28 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
KEY
Description
LEVEL 1 - 5
(PRICE LEVEL)
PRICE LEVEL keys shift the price PLU that is being registered. Levels can be stay
down ; pop-up after each item to register, for example large, medium or small soft
drink; pop-up after each transaction to register, for example, toppings of various
pizza sizes or member/non-member pricing. Depends on setting in MEMORY
ALLOCATION, there are up to 5 Levels.
PRINT CHK
(PRINT CHECK)
Use PRINT CHK (Print Check) key to print a guest check (soft check). The check
can be printed on an optional (RS-232C) printer, or can be printed on the receipt
printer. The PRINT CHECK key can be set to automatically service the check.
PROMO
The PROMO key allows you to account for promotional items, as in "buy two, get
one free". Pressing this key will remove an item's cost from the sale, but will include
the sale of the item in the item's sales counter.
RA 1 - 3
(RECD ON
ACCOUNT)
The RA (Received on Account) key is used to record media loaned to the cash
drawer, or payments received outside of a sale. The cash drawer will open. The
amount received, depending on tendered method, will add to its total. The RA
operations are allowed outside of a sale only.
SUBTOTAL
Use SUBTOTAL key to display subtotal of sale including tax. Must be pressed prior to
a sale discount or sale surcharge.
SCALE
Use SCALE key to make weight entries. When a scale is attached, press the scale
key to show the weight in the display, then press (or enter) a PLU to multiply the
weight times the price. When a scale is not attached, you can enter the weight (using
the decimal key for fractions). PLUs may be programmed to require an entry
through the scale key.
SERVICE
(New Balance)
Use SERVICE key to temporarily finalise Previous Balance or check tracking
transactions.
TABLE
Use TABLE key to enter a table number. You can enforce the entry of a table
number for guest check transactions, or for all transactions. If you are tracking guest
check balances, the balance can be recalled either by entering the check number or
the table number.
TARE
Tares are container weights. If you are using the scale function, you can preset up to
5 different tare weights. The tare can be subtracted automatically when a specific
PLU is registered, or manually inputting the tare number and pressing the TARE key
can subtract the tare. Tare #5 can be programmed for entering tare weights manually.
TAXEXMT
(TAX EXEMPT)
Press the TAXEXMT (Tax Exempt) key to exempt tax 1, tax 2, tax 3, and/or tax 4
from the entire sale.
TAX 1 - 4
(TAX SHIFT)
Press to reverse the programmed tax status of a PLU. For example, by pressing the
appropriate TAX SHIFT key prior to registering a taxable item, the item will be
sold without sales tax added.
TIME IN/OUT
Use to track hours worked by an employee, as would be done by a time clock.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 29
KEY
Description
TIP
The TIP key allows a gratuity to be added into a guest check payment before
FINALISE. The tip amount received, depends on tendered method, will deduct from
its total for the Clerk/Cashier closing the guest check.
The TIP key may be programmed as either a percentage or amount. If programmed
as a percentage, tax programming defines whether the percentage is calculated on
the net amount, or the amount after taxes.
VOID
(VOID ITEM)
Use VOID key to void (or erase) an item previously entered within a transaction,
then re-entering the item you wish to remove.
For void operations outside of a sale (Transaction Void), use the VOID position on the
control lock. The Financial report records totals for each type of void separately.
WASTE
The WASTE key allows control of inventory by accounting for items which must be
removed from stock due to spoilage, breakage or mistakes. Press the WASTE key
before entering wasted items, then press the WASTE key again to finalize. The
WASTE key may be under manager control, requiring the control lock to be in the
X position. The WASTE key is not allowed within a sale.
YES/NO
Press to toggle from Y (yes) to N (no) when selecting program options.
VALIDATION
Press the VALID key to initiate a single line validation on a separate form or piece of
paper. Any item registration, discount or payment may be validated. Note that an
optional printer with validation capability must be attached to the SPS-300 and
identified.
FINALISE
When partial payment, or pre-payment is needed, set option “REQUIRE TO
CLOSE CHECK” to Y will allow those features. Without pressing this function key,
the Guest Checks can be re-opened, receive payment then SERVICE again. When a
Guest Check is about to be finalise, press FINALISE key, then the account has to be
paid in full or over in order to close the account.
RCPT ON/OFF
(RECEIPT
ON/OFF)
Please note: This function key is still under development.
JFEED
(JOURNAL FEED)
(Two Printer
Stations models
only)
Use to switch receipt printer on/off. When OFF, no receipt will print during a sale.
(If the System Option ”Buffer Receipt” is set YES, a receipt can still be issued by
pressing CASH key the second time.)
Use JFEED (Journal Feed) key to advance the journal paper one line, or
continuously until the key is released.
INACTIVE
Use INACTIVE key to replace a button on the keyboard in order to disable the
button. When INACTIVE button is pressed, an error message will appear on the
display along with buzzing, press CLEAR key to clear the error message.
CASH OUT
Use to allow cash out function when EFTPOS function is enabled. 0(zero) amount
cash out will generate a sequence error. This function only allowed within a sale.
30 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Ethernet (IRC) Status Test
The SPS-300 Electronic Cash Register has a LAN port built-in for IRC (Inter Register
Communication) operation. An automatic IRC test has been designed during power up procedure.
While power up, you will see “Please Wait ….” on the display, after a while, a ticket will print from
receipt with the IRC test result.
Please Wait ....
When IRC network is functioning, a “**
ETHERNET LINK SUCCESS!!! **”
will print.
Receipt Example:
** ETHERNET LINK SUCCESS!!! **
or…
When test result fails, an “**
ETHERNET LINK FAIL!!! **” will
print. This is when the register is either a
Standalone unit, or there is a problem on
the IRC network.
Receipt Example:
** ETHERNET LINK FAIL!!! **
Trouble Shooting
For two unit IRC networks which two registers are linked with a crossover network cable, please
make both units power up at the same time. If test result is fail, please contact your dealer for further
examination.
For IRC network with a switch/router, please reboot all units within IRC network. For the unit(s)
have the fail test result, please contact your dealer for further examination.
NOTE: When IRC Test Result has been fail or connection has been lost, you have to switch the
power off then back on to run the IRC Test again after trying to rectify the problem. Until
the result been successful for all units, the IRC will not work.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 31
Operator Display Screen
The SPS-300 Electronic Cash Register has a liquid crystal display screen, providing up to 8 lines of
information with up to 20 characters per line. The display is backlit to provide excellent visibility,
regardless of lighting conditions. Display screen contrast may be adjusted with the PAGE UP and
PAGE DOWN keys. (in the REG or VOID control lock positions)
The multiple line screen lets you keep track of each item, as it is registered. For example:
1. When you are operating the register (in the REG or VOID control lock positions), you can
view a list of items that have been registered, as well as continuous tax and sale subtotals.
2. If an item is multiplied, or repeated, the display lists the quantity of the item sold.
NOTE: Only quantities up to 99 are displayed in the quantity field.
3. Up to six items can be displayed simultaneously. When the more than six items are registered,
the display lists the last six items sold.
4. You can scroll through long transactions with the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys. When
more than six items have been registered, you can press the PAGE UP key to view items
registered earlier in the sale. Press the PAGE DOWN key to return to a view of the items
registered later in the transaction.
5. If you make an error, the screen specifies the type of error.
Operator Display Example
Up to six items
can be displayed
simultaneously.
Tax and sale
subtotals are
updated with
each new item
entered
If an item is
multiplied, or
repeated, the
display lists the
quantity of items
here.
32 • Operating Instructions
REGISTER MODE
1 CHEESEBURGER T1
1 EXTRA CHEESE T1
1 EXTRA ONION T1
1 EXTRA LETTUCE T1
1 EXTRA SAUSE T1
TAX 0.00 SUBT
1 EXTRA CHEESE T1
1 EXTRA ONION T1
1 EXTRA LETTUCE T1
1 EXTRA SAUSE T1
1 CHIP LARGE T1
2 COKE 600ML T1
TAX 0.00 SUBT
3.95
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.00
5.45
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.00
7.00
4.00
16.45
When more than
six items have
been registered,
you can press
the PAGE UP
key to view the
items registered
earlier in the
sale.
When the more
than six items
are registered,
the display lists
the last six items
sold.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Clerk Time Keeping
Clerk time keeping is a standard feature of the SPS-300. Clerks can clock in and clock out at any
time, regardless of whether they are signed on to operate the register. (Clocking in and clocking out
are separate functions from signing on or signing off to operate the register.) You must assign secret
clerk codes to clock in or clock out. See "System Options" to set up your clerk system and see "Clerk
Programming" to assign a secret code.
In addition:
1. If a clerk forgets to sign in or sign out, or if sign in or out records need to be modified, these
corrections can be made by the appropriate authority in the program mode. See “Clerk
In/Out” in the “Program Mode Programming” chapter..
2. Clerk times can be read (CLERK TIME Report) in the X control lock position or reset in
the Z control lock position. See the "X-Mode" and/or "Z-Mode” chapters.
NOTE: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the function by
pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric digit corresponding
to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the
TIME IN/OUT function is function #8 on the function look up 1 menu, so to use the
TIME IN/OUT function, you would first press FUNCTION LOOK#1, then press the
numeric 8 key.
To Clock In/Out:
1. Turn the control lock to the REG position.
2. Any current transaction must be finalized before clocking in or out.
3. Press the TIME IN/OUT key (or, select the TIME IN/OUT function from one of the
function look up keys.)
TIME CLERK IN/OUT
ENTER SECRET CODE
AND PRESS CASH
4. Enter the secret code of the clerk that is to clock in, press ENTER (CASH). The display
will show the 3 most recent in and out records for the clerk, and the total time worked.
TIME CLERK IN/OUT
I
01/05/2012
O
01/05/2012
I
00/00/0000
O
00/00/0000
I
00/00/0000
O
00/00/0000
TIME WORKED :
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
08:30
17:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
08:30
Operating Instructions • 33
5. Repeat the procedure from step 1 to clock out.
6. The printer will print Time In and Time Out records as in the examples below:
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
================================
CLERK TIME IN
================================
CLERK 1
01
IN :
01/05/2012
08:30
CLERK 1
No.000011
00001
and then…
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 17:00
================================
CLERK TIME IN
================================
CLERK 1
01
OUT :
01/05/2012
17:00
CLERK 1
34 • Operating Instructions
No.000011
00001
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Receipt On and Off
A receipt is designed to be issued all the time after a transaction. When a receipt is not normally
issued, you can turn the receipt printing function off in X/Manager-Mode.
To turn off the receipt printer, turn mode lock to X mode,
MANAGER MODE
0.MANAGER OPERATION
1.X REPORTS
2.DECLARATION
3.REG. PRINT FORMAT
4.STOP RECEIPT PRINTING
5.STOP JOURNAL PRINTING
6.TRAIN MODE 7.E.J. OPERATION
Press 4 button, then YES/NO button to switch to Off, and then CASH button to exit.
REG. PRINTING ON/OFF
REGISTER PRINTING
IS CURRENTLY ON
REG. PRINTING ON/OFF
REGISTER PRINTING
IS CURRENTLY OFF
Æ
TO TURN OFF
PRESS YES AND CASH
TO TURN ON
PRESS YES AND CASH
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
***
TIME 08:30
REGISTER PRINTING OFF
CLERK 1
No.000011
***
00001
Or to turn the receipt printer back on, turn mode lock to X mode, press 4 button, then YES/NO button
to switch to On, and then CASH button to exit.
REG. PRINTING ON/OFF
REGISTER PRINTING
IS CURRENTLY OFF
REG. PRINTING ON/OFF
REGISTER PRINTING
IS CURRENTLY ON
Æ
TO TURN ON
PRESS YES AND CASH
TO TURN OFF
PRESS YES AND CASH
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
***
REGISTER PRINTING ON
CLERK 1
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
TIME 08:30
No.000011
***
00001
Operating Instructions • 35
Receipt on Request
If the receipt is off, you can still issue a receipt after the sale has been complete and before the next
transaction starts by pressing CASH button.
NOTE: This feature require 2 settings to be set correctly, which those two settings have been preset
to work for this feature. PGM-Mode, SYSTEM OPTION Æ pg 3 (page 3) set ALLOW
MULTUPLE RECEIPT to Y, and PGM-Mode, PRINT OPTION Æ pg 12 (page 12) set
BUFFER RECEIPT ISSUE WHEN RECEIPT IS ON to Y.
Printing a Receipt after the Sale
•
After the sale has been totalled, but before the next transaction is started, press CASH
button.
CASH
36 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Item Registrations
All registrations are accumulated into PLUs. Keyboard PLUS are fixed keys on the keyboard (like
traditional department keys) that access specific PLUs.
1. On the default keyboard, there are 63 Keyboard PLU keys and the PLU# assigned to the key
is the same, i.e. Keyboard PLU number one is PLU #1. However, through programming, you
can assign any PLU number you wish to any one of the 80 possible Keyboard PLU keys.
2. Traditional PLUs can also be registered by entering the PLU number and pressing the PLU
key.
3. If optional scanning is implemented, the PLU number corresponds to the barcode number and
a PLU is registered when an item is scanned.
As you make item registrations, you can follow your entries by viewing the display. Remember that
the sale and tax totals are updated automatically with each entry.
PLU Look-Up Keys and Function Look-Up Keys
On SPS-300 Series, there are two type of function keys has been introduced to utilise its 8 lines
display - 2 of the Function Look-Up keys and 15 of the PLU Look-Up keys.
For FUNCTION LOOK-UP #1 and FUNCTION LOOK-UP #2, each of those keys can contain a
list of up to 8 functions that can be used as if they were located on separate keys. For example:
1. If a function, such as CHARGE1, is located on a function look-up key, as it is on the default
keyboard, you can then access it by pressing the appropriate function look-up key, then
pressing the number on the numeric pad that represents the function, instead of pressing a key
on the keyboard.
2. If you need to make a numeric entry before a function that is located on a function look-up
key, first enter the amount, then press the function look-up key and press the number on the
numeric pad that represents the function you wish to select.
For PLU LOOK-UP (1 ~ 15), each of those keys can contain a list of up to 8 items that can be used
as if they were located on separated keys for item registration. For example:
1. If a item is located on a PLU look-up key, as it is on the default keyboard, you can then
access it by pressing the appropriate PLU look-up key, then pressing the number on the
numeric pad that represents the function, instead of pressing a key on the keyboard.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 37
Keyboard PLU Entry - Open Price / Preset Price Override
1. Enter an amount on the number pad. Do
not use the decimal key.
For example, for $2.99, enter:
2
9
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU1 T1
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
9
2. Press a PLU.
TIME 08:30
$2.99
$0.01
$3.00
$3.00
$0.27
No.000011
00001
For example, press PLU 1:
1
Keyboard PLU Entry - Preset Price
A preset PLU registers the price that was previously programmed for the PLU. See "PLU
Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to program preset prices.
1. Press a preset PLU.
For example, press PLU 5:
5
38 • Operating Instructions
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU5
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$1.29
$0.01
$1.30
$1.30
No.000012
00001
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Keyboard PLU Entry - Repeat
Open or preset price PLUs can be repeated as many times as necessary by pressing the same PLU
again. The number of times the item is repeated is shown on the display.
1. Enter an amount on the number pad. Do
not use the decimal key.
For example, for $2.99, enter:
2
9
9
2. Press a PLU.
For example, press PLU 1:
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU1 T1
PLU1 T1
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$2.99
$2.99
$0.02
$6.00
$6.00
$0.54
No.000013
00001
1
3. To register a second item exactly as the
first, press the PLU a second time.
For example, press PLU 1:
1
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 39
Keyboard PLU Entry - Multiplication
When several of the same items are to be entered into the same PLU, you can use multiplication. You
can enter a quantity (1 to 999.999) using the X/TIME key. You can multiply open or preset PLUs.
Receipt Example:
1. Enter the quantity of items being
purchased, and then press the X/TIME
key.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
For example, enter 4 on the numeric key
pad and press the X/TIME key:
4
X/TIME
2. Enter an amount on the number pad. Do
not use the decimal key.
TIME 08:30
[email protected] $ 1.99
PLU1 T1
$7.96
ROUND
-0.01
TOTAL
$7.95
CASH
$7.95
GST
$0.72
CLERK 1
No.000014
00001
For example, for $1.99, enter:
1
9
9
3. Press a PLU.
For example, press PLU 1:
1
Keyboard PLU Entry - Direct Multiplication with Preset Price
When “Direct Multiply” (System Option #18-1) is set to yes, you can multiply the preset price PLU
directly when number of items is up to 9. When “Direct Multiply more than one digit” (System
Option #20-1) is also set to yes, you can then multiply more than 9 items directly when PLU is
preset price.
Receipt Example:
1. Enter the quantity of items being
purchased.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
For example, enter 4 on the numeric key
pad.
4
2. Press a PLU.
TIME 08:30
[email protected] $ 1.99
PLU1 T1
$7.96
ROUND
-0.01
TOTAL
$7.95
CASH
$7.95
GST
$0.72
CLERK 1
No.000015
00001
For example, press PLU 1:
1
40 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Keyboard PLU Entry - Multiplication with Decimal Point
If you are selling goods by weight or by length etc., you can multiply a fraction of a unit. It is up to 3
digits after decimal places.
1. Enter the amount with the decimal point,
and then press the X/TIME key.
For example, for 3.75 meters of produce,
enter:
▪
3
7
5
X/TIME
2. Enter an amount on the number pad. Do
not use the decimal key.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
[email protected] $ 0.99
PLU1 T1
$3.71
ROUND
-0.01
TOTAL
$3.70
CASH
$3.70
GST
$0.34
CLERK 1
No.000016
00001
For example, if the price is $.99 per
meter, enter:
9
9
3. Press a PLU.
For example, press PLU 1:
1
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 41
Keyboard PLU Entry - Split Pricing
When items are priced in groups, i.e. 3 for $1.00, you can enter the quantity purchased and let the
register calculate the correct price.
Receipt Example:
1. Enter the quantity purchased, and then
press the X/TIME key.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
For example, enter:
2
X/TIME
2. Enter the quantity of the group price, and
then press the X/TIME key.
TIME 08:30
[email protected][email protected] $ 1.00
PLU1 T1
$0.67
ROUND
-0.02
TOTAL
$0.65
CASH
$0.65
GST
$0.06
CLERK 1
No.000017
00001
For example, if the items are priced 3 for
$1.00, enter:
3
X/TIME
3. Enter an amount on the number pad.
For example, if the items are priced 3 for
$1.00, enter:
1
0
0
4. Press a PLU key.
For example, press PLU 1:
1
Keyboard PLU Entry - Single Item
Immediately after registration Single Item PLUs automatically total as a cash sale. Use single item
PLUs for speedy one item sales. For example if you are selling admission tickets, and all ticket sales
are one item sales, you can use an open or preset PLU. After each registration, the drawer will
immediately open, and a separate transaction receipt is printed. See "PLU Programming" in the
"Program Mode Programming" chapter to program a single item PLU.
1. Press a single item preset PLU. (Or enter
a price and press a single item open PLU
key.)
For example, press PLU 6:
6
42 • Operating Instructions
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU6
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$1.29
$0.01
$1.30
$1.30
No.000018
00001
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Code PLU Entry - Open Price
If the PRESET status of a PLU is set to N (no), the PLU will operate as an open price PLU. See
"PLU Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to program PLU descriptors
and options.
1. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU
key.
For example, enter:
2
PLU
2. Enter an amount on the number pad. Do
not use the decimal key.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU2 T1
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$2.99
$0.01
$3.00
$3.00
$0.27
No.000019
00001
For example, for $2.99, enter:
2
9
9
3. Press the PLU key again.
PLU
Code PLU Entry - Preset Price / Single Item
1. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU
key.
For example, enter:
1
PLU
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU1 T1
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$1.29
$0.01
$1.30
$1.30
$0.12
No.000020
00001
Operating Instructions • 43
Code PLU Entry - Preset Price Override
If the OVERRIDE PRESET is set to Y (yes), the PLU is operating as a preset override PLU. See
"PLU Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to program PLU descriptors
and options.
Receipt Example:
1. Enter the quantity of items being
purchased, and then press the X/TIME
key, even there is only one item.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
For example, enter 1 on the numeric key
pad and press the X/TIME key:
1
X/TIME
2. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU
key.
TIME 08:30
[email protected] $ 2.99
PLU2 T1
$2.99
ROUND
$0.01
TOTAL
$3.00
CASH
$3.00
GST
$0.27
CLERK 1
No.000021
00001
For example, enter:
2
PLU
3. Enter an amount on the number pad. Do
not use the decimal key.
For example, for $2.99, enter:
2
9
9
4. Press the PLU key again.
PLU
Code PLU Entry - Repeat
Open or preset price PLUs can be repeated as many times as necessary by pressing PLU function key
again. The number of times the item is repeated is shown on the display.
Receipt Example:
1. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU
key.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
For example, enter:
1
PLU
2. To register a second item exactly as the
first, press the PLU key again.
PLU1 T1
PLU1 T1
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$2.99
$2.99
$0.02
$6.00
$6.00
$0.55
No.000022
00001
PLU
44 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Code PLU Entry - Multiplication
When several of the same items are to be entered into the same PLU, you can use multiplication. You
can enter a quantity (1 to 999.999) using the X/TIME key. You can multiply open or preset PLUs.
1. Enter the quantity of items being
purchased, and then press the X/TIME
key.
For example, enter 4 on the numeric key
pad and press the X/TIME key:
4
X/TIME
2. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU
key.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
[email protected] $ 1.99
PLU1 T1
$7.96
ROUND
-0.01
TOTAL
$7.95
CASH
$7.95
GST
$0.72
CLERK 1
No.000023
00001
For example, enter:
1
PLU
Code PLU Entry - Multiplication with Decimal Point
If you are selling items by weight or by length etc., you can multiply a fraction of a unit. It is up to 3
digits after decimal places.
1. Enter the quantity with the decimal point,
and then press the X/TIME key.
For example, for 3.75 kilos of produce,
enter:
3
▪
7
5
X/TIME
2. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU
key.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
[email protected] $ 2.99
PLU3 T1
$11.21
ROUND
-0.01
TOTAL
$11.20
CASH
$11.20
GST
$1.02
CLERK 1
No.000024
00001
For example, enter:
3
PLU
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 45
Code PLU Entry - Split Pricing
When items are priced in groups, i.e. 3 for $1.00, you can enter the quantity purchased and let the
register calculate the correct price.
Receipt Example:
1. Enter the quantity purchased, and then
press the X/TIME key.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
For example, enter:
2
X/TIME
2. Enter the quantity of the group price, and
then press the X/TIME key.
TIME 08:30
[email protected][email protected] $2.99
PLU3 T1
$1.99
ROUND
$0.01
TOTAL
$2.00
CASH
$2.00
GST
$0.18
CLERK 1
No.000025
00001
For example, if the items are priced 3 for
$1.00, enter:
3
X/TIME
3. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU
key.
For example, enter:
3
46 • Operating Instructions
PLU
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Barcode PLU Entry - Open Price, Single Item
1. Press 1 on the number pad, and then
press the X/TIME key.
1
X/TIME
2. Scan barcode of the item.
3. Enter an amount on the number pad. Do
not use the decimal key.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
[email protected] $ 2.99
#1234567890123 T1
$2.99
ROUND
$0.01
TOTAL
$3.00
CASH
$3.00
GST
$0.27
CLERK 1
No.000026
00001
For example, for $2.99, enter:
2
9
9
4. Press the PLU key.
PLU
Barcode PLU Entry - Open Price, Multiple Items
1. Press number of items on the number
pad, and then press the X/TIME key.
For example, for 4 identical items, enter:
4
X/TIME
2. Scan barcode of the item.
3. Enter an amount on the number pad. Do
not use the decimal key.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
[email protected] $ 2.99
#1234567890123 T1
$11.96
ROUND
-0.01
TOTAL
$11.95
CASH
$11.95
GST
$1.09
CLERK 1
No.000027
00001
For example, for $2.99, enter:
2
9
9
4. Press the PLU key.
PLU
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 47
Barcode PLU Entry - Preset Price Override, Single Item
Receipt Example:
1. Press 1 on the number pad, and then
press the X/TIME key.
1
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
X/TIME
2. Scan barcode of the item.
3. Enter an amount on the number pad. Do
not use the decimal key.
TIME 08:30
[email protected] $ 2.99
#3210987654321 T1
$2.99
ROUND
$0.01
TOTAL
$3.00
CASH
$3.00
GST
$0.27
CLERK 1
No.000028
00001
For example, for $2.99, enter:
2
9
9
4. Press the PLU key.
PLU
Barcode PLU Entry - Preset Price Override, Multiple Items
Receipt Example:
1. Press 1 on the number pad, and then
press the X/TIME key.
1
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
X/TIME
2. Scan barcode of the item.
3. Enter an amount on the number pad. Do
not use the decimal key.
For example, for $2.99, enter:
2
9
9
TIME 08:30
[email protected] $ 2.99
#3210987654321 T1
$2.99
#3210987654321 T1
$2.99
#3210987654321 T1
$2.99
#3210987654321 T1
$2.99
ROUND
-0.01
TOTAL
$11.95
CASH
$11.95
GST
$1.09
CLERK 1
No.000029
00001
4. Press the PLU key.
PLU
5. For additional identical items, press
PLU.
PLU
48 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
PLU Price Inquiry
You can check the price of a PLU without registering the PLU by placing a price inquiry function key
on the keyboard.
1. Press the PRICE INQ key. The message
"PRICEINQ" displays:
PRICE
INQ
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
#1001
TOTAL
CASH
CLERK 1
2. Press a preset PLU key,
TIME 08:30
$1.25
$1.25
$1.25
No.000011
00001
1
or enter a PLU number and press the
PLU key:
1
0
0
1
PLU
3. The PLU number and price display on
the screen. If the PLU has prices at
more than one price level, all prices will
be shown.
4. Press CLEAR to remove the price
information from the screen, or enter the
PLU again to register the item.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 49
Modifier Key
Pressing a modifier key alters the next PLU registered, either by changing the code number of the
PLU so that a different item is registered, or by just adding the modifier descriptor and registering the
same PLU. See "Modifier 1-5" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter in order to
determine how the modifier key will affect the PLU entry.
This is often used to change the size, package, pricing or even eatin/takeaway, hot/cold etc., status of
PLUs. Discuss your requirements with your dealer. The PLU Report lists these items separately.
Modifiers can be:
•
Stay down so that registrations will be modified by the same modifier until another modifier
is selected,
•
Pop-up after each item to register, for example large, medium or small soft drink,
•
Pop-up after each transaction to register, for example, toppings of various pizza sizes.
See "System Options" in the "Program Mode Programming" section to select stay down/pop-up
status. Also see “Function Keys” in the ”Program Mode Programming” section to select if
Modifier information prints on Receipt, Guest Check or KP (added in FlashROM v01.011)
Pop-Up Modifier Key Affecting PLU Code
For example: PLU 1 is DRINK for $1.00 and PLU#1001 is DRINK for $1.25 as large. The
Modifier 1 Key descriptor is LARGE.
Receipt Example:
1. Press a preset PLU key.
For example, press PLU 1 key to register
DRINK with $1.00.
1
2. Press the MOD 1 key. The message
"LARGE" appear on the display.
MOD
1
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
DRINK T1
LARGE
DRINK T1
PLU2 T1
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$1.00
$1.25
$1.50
$3.75
$3.75
$0.34
No.000030
00001
3. Press the same PLU key. In this example
the modifier 1 will add the digit 1 to the
fourth PLU # position, resulting in the
registration of PLU #1001.
1
4. Press another PLU key. In this example
press PLU 2 with a price of $1.50.
50 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Price Level Key
If you choose to use the price level feature, you must allocate memory for each level. See "Memory
Allocation" in the "Service Mode Programming" chapter. Note that the default program selects
one price level. You must also place price level keys on the keyboard. See "Function Key
Assignment" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter.
This feature allows you to change on item price. Often used for medium/large, eatin/takeaway, hot/cold
drinks etc. The PLU Report will combine the price levels. Discuss your needs with your dealer.
If you use this feature, the same PLU can be given up to 5 different preset prices. Price Level keys
shift the price that is being registered. Levels can be:
•
Stay down so that registrations will stay in the selected level until another level is selected,
for example, Happy Hour…
•
Pop-up after each item to register, for example large, medium or small soft drink,
•
Pop-up after each transaction to register, for example, member or non-member pricing.
See "System Options" in the "Program Mode Programming" section to set how the price level
keys operate. Also see “Function Keys” in the ”Program Mode Programming” section to select if
Modifier information prints on KP, Receipt (added in FlashROM v01.011) or Guest Check (added
in FlashROM v01.011)
Pop-Up Price Level Keys
For example: PLU 1 is DRINK and price level 1 is $1.00 and price level 2 is $2.00 as large.
1. Press a preset PLU key.
For example, press PLU 1 key to register
DRINK with $1.00 for price level 1.
1
2. Press the LEVEL 2 key. The message
"LEVEL 2" displays.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
DRINK T1
DRINK T1
PLU2 T1
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$1.00
$2.00
$1.50
$4.50
$4.50
$0.41
No.000031
00001
LEVEL
2
3. Press the same PLU key. In this example
the PLU 1 key is programmed with a
price of $2.00 for price level 2.
1
4. Press another PLU key. In this example
press PLU 2 programmed to register
PLU #2 with price level 1. Note that the
level 1 price is registered.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 51
Promo
The PROMO key allows you to account for promotional items, as in "buy two, get one free". Pressing
this key will remove an item's cost from the sale, and the promo item will not be added to the PLU sales
total, but it is added to the item sales counter. If stock (inventory) reporting is used, the item will be
subtracted from inventory.
Receipt Example:
1. Register an item.
For example, press PLU 1 programmed
with a price of $1.00 for price level 1.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU1
TIME 08:30
$1.00
***PROMO***
PLU1
TOTAL
CASH
CLERK 1
1
2. Press the PROMO key. The message
"PROMO" displays.
$0.00
$0.00
No.000032
00001
PROMO
3. Press PLU 1 again. You cannot enter an
item that has not been already registered
in this transaction.
1
52 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Waste
The WASTE key allows control of inventory by accounting for items that must be removed from stock
due to spoilage, breakage or mistakes. Press the WASTE key before entering wasted items, and then
press the WASTE key again to finalise. The WASTE key may be under manager control, requiring the
control lock to be in the X position. The WASTE key is not allowed within a sale.
1. Press the WASTE key. The message
"WASTE" displays at the top of the
screen.
WASTE
2. Enter the item or items that are wasted.
3. Press the WASTE key again to total the
wasted items:
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
***WASTE***
PLU1
PLU2
$1.25
$1.50
***WASTE***
TOTAL
CLERK 1
No.000033
$2.75
00001
WASTE
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 53
Not Found PLU function
The “Not Found PLU” feature is used when a new item which is not yet been programmed is
registered. When the operator decided to register that item, choices between Quick Entry, input the
price of the item and assign it the same descriptor and properties of another PLU, or Detail Entry,
enter the descriptor and tax status independently are available. This provides a simple mechanism for
building a PLU file.
Program descriptions by typing description on the alpha keyboard overlay is default. To
program description by three digit character codes, you must select Program Mode Programming
Æ System Option Programming Æ pg 17 (page 17) Æ PROGRAM DESCRIPTOR BY CODE
sets Y. Also see Descriptor Programming Methods for Alpha Overlay and/or Descriptor Code
Table.
Enter Not Found PLU Programming
1. After scanning or entering a PLU not in the PLU file, the screen below will appear on the
display, along with warning beeping. Press CLEAR button to start Not Found PLU
Programming procedure.
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
CLEAR
There are two ways to program a new PLU, Quick Entry and Detail Entry. Please read on for
instruction for both methods.
Quick Entry
1. On the NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM screen appears like below. Press 1 to start Not
Found PLU Entry Procedure (or press 0 to Stop (discard the registration of the item)).
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
0 : NO
1 : YES
1
54 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
2. The screen below then appears. In SELECT COPY PLU, you can copy existing PLU
information and status by either:
•
Press the PLU on the keyboard, or
PLU
•
Enter up to 15 digit number of the PLU and press the PLU key, or
Enter the PLU#,
up to 15 digits
•
PLU
For a barcode item, scan the barcode.
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
SELECT COPY PLU
0Å
0
PRICE:
3. The left-pointed-arrow then jumps to PRICE for entering up to 7 digits of the item price.
Then press CASH key. Do not use the decimal key.
CASH
Price/HALO
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
SELECT COPY PLU
PRICE:
32
2.99Å
NOTE: Despite the Price Level setting in S-Mode, MEMORY ALLOCATION -> 7.
PRICE LEVEL, Not Found PLU procedure only requires price of Price Level 1
to be entered.
4. The new item is created and registered as the selected product.
REGISTER MODE
1 PLU32 T1
2.99
TAX 0.00 SUBT
2.99
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 55
Detail Entry
1. After scanning or entering a PLU not in the PLU file, NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM
screen appears like below. Press 1 to start Not Found PLU Entry Procedure (or press 0 to
Stop (discard the registration of the item)).
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
0 : NO
1 : YES
1
2. For Detail Entry, just press CASH key to skip SELECT COPY PLU and go to PRICE.
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
SELECT COPY PLU
0Å
0
PRICE:
CASH
3. The left-pointed-arrow then jump to PRICE for entering up to 7 digits of the item price.
Then press CASH key. Do not use the decimal key.
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
SELECT COPY PLU
PRICE:
DESC :
TAX :
0
2.99Å
1N 2N 3N 4N
CASH
Price/HALO
NOTE: Despite the Price Level setting in S-Mode, MEMORY ALLOCATION -> 7.
PRICE LEVEL, Not Found PLU procedure only requires price of Price Level 1
to be entered.
56 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
4. The left- arrow then jumps to DESC for entering up to 18 digits characters of the item
descriptor, then press CASH key,
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
SELECT COPY PLU
PRICE:
DESC : B.L.T BURGER
TAX : 1N 2N 3N 4N
Type up to 18
descriptor keys
0
7.95
Å
CASH
or,
If you are programming using descriptor codes, enter up to 18 three-character codes and
press the X/TIME key.
Enter up to 18 set of
character codes
CASH
If you do not want to enter any description, press X/TIME key and go to next step.
CASH
5. The left-pointed-arrow then jump to TAX and stay between 1N and 2N, which is ready to
determine if taxable by 1 (Tax1/GST). Press YES/NO key to toggle between Y and N for
Tax1 or press CASH key, move to the right tax for this item. After select proper tax,
press CASH key again until the item is registered. Example shows Australian GST
setting.
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
SELECT COPY PLU
PRICE:
DESC : B.L.T BURGER
TAX : 1NÅ2N 3N 4N
YES/NO
and
0
7.95
NOT FOUND PLU PROGRAM ?
SELECT COPY PLU
PRICE:
DESC : B.L.T BURGER
TAX : 1Y 2N 3N 4NÅ
0
7.95
CASH
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 57
6. The new item is registered with the description and price entered, and tax status selected.
REGISTER MODE
1 B.L.T BURGER T1
7.95
TAX 0.00 SUBT
7.95
NOTE: All Not Found PLUs are default to link to Group 1.
Not Found PLU Report
For better management, there is a Not Found PLU Report (8.NOT FOUND PLU) in X
(Manager) Mode and Reset Not Found Report (7.RESET NOT FOUND PLU) in Z
(Reset Report) Mode. This report is an independent report from normal PLU report. All
newly added PLUs through Register Mode will update into Not Found PLU Report and
PLU Report. When perform the Reset Not Found PLU Report, the current report will still
print then reset the report.
NOTE: Up to 50 Not Found PLU items can be retained. When capacity is reached, any
further registration of new Not Found PLUs will not be recorded, along with **
WARNING ** NOT FOUND FULL! error message. you must run Not Found
PLU report in Z-Mode to print and clear the report. Despite the failure of recording
those Not Found PLUs into the report, those PLUs are still recorded into register’s
PLU memory. And are able to be registered later.
On FlashROM v01.011 and later, the PLU descriptor will also print on the report if
programmed. A sample report is below. Notice the item name programmed is “COKE ORIG
350 BOTT” (18 digit characters in full) but only the last 14 digit characters “ ORIG 350
BOTT” is shown.
Report Example :
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
NOT FOUND PLU LIST
PLU#12345678901234
CLERK 1
ORIG 350 BOTT
No.000011
00001
Modify a Programmed Not Found PLU
When a Not Found PLU is added through Quick Entry or Detail Entry, if a further
programming is needed, you can complete the programming or re-program a Not Found
PLU via Program Mode Programming Æ 0.PLU Æ 0.ADD/MODIFY PLU, just enter the
PLU number of the PLU you want to program according to the Not Found PLU Report,
then press PLU function key, you will be able to access that PLU’s information.
58 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Shifting or Exempting Tax
There are 4 tax function keys (GST (Tax1), TAX2, TAX3 and TAX4) s in the system. A proper Tax
function key need to be assigned to the keyboard before using the features. Unlike TAXEXMT (Tax
Exempt) key, those 4 tax function keys can perform both “tax shift” and “ tax exempt” according to
tax status programmed on individual item.
Shifting Tax
PLUs can be programmed to automatically add the appropriate tax or taxes. Occasionally, you may
need to sell a normally taxable item without tax, or a normally taxable item with tax. You can
perform this tax shifting with one of the four tax shift keys.
Shift Tax on a Taxable Item
1. Press the tax shift for the tax you wish to
shift. For example, Press GST (Tax1):
GST
(TAX1)
2. Enter an amount on the ten key pad. Do
not use the decimal key.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU1
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$2.99
$0.01
$3.00
$3.00
No.000011
00001
For example, for $2.99, enter:
2
9
9
3. Press a PLU key.
For example, press PLU 1. If PLU 1 is
normally taxable by tax 1, the
registration will be non-taxable.
1
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 59
Shift Tax on a Non-Taxable Item
1. Press the tax shift for the tax you wish to
shift. For example, Press GST (Tax1):
GST
(TAX1)
2. Enter an amount on the ten key pad. Do
not use the decimal key.
For example, for $2.99, enter:
2
9
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU2 T1
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$2.99
$0.01
$3.00
$3.00
$0.27
No.000011
00001
9
3. Press a PLU key.
For example, press PLU 2. If PLU 2 is
normally non-taxable item, the
registration will be taxable by
GST (Tax1).
2
60 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Exempting Tax
Occasionally, you may need to exempt tax from an entire sale. For example, you might remove tax
when you sell merchandise to a church or charitable institution.
You can exempt tax by using a proper tax key and the SUBTOTAL key, or you can use the TAX
EXMT (tax exempt) function key.
Exempting Tax with a Tax Keys
1. Enter an amount on the ten key pad. Do
not use the decimal key.
For example, for $2.99, enter:
2
9
9
2. Press a taxable PLU key.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU1 T1
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$2.99
$0.01
$3.00
$3.00
No.000011
00001
For example, press PLU 1.
1
3. Press SUBTL:
SUBT
L
4. Press the tax shift key (or keys) that
represents the tax you wish to shift.
For example, to exempt tax 1 press
GST (Tax1), then press SUBTL
GST
(TAX1)
SUBTL
5. The display reflects the transaction
without added taxes. Total the sale with
CASH, CHECK , or a CHARGE
function. The sale will not include tax 1.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 61
Exempting Tax with the TAXEXMT (Tax Exempt) Key
You can program the TAXEXMT function to remove all or selected taxes.
NOTE: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the function
by pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric digit
corresponding to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the TAX
EXMT function is function #6 on the function look up 1 menu, so to use the TAX
EXMT function, you would first press FUNCTION LOOK#1, then press the
numeric 6 key.
1. Enter an amount on the ten key pad. Do
not use the decimal key.
For example, for $2.99, enter:
2
9
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU1 T1
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
CLERK 1
9
2. Press a taxable PLU key.
TIME 08:30
$2.99
$0.01
$3.00
$3.00
No.000011
00001
For example, press PLU 1.
1
3. Press SUBTL:
SUBT
L
4. Press the TAXEXMT (Tax Exempt) key
(or access the TAXEXMT function from
a function look up menu key):
TAXEXMT
5. The display reflects the transaction
without added taxes. Total the sale with
CASH, CHECK, or a CHARGE
function. The sale will not include tax 1.
62 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Percent Key Operations
A total of five % functions are available. %1, %2 and %3 are located on the default SPS-320/340
keyboard and %1 is located on the default SPS-325. Your keyboard may be different. More or less
% keys may be located on the keyboard, or they may be located on one of the function look up menu
keys.
Each function is individually programmable to add or subtract, from an individual item or from a sale
total, amounts or percentages. You can also program the percentage key taxable or non-taxable, so
that sales taxes are calculated on the net, or the gross amount of the item or sale. You can also
program preset amounts or rates.
The operation examples in this section show the percentage key in a variety of configurations. See
"Function Key Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to assign a specific
function to each percentage key.
These keys will be pre-programmed to operate on EITHER PLUs (item) OR SUBTOTALs (sale),
but not both; EITHER MINUS (discount) OR PLUS (surcharges), but not both; EITHER RATE
(percentage) OR AMOUNT (Dollar), but not both.
So, if you want to discount items but not every item in a sale, you will need two % keys. To discount
on the whole sale, you will need to press SUBTOTAL first.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 63
Preset Percent Discount on an Item
In this example the %1 function is programmed with Percentage, Negative, Item, Preset and
Overridable with a rate of 10%. Please refer to % (1 ~ 5) (Discounts or Surcharges) in Function
Key Programming in Program Mode Programming for more detail.
Receipt Example:
1. Register the item.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
2. Press the %1 key:
%1
3. The discount is automatically subtracted.
PLU2 T1
% 1
AMOUNT T1
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$10.00
-10.000%
-1.00
$9.00
$9.00
&0.82
No.000034
00001
Enter a Percent Discount on an Item
You can also operate the percentage functions by entering the percentage of the discount or
surcharge. You can enter a fractional percentage up to 3 digits beyond the decimal (i.e. 99.999%) if
necessary.
Receipt Example:
1. Register the discounted item.
2. Enter the percentage. If you are entering
a fraction of a percent, you must use the
decimal key.
For example, for one third off enter:
3
3
▪
3
3
3
3. Press the %1 key:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU2 T1
% 1
AMOUNT T1
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$10.00
-33.333%
-3.33
-0.02
$6.65
$6.65
$0.61
No.000035
00001
%1
4. The discount is automatically subtracted.
64 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Preset Percent Discount on Sale Total
In this example the %1 function is programmed with Percentage, Negative, Sale, Preset and
Overridable with a rate of 10%. Please refer to % (1 ~ 5) (Discounts or Surcharges) in Function
Key Programming in Program Mode Programming for more detail.
NOTE: Please see Program Mode Programming, Print Option Programming -> pg 3 (page 3)
sets PRINT SUBTOTAL WHEN PRESSED to Y.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Press the SUBTL key:
SUBT
L
3. Press the %1 key:
%1
4. The discount is automatically subtracted.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU2 T1
SUBTOTAL
% 1
AMOUNT T1
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$10.00
$10.00
-15.000%
-1.50
$8.50
$8.50
$0.77
No.000036
00001
Enter a Percent Discount on Sale Total
You can also operate the percentage functions by entering the percentage of the discount or
surcharge. You can enter a fractional percentage up to 3 digits beyond the decimal (i.e. 99.999%) if
necessary.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Press the SUBTL key:
SUBT
L
3. Enter the percentage, and then press the
appropriate discount key.
For example, for 15% enter:
1
5
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU2 T1
SUBTOTAL
% 1
AMOUNT T1
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$10.00
$10.00
-15.000%
-1.50
$8.50
$8.50
$0.77
No.000037
00001
%1
4. The discount is automatically subtracted.
Surcharge Operation
When a % function is preset with “Percentage, Positive, Item, Preset and Overridable” or
“Percentage, Positive, Sale, Preset and Overridable” with a preset percentage rate, the % function
key will perform as a Surcharge on Item or Sale. Of course a override rate can be put in manually.
Please refer to previous operation sequences.
For setting, please refer to % (1 ~ 5) (Discounts or Surcharges) in Function Key Programming in
Program Mode Programming for more detail.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 65
Dollar Amount Discount on Sale
When programmed as "amount", "sale", "open" and "negative", a % key will deduct an amount from
a sale. Also, depending upon programming:
•
You may be allowed to enter only one discount in a sale, after the SUBTL key is pressed,
•
You may be allowed to enter multiple discounts, but you must press the SUBTL key before
each discount entry, or
•
You may be allowed to enter multiple discounts, without first pressing SUBTL.
In this example, a discount may be entered only once, and you must first press SUBTL.
NOTE: Please see Program Mode Programming, Print Option Programming Æ pg 3 (page 3)
sets PRINT SUBTOTAL WHEN PRESSED to Yes.
Receipt Example:
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
2. Press the SUBTL key:
PLU2 T1
SUBTOTAL
% 1
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
SUBT
L
3. Enter the amount of the discount, and
then press the appropriate % key.
For example:
2
0
0
TIME 08:30
$10.00
$10.00
-2.00
$8.00
$8.00
$0.73
No.000038
00001
%1
4. The discount is subtracted.
Dollar Amount Discount on Item
When programmed as "amount", "item", "open" and "negative", a % key will reduce a discount
amount against an item. In this case, you must press the PLU (or enter the PLU number) of the PLU
you wish the discount to be subtracted from.
Receipt Example:
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
2. Enter the amount of the discount, and
then press the appropriate % key.
PLU1 T1
% 1
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
For example:
2
0
0
%1
TIME 08:30
$10.00
-2.00
$8.00
$8.00
$0.73
No.000039
00001
3. The discount is automatically subtracted.
66 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Return Merchandise Registrations
If you wish to return or refund an item, press MDSE RETURN, then re-enter any item. You can
return merchandise as part of a sale, or you can return merchandise as a separate transaction and
return cash to the customer.
NOTE: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the function by
pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric digit corresponding
to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the MDSE RETURN function is
function #2 on the function look up 1 menu, so to use the MDSE RETURN function, you
would first press FUNCTION LOOK#1, then press the numeric 2 key.
Receipt Example:
1. Press RETURN:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
MDSE
RETURN
2. Enter the price of the item you wish to
return, and then press the PLU key where
it was registered originally.
2
9
9
2
TIME 08:30
RETURN **************************
PLU2 T1
-2.99
ROUND
-0.01
TOTAL
-3.00
CASH
-3.00
GST
-0.27
CLERK 1
No.000040
00001
3. Total the sale with CASH, CHECK, or a
CHARGE function.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 67
Voids and Corrections
Error Correction (Void Last Item)
This function corrects the last item entered.
Receipt Example:
1. Register the item you wish to sell.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
2. Press the ERROR CORR key:
PLU1 T1
PLU2
ERRCORR
PLU2
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
ERROR
CORR
TIME 08:30
$2 29
$1.29
------------------------1.29
$0.01
$2.30
$2.30
$0.21
No.000041
00001
Void Previous Item
This function allows you to correct an item registered previously in a transaction.
1. Register an item. Then register a second
item.
2. To correct the first item, press
VOID ITEM:
VOID
ITEM
3. Enter the price of the first item, and then
press the PLU key where it was
registered originally.
2
68 • Operating Instructions
9
9
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
PLU2
$1.29
PLU1 T1
$2.29
VOID ---------------------------PLU2
-1.29
ROUND
$0.01
TOTAL
$2.30
CASH
$2.30
GST
$0.21
CLERK 1
No.000042
00001
2
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Cancel
The CANCEL key allows you to stop any transaction. Anything registered within the transaction
before the CANCEL key is pressed is automatically corrected. The CANCEL key can be
programmed to require manager control, or the key can be omitted or be inactivated through
programming, see "Function Key Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter.
NOTE: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the function by
pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric digit corresponding
to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the CANCEL function is
function #1 on the function look up 1 menu, so to use the CANCEL function, you would first
press FUNCTION LOOK#1, then press the numeric 1 key.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Press the CANCEL key
CANCEL
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
PLU1 T1
$2.29
PLU2
$1.29
CANCEL **************************
CLERK 1
No.000043
00001
Void Mode Operations
You can use the VOID Mode to correct any complete transaction. To correct any transaction:
1. Turn the control lock to the VOID.
2. Enter the transaction you wish to correct
exactly as it was entered originally in the
REG Mode. You can enter discounts,
voids, returns, tax exemptions or any
other function.
3. All totals and counters are corrected as if
the original transaction did not take
place.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
VOID MODE ***********************
PLU1 T1
-2.29
PLU2
-1.29
ROUND
-0.02
TOTAL
-3.60
CASH
-3.60
GST
-0.21
CLERK 1
No.000044
00001
NB. Be sure to turn the key back when finished.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 69
#/No Sale Operations
The #/NS key has two functions - No Sale and Non Add#. No Sale is used to open cash drawer
outside a transaction, Non Add # is used to enter a reference number for the transaction.
No Sale - Open Drawer
The #/No Sale key will open the cash drawer when you have not already started a transaction. The No
Sale function can be disabled or placed under manager control through programming, see "Function
Key Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter. All No Sale operations will
be recorded in Journal and/or Electronic Journal for future need, but only a usage counter in Financial
Report.
Receipt Example:
1. Press #/NS:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
#/NS
2. The drawer will open and the receipt will
print as in the example on the right.
NO SALE ------------------------CLERK 1
No.000045
00001
Non Add # - Add Information
You can also use the #/NS key as Non Add # function to enter any number (up to 9 digits) for a
transaction. You can enter the number any time during a transaction. For example, if you wish to
record a checking account number, enter the number and press the #/NS key before totalling the sale
with a tendered key. The Non Add function can be disabled or enforced through programming, see
"Function Key Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter. All Non Add #
operations will be recorded in Journal and/or Electronic Journal for future need, but only a usage
counter and a sum up number in Financial Report.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Enter the number you wish to record.
For example enter:
1
2
3
3. Press #/NS:
4
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU1 T1
NON-ADD#
TOTAL
CHECK
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$2.99
1234
$2.99
$2.99
$0.27
No.000046
00001
#/NS
4. Press CHECK:
CHECK
70 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Received On Account Operations
You can use one of the Received on Account (RA) functions (RA1-RA3) to accept cash or checks
into the cash drawer when you are not actually selling merchandise. For example, use received on
account to accept payments for previously sold merchandise, or record loans to the cash drawer.
NOTE: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the function by
pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric digit corresponding
to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the RA1 function is function #3
on the function look up 1 menu, so to use the RA1 function, you would first press
FUNCTION LOOK#1, then press the numeric 3 key.
1. Press one of the received on account
keys (RA1-RA3)
RA1
2. Enter the amount of cash received, press
CASH.
1
0
0
0
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
RA1
CASH
CHECK
CHARGE1
RA1
CLERK 1
No.000047
TIME 08:30
$10.00
$10.00
$10.00
$30.00
00001
CASH
3. Enter the check amount received, and
press CHECK.
1
0
0
0
CHECK
4. Enter the charge amount received, press
CHARGE1
1
0
0
0
CHARGE
1
5. You can continue to itemize receipts, or
you can finalise by pressing or selecting
the same received on account key.
RA1
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 71
Paid Out Operations
You can use the Paid Out (PO) functions (PO1-PO3) to track cash or checks paid out or to record
loans from the cash drawer.
NOTE: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the function by
pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric digit corresponding
to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the PO1 function is function #4
on the function look up 1 menu, so to use the PO1 function, you would first press
FUNCTION LOOK#1, then press the numeric 4 key.
Receipt Example:
1. Press one of the paid out keys
(PO1-PO3)
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PO1
2. Enter the amount of cash paid out, press
CASH.
1
0
0
0
PO1
CASH
CHECK
CHARGE1
PO1
CLERK 1
No.000048
TIME 08:30
-10.00
-10.00
-10.00
-30.00
00001
CASH
3. Enter the check amount paid out, and
press CHECK.
1
0
0
0
CHECK
4. Enter the charge amount received, press
CHARGE1
1
0
0
0
CHARGE
1
5. You can continue to itemize paid outs, or
you can finalise by pressing or selecting
the same paid out key.
PO1
72 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Subtotaling a Sale
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Press SUBTL. The subtotal will display
with the message "Sub" indicated on the
rear display.
SUBT
L
The subtotal can be printed if the system option is set. See "Print Option Programming" in the
"Program Mode Programming" chapter.
Eat In/Take Out/Drive Thru Sales
Different types of sales, such as "Eat In", "Take Out" and "Drive Thru" can be categorized by placing
separate keys on the keyboard. EAT IN, TAKE OUT, and DRIVE THRU keys function as subtotal
keys. You can force the operator to press one of the keys before tendering. See "System Option
Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter. Separate totals will be maintained
on the financial report to detail sales counts and amounts for each key.
These keys will also print the description at the top of a KP docket.
Drive Through Operation
In a Drive Through environment - where a meal order is placed from a car, then picked up, which
payment can be made either at order or pickup window - an advanced operation is available combined
with Check Track System (Account Management) feature for sequential order-and-pickup.
Function keys needed are CHECK # (New Car/Account or Order), SERVICE (New Balance) and
P/BAL (for reopen Car/Account and pay bill). When there is only one machine, the settings to
modify are only on CHECK # key - "CHECK # ASSIGNED BY REGISTER” is Y (Yes) and
“DRIVE THROUGH FEATURE ENABLED” is Y (Yes).
In operation, when customers order via microphone, use CHECK # key to open a new order, then
register item(s), then use SERVICE key to save the order. When customer arrives at the
payment/pickup window, use P/BAL key to automatically open the oldest account. Customer may
add more item at this stage and then pay the account is then closed.
Open a New
Account
Item
Registration
Order
(CHECK#)
Payment
(P/BAL)
Item
Registration
New Balance
(SERVICE)
Full Payment(s)
(CASH/CHARGE)
Close the
Account
For multi-registers configuration, please refer to S-Mode, 7.IRC OPTIONS and PGM-Mode,
5.FUNCTION KEYS on CHECK # function key for related settings.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 73
Quick EJ (Electronic Journal) Lookup
When the operator needs to find out the detail of the most recent transaction, a Quick EJ Lookup in
REG-Mode feature allows operator to print up to 99 lines EJ for a quick check. Please see Program
Mode Programming, Print Option Programming, pg 16(page 16) for detail.
1. In REG-Mode, when the last transaction
is finalised and the register is idle,
2. Press 1 0 then SUBTL,
1
0
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
** PRINT EJ: LAST 10 LINES **
SUBTL
3. A ticket of Electronic Journal with recent
transaction will print from the receipt
printer. (example shows recent 10 lines)
CHARGE1
$10.00
RA1
$30.00
CLERK 1
No.000047
00001
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
PO1
CASH
-10.00
CHECK
-10.00
CHARGE1
-10.00
PO1
-30.00
CLERK 1
No.000048
00001
CLERK 1
74 • Operating Instructions
TIME 08:30
No.000049
00001
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Totaling and Tendering
There are ten tender functions available to categorize sales. CASH and CHECK are individual keys
on the keyboard. The eight charge functions CHARGE 1 - CHARGE 8 are available on the
FUNCTION LOOK#2 key on the default keyboard.
Depending upon how your register is programmed you might find charge keys as individual function
keys on the keyboard, or listed on one of the function look up keys.
Totaling a Cash Sale
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. To total a cash sale, press CASH:
CASH
3. The display will indicate the total amount
of the cash sale.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU2
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$7.96
-0.01
$7.95
$7.95
No.000050
00001
Totaling a Check Sale
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. To total a cash sale, press CHECK:
CHECK
3. The display will indicate the total amount
of the cash sale.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU2
TOTAL
CHECK
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$7.96
$7.96
$7.96
No.000051
00001
Operating Instructions • 75
Tendering a Cash Sale
Receipt Example:
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
2. Enter the amount tendered by the
customer.
PLU1 T1
$2.99
PLU1 T1
$2.99
[email protected] $ 1.99
PLU2
$7.96
ROUND
$0.01
TOTAL
$13.95
CASH
$20.00
CHANGE
$6.05
GST
$0.54
CLERK 1
No.000052
00001
For example, for $20.00 enter:
2
0
0
TIME 08:30
0
3. Press CASH:
CASH
4. The display will indicate the total amount
of the cash tendered and the change due,
if any.
Tendering a Check Sale
Receipt Example:
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
2. Enter the amount tendered by the
customer.
PLU1 T1
$2.99
PLU1 T1
$2.99
[email protected] $ 1.99
PLU2
$7.96
TOTAL
$13.94
CHECK
$20.00
CHANGE
$6.06
GST
$0.54
CLERK 1
No.000053
00001
For example, for $20.00 enter:
2
0
0
TIME 08:30
0
3. Press CHECK:
CHECK
4. The display will indicate the total amount
of the check tendered and the change
due, if any.
76 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Totaling a Charge (EFTPOS) Sale
Use the charge keys to track charge or credit card sales. See "Function Key Programming" in the
"Program Mode Programming" chapter to change the descriptors for the charge tender functions.
For example, you can use CHARGE 1 to track Visa card sales. The descriptor "VISA" will display on
the function look up menu and print on the printer. You can also set tendering options for the charge
keys, i.e. whether to allow over tendering or to enforce tendering.
NOTE: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the function by
pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric digit corresponding
to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the CHARGE 1 function is
function #1 on the function look up 2 menu, so to use the CHARGE 1 function, you would
first press FUNCTION LOOK#2, then press the numeric 1 key.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Press one of the charge key if it is
located on the keyboard:
CHARGE
1
or, if the charge function is located on a
function look up key press
FUNCTION LOOK2, then press the
digit representing the charge function
you are using:
FUNCTION
LOOK#2
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
PLU1 T1
$2.99
PLU1 T1
$2.99
[email protected] $ 1.99
PLU2
$7.96
TOTAL
$13.94
CHARGE1
$13.94
GST
$0.54
CLERK 1
No.000054
00001
1
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 77
Tendering a Charge (EFTPOS) Sale
Tendering a charge sale may or may not be allowed. See "Function Key Programming" in the
"Program Mode Programming" chapter to set tendering options for the charge keys, i.e. whether to
allow over tendering or to enforce tendering.
Receipt Example:
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Enter the amount of the charge and press
one of the charge keys if it is located on
the keyboard:
2
0
0
0
CHARGE
1
or, if the charge function is located on a
function look up key, enter the amount of
the charge:
2
0
0
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
PLU1 T1
$2.99
PLU1 T1
$2.99
[email protected] $ 1.99
PLU2
$7.96
TOTAL
$13.94
CHARGE1
$20.00
CHANGE
$6.06
GST
$0.54
CLERK 1
No.000055
00001
0
Press FUNCTION LOOK2, then press
the digit representing the charge function
you are using:
FUNCTION
LOOK#2
1
Cash Out within a Charge (EFTPOS) Sale
CASH OUT within a charge (EFTPOS) sale may or may not be allowed. See "Function Key
Assignment Programming" in the "Service Mode Programming" chapter to assign CASH OUT
key.
Receipt Example:
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
2. Enter the amount of cash for cash out
then press CASH OUT key.
2
0
0
0
CASH OUT
3. Press EFTPOS key.
EFTPOS
Press FUNCTION LOOK2, then press
the digit representing the charge function
you are using:
FUNCTION
LOOK#2
78 • Operating Instructions
TIME 08:30
PLU1 T1
$2.99
PLU1 T1
$2.99
[email protected] $ 1.99
PLU2
$7.96
TOTAL
$13.94
CASH OUT
$20.00
EFTPOS
$33.94
CHANGE
$20.00
GST
$0.54
CLERK 1
No.000056
00001
1
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Check (Cheque) Cashing
Check cashing means exchanging cash for a check. If you wish to cash checks, you must place a
CHKCASH key on the keyboard. See "Function Key Assignment" in the "Program Mode
Programming" chapter.
1. Enter the amount of the check tendered
by the customer.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
For example, for $20.00 enter:
2
0
0
0
TIME 08:30
***CHKCASH***
CHECK
CASH
CLERK 1
No.000057
$20.00
-20.00
00001
2. Press CHKCASH:
CHK
CASH
3. The display will indicate the amount of
the check and the cash change.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 79
Split Tender
Split tendering is paying for one transaction by more than one payment method. For example, a
$20.00 sale could be split so $10.00 is paid in cash, and the remaining $10.00 is paid by a check. If
necessary, you can make several different payments.
NOTE: The CASH and/or CHECK keys must be programmed to accept under tenders to use this
feature.
Receipt Example:
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Enter the amount of cash tendered by the
customer.
For example, enter $10.00 and press
CASH:
1
0
0
0
CASH
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU2
TOTAL
CASH
TOTAL
CHECK
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$20 00
$20.00
$10.00
$10.00
$10.00
No.000058
00001
3. The display will indicate the $10.00 cash
tender and the $10.00 total still due.
4. Enter the amount of check tendered by
the customer.
For example, enter $10.00 and press
CHECK:
1
0
0
0
CHECK
5. When the total tendered equals or
exceeds the total due, the receipt will
print and the transaction is complete.
80 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Post Tender
Post tendering means computing change after the sale has been totaled and the drawer is open. This
feature is useful when a customer changes the amount of the tender or when a "quick change artist"
confuses a clerk. Normally, this function is off. If you wish to allow post tendering, you must set the
appropriate system option. See "System Option Programming". (A separate system options
determines whether the drawer opens on the post tender.)
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
2. Press CASH:
CASH
3. The display will indicate the total of the
cash sale.
PLU1 T1
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
$2.00
$2.12
$0.18
No.000059
00001
4. Enter the amount of the new tender,
Press CASH:
2
0
0
0
CASH
5. The display will indicate the change due.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 81
Currency Conversion
If you normally accept currency from neighboring nations, you can program to convert the subtotal of
a sale to the equivalent cost in the foreign currency. You can set up four separate conversion
functions for different foreign currencies. To do this, you need to program the conversion factor. For
example, if the US dollar (home currency) is worth 1.3720 Canadian dollars (foreign currency), the
conversion factor is 1.3720. See "Function Key Programming" in the "Program Mode Programming"
chapter to set a conversion factor.
NOTE: When a function is located on a function look up menu key, you access the function by
pressing the appropriate function look up key, then pressing the numeric digit corresponding
to the function you wish to select. On the default keyboard, the CONV1 function is function
#7 on the function look up 1 menu, so to use the CONV1 function, you would first press
FUNCTION LOOK#1, then press the numeric 7 key.
Receipt Example:
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Press the CONV1 key if it is located on
the keyboard:
CONV1
or, if the charge function is located on a
function look up key press
FUNCTION LOOK1, then press the
digit representing the charge function
you are using:
FUNCTION
LOOK#1
7
3. The amount due in foreign currency is
displayed.
4. Enter the amount of the foreign currency
tender, Press CASH:
1
0
0
0
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
PLU1 T1
TOTAL
CONV 1
CHANGE RATE
HOME AMT.
CHANGE
GST
CLERK 1
No.000060
TIME 08:30
$2.00
$2.12
¥2.90
@1.3720
$10.00
$5.17
$0.12
00001
The currency symbol you
program will display here. See
"Print Option Programming" in
the "Program Mode
Programming" chapter.
CASH
5. The display will indicate the amount of
foreign currency tendered and display
$5.17 change due. The change due is
computed in home currency!
82 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Check Track System (Account Management)
Overview
The SPS-300 Series has a Check Track System for Account Management. This can be used in
several ways. Clerks use a special account to temporarily interrupt sales, while actual accounts can be
run as Soft Check or Hard Check. The maximum number of accounts for Check Tracking System
is 500.
There are two ways to operate Check Track System, Clerk Interrupt and Table Management.
Clerk Interrupt is an operator oriented operation, the transaction (account) follows the operator,
each operator operates one account. On the other hand, Table Management is a customer oriented
operation, the transaction (account) follows the customer. One operator can access multiple accounts,
although the clerk who opens the account may be programmed to service that account exclusively.
To switch between Soft Check and Hard Check, consult your dealer. Detail information is in
Service Mode, Memory Allocation Programming. (Warning! Modifying Memory Allocation will
reset all programming that has been done on the machine!)
To switch between Clerk Interrupt and Table Management, please see Program Mode
Programming Æ System Option Programming Æ pg 17 (page 17) ÆCLERK INTERRUPT.
Default is N (No), which means the machine is currently running Table Tracking. Set to Y (Yes) for
Clerk Interrupt.
An Open Check Report summarises how many checks/accounts are currently open (includes either
Clerk Interrupt or Table Management). However, when using Clerk Interrupt, the clerk who has
interrupted sales is prevented from checking the report. Please see X/Z Mode, Report Table for
detail.
When using Clerk Interrupt, all unfinished Clerk Interrupt transactions recorded will be cleared by
Z Financial Report. In Program Mode Programming Æ System Option Programming Æ pg 25
(page 25) ÆAllow Z Financial Report with Open Clerk Interrupt Sales - can be set NO to
prevent that happening. This ensures you have completed all sales and your reports balance. See
Program Mode Programming, System Option Programming for detail.
Soft Check
When Soft Check is used, the transaction detail is recorded in the register’s memory until the
account is fully paid off and closed. The Soft Check is suitable for short term (eg, daily) accounts,
like Restaurant Billing (Table Tracking), Bar Tab or Clerk Interrupt, where number of entries of a
transaction is a maximum 200 lines and the transaction will normally be finalised before a Z
Financial Report is done.
Hard Check
For Hard Check, the cash register only records account number and balance (balance forward).
Detail of the transaction is printed either through the receipt printer or external printer (POS printer or
slip printer). The slip printer is recommended. The Hard Check, on the other hand, is better for long
term accounts, such as Monthly Account, Service Station, Lay By or Caravan Park.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 83
Multiple Registers Check Track System (Account Management)
When multiple registers are used in the IRC Network, a Guest Check can be opened on one machine
then re-opened on one of the others. Items and balance are transferred from the Check Track Master
to others and back to Check Track Master from terminals. Also, the Guest Check can be assigned to
print on the Server unit or on the Local/Satellite unit(s).
Based on the single register settings, further settings are:
•
S-Mode, 8.IRC OPTIONS to review all available settings, especially assign a register for
“#SHARE CHKTRACK REG#(1-16)” on the second page.
•
PGM-Mode, 5.FUNCTION KEYS Æ CHECK # to set “SHARE CHECK FILE” to Y
(Yes) and determine “PRINT CHECK TO” either “THE SERVER” or/and “THE
SATELLITE” on the third/last page.
Clerk Interrupt
When using the Clerk Interrupt, a second clerk is allowed to access the register by signing in his/her
account to interrupt the current clerk. The Clerk Interrupt works using the Soft Check Track,
therefore the transaction details of interrupted clerk will be recorded in the register’s memory and
recalled after the interrupted clerk signs back in.
To Enter Clerk Interrupt System (To Exit Table Management system)
1. Program Clerk Secret Code. See Program Mode Æ 6.Clerk for detail.
2. Set Clerk Entry as 1:CODE. See Program Mode Æ System Option Æ pg 1 (page 1)
for detail.
3. Activate Clerk Interrupt (deactivate Table Tracking). See Program Mode Æ System
Option Æ pg 17 (page 17) for detail.
You can also setup the options below to refine the Clerk Interrupt procedure.
1. Set Clerk is Y:POP-UP. See Program Mode Æ System Option Æ pg 2 (page 2) for
detail.
2. Set Sign On/Off ticket printing is No. See Program Mode Æ Print Option Æ pg 5
(page 5) for detail.
NOTE 1: The printing of signing on docket can stop by changing Print Option pg 5 (page
5) Print Receipt when sign on/off to No in Program Mode Æ Print Option
Programming.
NOTE 2: For the clerks that are interrupted, the transaction has been stored in the cash
register’s memory. A Guest Check will be always printed at the end of
transaction.
So, clerk #1 sells items totalling, say $2.00, but not ready to finish the sale. Clerk #2 signs on sells
milk for $2.99 and customer pays. Clerk #1 signs on again and their sale balance of $2.00 is
displayed. Clerk #1 can add items to the sale or go directly to payment.
More than one clerk can be interrupted at once. Please see following pages for operation example.
84 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
The First Clerk Sign-On
As the Clerk feature has been programmed as pop-up, the first clerk has to sign on in order to
use the register.
1. Clerk 1 signs-on by entering his clerk
number then CLERK key
1
CLERK
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
DRINK T1
TIME 08:30
$2.00
2. PLU 1 has been registered, and waiting
for further instruction from the customer.
The Second Clerk Interrupts
The first clerk begins serving the customer, but walks away from the register, the second
clerk can interrupt the first clerk’s transaction by signing on to the register.
1. The second clerk interrupts by entering
his clerk number then CLERK key
2
CLERK
Receipt Example:
** CLERK INTERRUPT **
GST
$0.18
TOTAL
$2.00
CLERK 1
No.000062
00001
2. The first clerk then being signed off and
the second clerk will sign on.
The Second Clerk Registers a Transaction
While the first clerk is serving the customer, but walks away from the register, the second
clerk can interrupt the first clerk’s transaction by signing onto the register.
1. The second clerk registers item(s) into
the transaction, then finalise the
transaction with CASH key
CASH
2. The second clerk then signed off
automatically.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
MILK T1
ROUND
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 2
No.000064
TIME 08:30
$2.99
$0.01
$3.00
$3.00
$0.27
00001
Operating Instructions • 85
The First Clerk Finalises Their Transaction
While the first clerk is serving the customer, but walk away from the register, the second
clerk can interrupt the first clerk’s transaction by signing on to the register.
1. The first clerk signs back on
1
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
CLERK
2. Continue the transaction, then finalise the
transaction with CASH key.
CLERK TOTAL
MAGAZINE T1
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
No.000065
TIME 08:30
$2.00
$5.00
$7.00
$7.00
$0.64
00001
CASH
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
3. The first clerk then signed off
automatically.
86 • Operating Instructions
CHECK #
DRINK T1
MAGAZINE T1
TOTAL
CASH
GST
CLERK 1
No.000071
TIME 08:30
#1
$2.00
$5.00
$7.00
$7.00
$0.64
00001
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Table Management
If Table Management is preferred, it can be used for short term account management such as
Restaurant Billing, Lay By or Bar Tab when based on Soft Check and the whole transaction has
less than 200 line records; or long term account management like Service Station or Caravan Park
when based on Hard Check and the transaction details are printed from internal printer or external
receipt or slip printer. There is no item/record limit on Hard Check.
Programming
For Table Management, a transaction can be stored in the cash register's memory, be recalled later,
with further item registrations then stored back to memory again, then recall and finalise the
transaction; or simply just recall the transaction, cash off, finalising the transaction.
Table Management may work under the Soft Check Track System or Hard Check Track System. If all
accounts in Table Management are supposed to be closed and fully paid off before a Z Financial
Report is made, the Table Management must run under Soft Check Track System. Such as
Restaurant Billing (Table Tracking), or Bar Tab. All transaction details except “account number”
and “balance of the amount” in Soft Check Track will be erased after a Z Financial Report.
With Soft Check Track System, the detail of the transaction will be remembered in the cash register’s
memory for that account until the account is paid off (and finalised). The transaction detail can be
printed again and again with the Soft Check Track system. Depending on the memory size and
arrangement, you may go up to 200 lines of receipt record for each account.
On the other hand, when all accounts in a Table Management are basically running more than a day,
which will not be paid off before a Z Financial Report, Table Management is recommended to run
under the Hard Check Track System. For example Monthly Account, Service Station, Lay By or
Caravan Park. All Transaction details are printed only one time to an internal printer, external POS
printer or slip printer. The register stores “account number” and “balance of the account”.
To Enter Table Management system (To Exit Clerk Interrupt System)
1. Activate Table Management (deactivate Clerk Interrupt). See Program Mode Æ
System Option Æ pg 17 (page 17) for detail.
2. Set Clerk Entry as 0:PUSH. See Program Mode Æ System Option Æ pg 1 (page 1) for
detail.
Open a Guest Check /Account with Scanner
On SPS-300 Series, it is possible to open a Guest Check / Account with a barcode scanner. When a
barcode scanner has been configured, press CHECK # key then scan an up to 9 digits barcode
(preceding 0s will be skipped), a Guest Check/Account can be open and recalled.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 87
Basic Operation
For Basic Operation, 4 function keys are involved - CHECK#, SERVICE, PRINTCHK, and
FINALISE.
Item
Registration
Open a New
Account
Table
(CHECK#)
Item
Registration
Print Check
(PRINTCHK)
Item
Registration
Part Payment(s)
New Balance
(SERVICE)
Print Check
(PRINTCHK)
Part Payment(s)
Finalise
(FINALISE)
Close the
Account
Full Payment(s)
In this system:The CHECK# function key is used to open an account, both new and ongoing accounts. The name of
the key can be changed for better understanding. For example, "Table#" for basic table management
operation. This Table# normally refers to the table number issued to a customer after their order is
registered.
The SERVICE function key is used to save an ongoing account to the cash register's memory with or
without modification. The function key's name can be changed to "New Balance" for better
understanding.
The PRINTCHK function key is used to print the current detail of a account before the account is
finalised. Two options of the PRINTCHK function key - "Automatic service check?" and "Print
check on receipt?" need to set to Yes for better operation. “Print Check” is the full name of the
function key, alternatively, “Print Bill” will make is easier to understand.
NOTE: The PRINTCHK (Print Check) function key will not work in Hard Check Track System.
The FINALISE function key is used only when Split Bill or Part Payment is used in your account
system. The option "Require to close the check?" of the function key needs to set to Yes in order to
make FINALISE key working properly.
How does it work:Following example will be based on the Restaurant Billing with Part Payment.
88 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Opening a New Table (Account)
1. Enter the number of the guest check,
press the Table# (CHECK#) key:
1
2
3
TABLE#
2. Register the items you wish to sell.
3. To total the posting, press New Balance
(SERVICE):
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TABLE#
CHICKEN
STEAK
NEW BALANCE
BFWD
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
#123
$7.00
$10.00
$17.00
$17.00
$1.55
No.000066
00001
NEW
BALANCE
Re-Open the Table (Account) and Add More Items
1. Enter the number of the guest check,
press the Table# (CHECK#) key:
1
2
3
TABLE#
2. Register the next items you wish to sell.
3. To total the posting, press New Balance
(SERVICE):
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TABLE#
GARLIC BREAD
NEW BALANCE
BFWD
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
#123
$2.00
$2.00
$19.00
$1.73
No.000067
00001
NEW
BALANCE
Printing a Soft Check (Pro Forma)
1. Enter the number of the guest check,
press the Table# (CHECK#) key:
1
2
3
TABLE#
2. Press Print Check (PRINTCHK) to print
the complete check. the Print Check
(PRINTCHK) key will automatically
service the check:
PRINT
CHECK
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TABLE#
NEW BALANCE
BFWD
GST
CLERK 1
CLERK 1
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
#123
$0.00
$19.00
$1.73
No.000068
00001
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TABLE#
PBAL
CHICKEN
STEAK
GARLIC BREAD
NEW BALANCE
BFWD
TIME 08:30
TIME 08:30
#123
$19.00
$7.00
$10.00
$2.00
$0.00
$19.00
CHK # : 1
No.000068
00001
Operating Instructions • 89
Deposit or Part Payment of the Table (Account)
Receipt Example:
1. Enter the number of the guest check,
press the Table# (CHECK#) key:
1
2
3
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TABLE#
TABLE#
5
0
0
#123
** PAYMENT **
2. To enter a Deposit or Account payment,
simply enter the amount given and press
the tender type followed by the New
Balance (SERVICE):
1
TIME 08:30
CASH
NEW BALANCE
BFWD
GST
CLERK 1
$15.00
$0.00
$4.00
$1.73
No.000070
00001
CASH
NEW
BALANCE
Finalise the Table to Close Account
Receipt Example:
1. Enter the number of the guest check,
press the Table# (CHECK#) key:
1
2
3
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TABLE#
2. Press the FINALISE key then enter
amount tendered as you would normally
tender a transaction, with CASH,
CHECK, or one of the CHARGE keys.
If the tender is greater than the balance
due, change is displayed.
FINALISE
5
0
0
CASH
TABLE #
CHECKS PAID
TOTAL
PAYMENT
CASH
CHANGE
GST
CLERK 1
CLERK 1
90 • Operating Instructions
#123
$19.00
$19.00
$15.00
$5.00
$1.00
$1.73
No.000071
00001
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TABLE #
CHICKEN
STEAK
GARLIC BREAD
CASH
CHANGE
CHECKS PAID
TOTAL
PAYMENT
CASH
CHANGE
GST
TIME 08:30
TIME 08:30
#123
$7.00
$10.00
$2.00
$15.00
$0.00
$19.00
$19.00
$15.00
$5.00
$1.00
$1.73
CHECK # : 2
No.000071
00001
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Paying a Soft Check without Payment Key required to Close Check
1. Enter the number of the guest check,
press the CHECK # key:
1
2
3
CHECK#
or, if you entered a table number, enter
the table number and press the TABLE
key:
3
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
CHECK #
PBAL
TABLE
CHECKS PAID
CASH
CHANGE
CLERK 1
TABLE
TIME 08:30
#123
$19.00
#3
$19.00
$20.00
$1.00
CHK # : 2
No.000069
00001
2. Pay the balance, as you would normally
tender a transaction, with CASH,
CHECK, or one of the CHARGE keys.
If the tender is greater than the balance
due, change is displayed.
2
0
0
0
CASH
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 91
Advanced Operation - Table Transfer
For Advanced Operation, 1 additional function key - TABLE - is need for Table Transfer along
with those 4 function keys - CHECK#, SERVICE, PRINTCHK, and FINALISE for Table
Management.
Open a New
Account
Reopen an
Account
New Table
(MACRO)
Table
(TABLE)
Item
Registration
Item
Registration
Print Check
(PRINTCHK)
Item
Registration
Part Payment(s)
New Balance
(SERVICE)
Print Check
(PRINTCHK)
Part Payment(s)
Finalise
(FINALISE)
Close the
Account
Full Payment(s)
In a Restaurant Billing situation, the TABLE function key is used to assign an additional table
number to an account. This “Table #” represents the number of each table in the restaurant.
In Advance Operation, as TABLE function key is in use, The CHECK # function is recommended to
rename to “Bill #” in order to distinguish this key from the TABLE function key.
With default settings, more then one Bill (CHECK #) may be assigned to same table. To avoid this
happening, please set “One Check Per Table” to Yes.
92 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
To maximise the convenience and minimise the complexity, the recommend programming is:
In Service Mode:
1. Program an additional MACRO function key to keyboard. MACRO 1 ~ 4 have been
programmed on the default keyboard. Do this only if those 4 MACRO keys has been used for
some other features. Please see 6.KEY ASSIGNMENT for detail.
In Program Mode:
1. Program the “New Table” MACRO key with key sequence “TABLE Æ CHECK #” in
PGM-Mode. Please see MACRO (Program Mode Æ PAGE DOWN Æ 00) for detail.
2. Program CHECK# function keys with “Assigned by Register” sets to Yes in PGM-Mode.
Please see Function Keys for detail.
NOTE : There are more settings related to CHECK # and TABLE keys in printing on function key
themselves and in Print Option, please contact your dealer for detail.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 93
Opening a New Table (Account)
1. Enter the number of the Table, press the
New Table (MACRO) key:
1
2
3
NEW
TABLE
2. Register the items you wish to sell.
3. To total the posting, press New Balance
(SERVICE):
NEW
BALANCE
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
CHECK #
TABLE
CHICKEN
STEAK
NEW BALANCE
BFWD
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
#1
#123
$7.00
$10.00
$17.00
$17.00
$1.55
No.000066
00001
Re-Open the Table (Account) and Add More Items
1. Enter the number of the Table, press the
Table (TABLE) key:
1
2
3
TABLE
2. Register the next items you wish to sell.
3. To total the posting, press New Balance
(SERVICE):
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
CHECK #
TABLE
GARLIC BREAD
NEW BALANCE
BFWD
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
#1
#123
$2.00
$2.00
$19.00
$1.73
No.000067
00001
NEW
BALANCE
To Transfer a Table
1. Enter the number of the Table, press the
Table (TABLE) key:
1
2
3
TABLE
2. Enter the number of the New Table, press
the Table (TABLE) key:
1
0
5
TABLE
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
CHECK #
TABLE
TABLE
NEW BALANCE
BFWD
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
#1
#123
#105
$0.00
$19.00
$1.73
No.000067
00001
3. To store this Table Transfer, press New
Balance (SERVICE):
NEW
BALANCE
NOTE : After Transfer Table, the account has to open with new table number.
94 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Additional Operation - Guest Number and Tip
For Additional Operation, 2 additional function keys - GUEST and TIP - are involved for Guest
Number and Tip amount recording for Table Management.
The GUEST function key is used to record number of customers in an account for reference. The
number of guest can be entered any time while an account remains open.
The Tip function key is used to record amount of tip has been given. A Tip can be recorded at any
time after SUBTOTAL is pressed while an account remains open.
Enter Number of Guest (when Reopen an Account)
1. Enter the number of the Table, press the
Table (TABLE) key:
1
2
3
TABLE
2. Enter the number of the Guest, then press
GUEST key:
3
GUEST
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
CHECK #
TABLE
GUEST
NEW BALANCE
BFWD
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
#1
#123
#3
$0.00
$19.00
$1.73
No.000067
00001
3. To store this Guest number entry in to
the account, press New Balance
(SERVICE):
NEW
BALANCE
Enter a Tip (when Reopen an Account)
1. Enter the number of the Table, press the
Table (TABLE) key:
1
2
3
TABLE
2. Press SUBTOTAL key
SUBTOTAL
3. Enter the amount of the Tip, then press
TIP key:
5
0
0
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
CHECK #
TABLE
SUBTOTAL
TIP
NEW BALANCE
BFWD
GST
CLERK 1
TIME 08:30
#1
#123
$19.00
#5.00
$5.00
$24.00
$1.73
No.000067
00001
TIP
4. To store this Tip entry, press New
Balance (SERVICE):
NEW
BALANCE
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 95
Scale Operations
The SPS-300 Series can be interfaced to an optional load-cell scale. The scale interface allows direct
entry of an item's weight using the SCALE function. You can also choose "manual entry" scale
operation if you are working with a standalone scale that is not interfaced to the cash register.
•
PLUs must be set to "scalable" status to allow scale multiplication. If you attempt an entry
into a PLU that has been programmed "scalable", an error tone will sound and the operator
will be prompted to make a scale entry.
•
PLUs can be set to "auto scale" status to speed up scale entries by automatically retrieving
the weight on the scale and multiplying the amount entered.
A tare is the amount of weight accounted for by the container or packaging. By entering a tare weight
(as required by law in some areas) the weight of the container is subtracted and only the true weight
of the product is measured on the scale. By entering the tare number (1-5) the operator can
automatically subtract the predetermined container weight when a product is on the scale.
•
PLUs can be set to "auto tare" status to automatically subtract one of the pre-programmed
tare weights when the PLU is registered.
Refer to the Manual to set your scale options. See:
•
Service Mode Programming, Function Key Assignment to program SCALE and TARE
keys on the keyboard.
•
Service Mode Programming, RS232C Port 1,2,3 or 4 Options to program a scale to one of
the ports.
•
Program Mode Programming, Function Key Programming to set options for the SCALE
and TARE keys.
•
Program Mode Programming, PLU Programming to set scalable, auto scale, or auto
tare status on the PLUs.
NOTE: Decimal point key is only used for weight (kg) entry, never for dollar amount.
96 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Direct Scale Entry
Place a product on the scale and access the SCALE function to display the weight on the cash
register. Then make the appropriate entry; the PLU must have "SCALABLE" status.
1. Place an item on the scale.
2. Press the SCALE key.
SCALE
3. Note that the weight is displayed on the
screen. Enter the price per kilo on the
number pad. Do not use the decimal key.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
PLU1
$4.50
1.500kg @ $3.00/kg
TOTAL
$4.50
CASH
$4.50
CLERK 1
No.000077
00001
For example, for $3.00, enter:
3
0
0
4. Press a scalable PLU.
For example, press PLU 1:
1
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 97
Tare Weight Entry
Receipt Example:
1. Place an item on the scale.
2. Enter the pre-programmed tare number.
Press the TARE key.
1
TARE
3. Press the SCALE key.
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
PLU1
$4.47
1.490kg @ $3.00/kg
ROUND
-0.02
TOTAL
$4.45
CASH
$4.45
CLERK 1
No.000079
00001
SCALE
4. Note that the weight, less the tare weight,
is displayed on the screen. Enter the price
per kilo on the number pad. Do not use
the decimal key.
For example, for $3.00, enter:
3
0
0
5. Press a PLU.
For example, press PLU 1:
1
98 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Manual Tare Weight Entry
1. Place an item on the scale.
2. Enter the manual tare number, 5. Press
the TARE key:
5
TARE
3. Enter the weight of the tare.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
PLU1
$4.47
1.490kg @ $3.00/kg
ROUND
-0.02
TOTAL
$4.45
CASH
$4.45
CLERK 1
No.000080
00001
For example, enter .01, press the tare
key:
.
0
1
TARE
4. Press the SCALE key.
SCALE
5. Note that the weight, less the tare weight,
is displayed on the screen. Enter the price
per kilo on the number pad. Do not use
the decimal key.
For example, for $3.00, enter:
3
0
0
6. Press a PLU.
For example, press PLU 1:
1
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Operating Instructions • 99
Automatic Scale Entry
Place a product on the scale and make the appropriate PLU entry. The PLU must be set with "AUTO
SCALE " & “SCALABLE” status.
Receipt Example:
1. Place an item on the scale.
2. Press a PLU key, if the item is a preset
item, or enter the price per kilo on the
number pad. Do not use the decimal key.
For example, for $3.00, enter:
3
0
0
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
PLU1
$4.50
1.500kg @ $3.00/kg
TOTAL
$4.50
CASH
$4.50
CLERK 1
No.000078
00001
3. Press a PLU.
For example, press PLU 1:
1
Manual Weight Entry
Operators can make manual weight entries if the item has been programmed to accept them. You
must use the decimal key to enter fractional manual weights.
Receipt Example:
1. Place an item on the scale.
2. Enter the weight using the decimal key
for fractional weights. Press the SCALE
key:
1
.
5
SCALE
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
PLU1
$4.50
1.500kg MANUAL WT.
@ $3.00/kg
TOTAL
$4.50
CASH
$4.50
CLERK 1
No.000081
00001
3. Enter the price per kilo on the number
pad. Do not use the decimal key.
For example, for $3.00, enter:
3
0
0
4. Press a PLU.
For example, press PLU 1:
1
100 • Operating Instructions
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
X Mode
Manager Mode
Turn the control lock to the X position to display the MANAGER MODE menu:
MANAGER MODE
0.MANAGER OPERATION
1.X REPORTS
2.DECLARATION
3.REG. PRINT FORMAT
4.STOP RECEIPT PRINTING
5.STOP JOURNAL PRINTING
6.TRAIN MODE
È
Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the MANAGER MODE menu:
MANAGER MODE
7.E.J. OPERATION
8.NOT FOUND PLU
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Ç
X Mode • 101
Manager Operation
Choose Manager Operation to access the Manager Mode screen, where operations allowed only with
manager control can be performed.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 0 to enter manager mode:
MANAGER MODE
2. The MANAGER MODE screen displays.
3. Complete the operation requiring manager control.
102 • X Mode
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
X Reports
X reports read, but do not reset, totals and counters within a report.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 1 to select X Reports:
MANAGER MODE
* ENTER REPORT# TO ISSUE
X REPORT
* PRESS CASH TO VIEW REPORT LIST
* PRESS ESC TO RETURN
TO MANAGER MODE MENU
2. If you know the number of the report you wish to generate, enter the number and press
ENTER (CASH). If you wish to look up the report number, press ENTER (CASH) to view
the X Report List, then press the number of the report you wish to generate.
X REPORT LIST
0.FINANCIAL
1.TIME
2.PLU
3.CLERKS
4.GROUPS
5.DAY
6.STOCK
PG1 È
Press PAGE DOWN to view the second page of reports:
X REPORT LIST
7.CLERK TIME
8.OPEN CHECK
9.DRAWER TOTALS
00.TRAIN FINANCIAL
DEC. MIX & MATCH
PG2 Ç
3. When a report is selected, the X REPORT OPTIONS screen displays:
X REPORT OPTIONS
RPT# :
FINANCIAL
1. TYPE :
0Å
0:DAILY 1:PERIOD
2. 0:PRINT 1:DISPLAY
0
3. IRC
0
0:STANDALONE
1:ALL 2:SELECT
4. Select the TYPE (DAILY or PERIOD), PRINT or DISPLAY, and the IRC configuration.
Refer to the explanations in the table below. Press ENTER (CASH) after each selection.
After the last selection, the report will start.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
X Mode • 103
5. If IRC is SELECT, then the register selection displays:
X REPORT OPTIONS
RPT# :
FINANCIAL
1. TYPE :
0
0:DAILY 1:PERIOD
2. 0:PRINT 1:DISPLAY
0
3. IRC
2
# 1YÅ2N 3N 4N 5N 6N 7N 8N 9N
10N 11N 12N 13N 14N 15N 16N
6. Press the YES/NO key at each register # to select whether you wish to include each register
in the consolidated report. Press ENTER (CASH) after each selection. According to the IRC
Options in Service Mode, the report will print after the selection passes the maximum
machine number in the IRC network.
NOTE: When machine number selected (set to Y) within IRC Network does not present, the
report will not be printed and an error message “IRC NOT READY(#)” will show
on the display with beep. (# is the machine number of the machine not available)
X Report Options Table
Page
Field
Description
TYPE
Select X1 or X2 if available for the selected report.
OUTPUT
Select PRINT or DISPLAY output.
IRC
Select STANDALONE, ALL, or SELECT if available for
the selected report. If SELECT, the screen will prompt for
selection of registers - the screen will initially show the
registers available from the from/to IRC register
programming, for example if the IRC range is from 1 to 3,
then the selection will default to:
#
104 • X Mode
1Y 2Y 3Y 4N 5N 6N 7N 8N 9N
10Y 11N 12N 13N 14N 15N 16N
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Cash Declaration
Cash declaration is the process of counting and reporting media in drawer before a report is taken.
"Enforce cash declaration" is an option that requires to the operator to declare amounts of media in
the drawer before a financial, clerk, or cash in drawer report can be generated. The purpose of this
feature is to insure accurate reporting, even in case of an overage. You can enforce declaration by
setting the appropriate system option. See "System Option Programming".
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 2 to display the DELCARATION SCREEN:
DECLARATION SCREEN.
CASH
CHECK
CHARGE1
F/S TEND
TOTAL
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2. At the DECLARATION SCREEN, enter cash amounts, press the CASH key. Enter checks
individually, or enter a check total, press the CHECK key. Enter a charge total, press the
CHARGE1~8 key. Enter Food Stamps, press the F/S TEND key. You can make as many
entries as you wish, the screen will keep running totals. You may wish to use the X/TIME
key to multiply. For example if you are declaring 37 quarters, you can enter 37, press
X/TIME, enter 25, then press CASH. The result is added to the cash declared running total
on the screen.
3. When you have completed declaration entries, press the CASH key again to finalize and total
your declaration. The screen will display the total declared input, the drawer total and the
difference (over/short).
DECLARATION SCREEN.
INPUT AMT
DRAWER TTL
31.00
17.00
DIFFERENCE
-14.00
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
X Mode • 105
Register Print Format
You can designate the SPS-300 printer to print either a receipt, or a sales journal. If you select journal
format, the preamble/postamble will not print. If you select receipt format, the preamble/postamble
will print and the receipt will feed sufficiently for paper tear-off.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 3 to set the receipt format:
REG. PRINTING FORMAT
REGISTER PRINTING IS
CURRENTLY RECEIPT
TO SET TO JOURNAL
PRESS YES AND CASH
2. The REG. PRINTING FORMAT screen displays. Press the YES/NO key to toggle from
receipt to journal format. The screen will display the current status. Press ENTER (CASH) to
set the new format.
REG. PRINTING FORMAT
REGISTER PRINTING IS
CURRENTLY RECEIPT
TO SET TO JOURNAL
PRESS YES AND CASH
106 • X Mode
REG. PRINTING FORMAT
↔
REGISTER PRINTING IS
CURRENTLY JOURNAL
TO SET TO RECEIPT
PRESS YES AND CASH
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Stop Receipt Printing
You can turn the receipt printer to an on or off condition. In the off condition transactions will not be
printed, but reports will continue to print, if requested.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 4 to set printing on or off:
REG. PRINTING ON/OFF
REGISTER PRINTING
IS CURRENTLY ON
TO TURN OFF
PRESS YES AND CASH
2. The REG. PRINTING ON/OFF screen displays. Press the YES/NO key to toggle from on
to off. The screen will display the current status. Press ENTER (CASH) to set.
REG. PRINTING ON/OFF
REG. PRINTING ON/OFF
REGISTER PRINTING
IS CURRENTLY ON
REGISTER PRINTING
IS CURRENTLY OFF
↔
TO TURN OFF
PRESS YES AND CASH
TO TURN ON
PRESS YES AND CASH
Stop Journal Printing
You can turn the journal printer to an on or off condition. In the off condition transactions will not be
printed on journal side.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 5 to set printing on or off:
JOURNAL PRINTING ON/OFF
JOURNAL PRINTING
IS CURRENTLY ON
TO TURN OFF
PRESS YES AND CASH
2. The JOURNAL PRINTING ON/OFF screen displays. Press the YES/NO key to toggle
from on to off. The screen will display the current status. Press ENTER (CASH) to set.
JOURNAL PRINTING ON/OFF
JOURNAL PRINTING ON/OFF
JOURNAL PRINTING
IS CURRENTLY ON
JOURNAL PRINTING
IS CURRENTLY OFF
TO TURN OFF
PRESS YES AND CASH
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
↔
TO TURN ON
PRESS YES AND CASH
X Mode • 107
Training Mode
A training mode is available so that the register can be operated, to practice registrations, without
updating totals and s. If you choose to use training mode, you must set a training mode password (see
"Program Mode Æ Training Mode Password").
NOTE: If you make registrations to check tracking numbers in training mode, remember that the
check tracking total will be updated. Remember to pay, or clear any check tracking
registrations before resuming normal operations.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 6 to enter or exit training mode:
ENTER/EXIT TRAINING
REGIST. IS CURRENTLY
NOT IN TRAINING
TO ENTER TRAINING,
ENTER 4 DIGIT PASSWD
AND PRESS CASH
2. The ENTER/EXIT TRAINING screen displays. The screen will display the current status.
To enter training mode, type your four digit password (you must enter preceding zeros) and
press ENTER (CASH). To exit training mode, type 0000 and press ENTER (CASH).
ENTER/EXIT TRAINING
REGIST. IS CURRENTLY
NOT IN TRAINING
TO ENTER TRAINING,
ENTER 4 DIGIT PASSWD
AND PRESS CASH
ENTER/EXIT TRAINING
REGIST. IS CURRENTLY
IN TRAINING
TO EXIT TRAINING,
ENTER ‘0000’
AND PRESS CASH
****
ENTER/EXIT TRAINING
Æ
REGIST. IS CURRENTLY
IN TRAINING
TO EXIT TRAINING,
ENTER ‘0000’
AND PRESS CASH
****
NOTE: If you forget your password, please contact your dealer.
108 • X Mode
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
E.J. Operation
An electronic journal feature is available on the SPS-300. The electronic journal captures the sales
journal in the register memory. If you intend to use the electronic journal, you must allocate sufficient
memory (see "Memory Allocation ".) and activate the journal and set related journal capture options
(see "Program Mode Æ System Option Programming").
Use this program to print all or selected parts of the journal memory. Please note, this program will
not clear the electronic journal. See "Z (Reset Report) Mode Æ Reset Electronic Journal" to clear
the E.J.
1. From the MANAGER MODE menu press 7 to print the electronic journal:
0.PRINT
1.PRINT
2.PRINT
3.PRINT
4.PRINT
5.PRINT
6.PRINT
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL
ALL EJ
ONLY CASH
ONLY CHECK
ONLY MISC TEND
ONLY %
ONLY RA/PO
ONLY RETURN
È
2. Press PAGE DOWN to view the remaining electronic journal options:
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL
7.PRINT ONLY ERR.CORR/VOID
8.PRINT ONLY NOSALE
9.PRINT ONLY CANCEL
00.PRINT BY CLERK
Ç
3. Type the digit that represents the portion of the electronic journal you wish to print. If you
select 00 for print by clerk, you will be prompted to enter the appropriate clerk number.
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL
CLERK NO? (1-10)
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
0Å
X Mode • 109
Not Found PLU Report
A Not Found PLU Report is available to print out up to 50 newly programmed PLUs which are
programmed through item registration procedure. You can print out this report if you wish to
complete programming for those PLUs. PLU# will print first then followed by PLU name.
1. On X (Manager) Mode screen (either the first page or the second page, press 8, then the Not
Found PLU Report will print.
MANAGER MODE
0.MANAGER OPERATION
1.X REPORTS
2.DECLARATION
3.REG. PRINT FORMAT
4.STOP RECEIPT PRINTING
5.STOP JOURNAL PRINTING
6.TRAIN MODE
110 • X Mode
È
MANAGER MODE
7.E.J. OPERATION
8.NOT FOUND PLU
Ç
or
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Z Mode
Reset Report Mode
Turn the control lock to the Z position to display the RESET REPORT MODE menu:
RESET REPORT MODE
0.Z REPORTS
1.RESET E.J
2.PC COMMUNICATION
3.MIX & MATCH PROGRAM
4.MIX & MATCH SCAN
5.PLU LOOKUP PROGRAM
6.AGE VERIFICATION
È
Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the RESET REPORT MODE menu:
RESET REPORT MODE
7.RESET NOT FOUND PLU
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Ç
Z Mode • 111
Z Reports
Z reports read, then reset totals within a report.
1. From the RESET REPORT MODE menu press 1 to select Z Reports:
RESET REPORT MODE
* ENTER REPORT# TO ISSUE
Z REPORT
* PRESS CASH TO VIEW REPORT LIST
* PRESS ESC TO RETURN
TO MANAGER MODE MENU
2. If you know the number of the report you wish to generate, enter the number and press
ENTER (CASH). If you wish to look up the number, press ENTER (CASH) to view the Z
Report List, then press the number of the report you wish to generate.
Z REPORT LIST
0.FINANCIAL
1.TIME
2.PLU
3.CLERKS
4.GROUPS
5.DAY
6.STOCK
PG1 È
Press PAGE DOWN to view the second page of reports:
Z REPORT LIST
7.CLERK TIME
8.OPEN CHECK
00.TRAIN FINANCIAL
DEC. MIX & MATCH
PG2 Ç
3. When a report is selected, the Z REPORT OPTIONS screen displays:
Z REPORT OPTIONS
RPT# :
FINANCIAL
1. TYPE :
0Å
0:DAILY 1:PERIOD
2. 0:PRINT
0
3. IRC
0
0:STANDALONE
1:ALL 2:SELECT
4. Select the TYPE (DAILY or PERIOD and the IRC configuration. Refer to the explanations in
the table below. Press ENTER (CASH) after each selection. After the last selection, the
report will start.
112 • Z Mode
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
5. If IRC is SELECT, then the register selection displays:
Z REPORT OPTIONS
RPT# :
FINANCIAL
1. TYPE :
0
0:DAILY 1:PERIOD
2. 0:PRINT
0
3. IRC
2
# 1YÅ2N 3N 4N 5N 6N 7N 8N 9N
10N 11N 12N 13N 14N 15N 16N
6. Press the YES/NO key at each register # to select whether you wish to include each register
in the consolidated report. Press ENTER (CASH) after each selection. According to the IRC
Options in Service Mode, the report will print after the selection passes the maximum
machine number in the IRC network.
Z Report Options Table
Page
Field
Description
TYPE
Select Z1 or Z2 if available for the selected report.
OUTPUT
Select PRINT output.
IRC
Select STANDALONE, ALL, or SELECT if available for the selected
report. If SELECT, the screen will prompt for selection of registers - the
screen will initially show the registers available from the from/to IRC
register programming, for example if the IRC range is from 1 to 3, then the
selection will default to:
#
1Y 2Y 3Y 4N 5N 6N 7N 8N 9N
10Y 11N 12N 13N 14N 15N 16N
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Z Mode • 113
Reset Electronic Journal
An electronic journal feature is available on the SPS-300. The electronic journal captures the sales
journal in the register memory. If you intend to use the electronic journal, you must allocate sufficient
memory (see "Memory Allocation".) and activate the journal and set related journal capture options
(see "System Option Programming ").
Use this to clear the journal memory. The journal will not be printed. To read all or selected parts of
the E.J., see "X (Manager) Mode Æ E.J. Operation".
1. From the RESET REPORT MODE menu press 2 to clear the electronic journal:
RESET ELECT. JOURNAL
ARE YOU SURE ?
NO
2. The screen asks: ARE YOU SURE ?. Press the YES/NO key to toggle to yes, then press
ENTER (CASH) to clear the report.
RESET ELECT. JOURNAL
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES
NOTE: When reset Electronic Journal, no journal will print but “ELECTRONIC JOURNAL
RESET”.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL RESET
CLERK 1
No.000011
00001
PC Communication
In SPS-300, there is no special commands to enter PC Online Mode.
However, you must have one of the RS232C ports configured for PC communications. See "Service
Mode Programming Æ 8.RS232 PORT” for detail.
When the PC sends commands to ECR, the ECR will automatically go to the PC Online Mode if
correctly connected.
114 • Z Mode
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Mix & Match Program
There are 99 Mix and Match Tables available in the SPS-300. This table is linked to PLU status in
PROGRAM MODE.
1. From the RESET REPORT MODE menu press 3 to select MIX & MATCH No. The MIX
& MATCH screen displays:
MIX & MATCH
ENTER MIX & MATCH
NUMBER (1-99)
0Å
2. Enter the number of the MIX & MATCH TABLE you wish to program, press ENTER
(CASH).
MIX & MATCH
M & M 1
COUNT :
AMOUNT :
0Å
0.00
3. Enter the count (number of items to buy) and amount to be deducted (reduce price), press
ENTER (CASH).
Mix & Match Program Scan
You can make a printed record of your Mix & Match program. This program scan will print only
non-zero Mix & Match group.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Z Mode • 115
PLU Lookup Program
You can assign up to fifteen PLU LOOK UP keys on the keyboard. (See “Function Key
Assignment” in the “Service Mode Programming” chapter). Each of the PLU LOOK UP keys can be
programmed here to list specific PLUs.
1. From the RESET REPORT MODE menu press 5 to select PLU LOOKUP PGM. The
PLU LOOKUP PGM screen displays:
PLU LOOKUP PROGRAM
PUSH LOOKUP NUMBER
TO BE PROGRAMMED
AND PRESS CASH
(1-15)
0Å
2. Enter the number of the PLU LOOKUP key you wish to program, press ENTER (CASH).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
0Å
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3. With the cursor pointed at the first position of the PLU LOOKUP screen, select a PLU by
typing the PLU number and pressing ENTER (CASH). The descriptor for the PLU will
display, and the cursor will advance to the next position.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
PLU9
0Å
0
0
0
0
0
0
4. Continue to select PLUs for the PLU LOOKUP key as necessary. If you are editing an
existing PLU LOOK UP key, press ENTER (CASH) to advance the cursor without
changing the current line.
5. If you wish to remove an item from the PLU LOOKUP key, place the cursor on the line to
be removed, press the VOID key.
6. Press ESC to return to the RESET REPORT MODE menu and save changes.
116 • Z Mode
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Age Verification
In most areas, the sale of tobacco and/or alcoholic beverages to minors is prohibited. The SPS-300
offers an age verification feature that helps control the sale of restricted items by forcing the operator
to enter a birth date before a controlled item can be registered. If the date entered shows that the
customer has not yet reached the appropriate age, the item cannot be registered. This feature serves as
a reminder to check the customer’s identification.
Because different categories of items might require different ages (for example, alcohol might require
age 21, while tobacco might require age 18) up to five different age categories can be defined.
This program allows you to set the required age for each of the five available age categories. See
“Group Programming” in the “Program Mode Programming” chapter to link an age category to
groups of PLU items.
NOTE: When age verification is implemented, an age entry is required only for the first controlled
item from each age category.
1. From the RESET REPORT MODE menu press 6 to select AGE VERIFICATION. The
AGE VERIFICATION screen displays:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AGE VERIFICATION
0Å
0
0
0
0
2. Enter the age required for the first group of age-restricted items, press ENTER (CASH). (For
example, enter 21 if the sale of liquor requires an age of 21. You must also program the age
verification category of “1” for all groups of liquor items).
3. If other items are to be restricted by a different age, program additional age verification
groups as necessary.
4. Press ESC to return to the RESET REPORT MODE menu and save changes.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Z Mode • 117
Reset Not Found PLU Report
A Reset Not Found PLU Report is available to reset the report. This function will still print the
NOT Found PLU Report then reset it. On the report, PLU# will print first then followed by PLU
name.
1. On Z (Reset Report) Mode screen (either the first page or the second page), press 7, then a
Not Found PLU Report will print then the report will be reset.
RESET REPORT MODE
0.Z REPORTS
1.RESET E.J
2.PC COMMUNICATION
3.MIX & MATCH PROGRAM
4.MIX & MATCH SCAN
5.PLU LOOKUP PROGRAM
6.AGE VERIFICATION
118 • Z Mode
È
RESET REPORT MODE
7.RESET NOT FOUND PLU
Ç
or
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Service Mode Programming
Overview
The Service Mode Programming requires careful reading. You may want to contact your dealer for
assistance. The following procedures are available in the Service Mode Programming.
•
Memory All Clear (Clear All Memory back to factory default)
•
Hardware Tests
•
Clear all totals
•
Clear grand total
•
Clear/Delete PLU file
•
EPROM Information
•
Memory Allocation
•
Assignment of functions to keyboard locations
•
IRC (Inter Registers Communication) Options
•
RS232C Port 1, 2, 3 & 4 Options.
•
SD Card Operations
•
PC Utility Operations
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Service Mode Programming • 119
Turn the key to the SM position (one position clockwise from the PGM position) to display the
SERVICE MODE menu:
SERVICE MODE
0.H/W TEST
1.CLEAR ALL TOTALS
2.CLEAR GRAND TOTAL
3.CLEAR PLU FILE
4.FLASHROM INFORMATION
5.MEMORY ALLOCATION
6.KEY ASSIGNMENT
È
Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the SERVICE MODE menu:
SERVICE MODE
7.IRC OPTIONS
8.RS232C PORT
9.SD CARD OPERATION
120 • Service Mode Programming
Ç
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Memory All Clear
Before you use your SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register for the first time, you must perform a
Memory All Clear to insure that all totals and counters are cleared and that the factory default
program is installed.
CAUTION: The procedures described in this area are security sensitive. Clearing all or parts of
the memory may cause damage or loss to the program. Do not share this
information with unauthorised users and distribute the special SERVICE-Mode
key only to those you may want to perform these functions.
Perform "Clear All Totals", or "Clear PLU File" if you wish to clear only parts of memory.
Complete clearing of all memory areas and installation of the default program can be done through
the following special procedure:
Memory All Clear (RAM All Clear)
To Perform a Memory All Clear (reset memory completely)
1. Turn the power switch located on the right side of the register to the OFF position.
2. Turn the control lock to the S position (one past PGM position, a hidden position).
3. For SPS-320/340 (150 key Flat keyboard Models)
Press and hold the key position where the CHECK key is located on the default
keyboard layout.
For SPS-325/345 (98 key Raised keyboard Models
Press and hold the key position where the SUBTOTAL key is located on the default
keyboard layout.
↑ SPS-320/340
↑ SPS-325/345
4. Continue to hold the CHECK button while turning the power switch to the ON position.
5. After the BEEP, release the CHECK button, RAM ALL CLEAR will appear on the
display.
RAM ALL CLEAR
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Service Mode Programming • 121
6. Press the upper left button (PLU #1) of the keyboard, then the lower left button (PLU
#10), then the upper right button (CLERK), and finally press the lower right button
(CASH). After each button press, a Å symbol appears on the lower line of display.
1
11
21
31
41
51
61
71
81
91
2
12
22
32
42
52
62
72
82
92
3
13
23
33
43
53
63
73
83
93
4
14
24
34
44
54
64
74
84
94
5
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85
6
16
26
36
46
56
66
76
7
17
27
37
47
57
67
8
18
28
38
48
58
9
19
29
39
49
10
20
30
40
50
RECEIPT JOURNAL ERROR
VOID CLERK
FEED FEED* CORR
%1
RA
PO
# / NS RETURN
%2
TAKE
OUT
EAT
IN
DRIVE
CANCEL
THRU
%3
CHECK
TABLE PRINT
SERVICE
#
#
CHECK
95
FUNC
LOOKUP
1
PAGE
PAGE
YES/NO
CONV1
UP
DOWN
86
96
FUNC
LOOKUP CLEAR
2
77
87
97
MACRO
1
68
78
88
98
59
69
79
89
60
70
80
90
PLU
X/TIME
ADD
CHECK
7
8
9
CHARGE
1
MACRO
2
4
5
6
CHECK
99
MACRO
3
1
2
3
SUBTL
100
MACRO
4
0
00
y
CASH
↑ SPS-320/340
1
8
15
22
29
36
43
50
2
9
16
23
30
37
44
51
3
10
17
24
31
38
45
52
RECEIPT JOURNAL
ERROR
# / NS
CLERK
CORR
FEED FEED*
PAGE YES/NO PAGE
UP
DOWN
CLEAR
PLU
VOID
FUNC
LOOKUP
1
FUNC
X/TIME CANCEL LOOKUP
2
4
11
18
25
32
39
46
53
7
8
9
CHARGE
CHECK
1
5
12
19
26
33
40
47
54
4
5
6
SUB TOTAL
6
13
20
27
34
41
48
55
1
2
3
7
14
21
28
35
42
49
56
0
00
y
CASH
TEND
↑ SPS-325/345
RAM ALL CLEAR
← ← ← ←
RAM (16M)
122 • Service Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
7. After a while, OK appear on the right side of “RAM (16M)”, then “Please Wait ….”
appears last on the display.
RAM ALL CLEAR
← ← ← ←
RAM (16M)
OK
Please Wait ....
8. The display then shows 2-STATION PRINTER : ‘CASH’ Key 1-STATION
PRINTER : ‘CLEAR’.
For an SPS-320/325 (one printer station), press CLEAR
For an SPS-340/345 (two printer stations), press CASH
2-STATION PRINTER : ‘CASH’ Key
1-STATION PRINTER : ‘CLEAR’ Key
9. The display then shows AUTO CUT : ‘CASH’ Key NO CUT : ‘CLEAR’ Key.
If you want Auto Cutter to be enable, press CASH
If you want Auto Cutter to be disable, press CLEAR
AUTO CUT : ‘CASH’ Key
NO CUT
: ‘CLEAR’ Key
NOTE: AUTO AUTTER can be enable/disable in PROGRAM MODE Æ SYSTEM
OPTION Æ pg 17.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Service Mode Programming • 123
10. The display now shows USB PORT (SERIAL4) : ‘CASH’ Key RJ45 (SERIAL4) :
‘CLEAR’ Key.
For Australian standard model, Serial Port #4 is an USB port, unless modified. Please
have a look at the back panel inside the cover below Customer Display.
Press CASH if the COM Port #4 is a USB socket
Press CLEAR when COM Port #4 is an RJ45 Socket.
USB PORT(SERIAL4) : ‘CASH’ Key
RJ45
(SERIAL4) : ‘CLEAR’ Key
NOTE: Please check port arrangement prior to making the decision.
11. The RAM All Clear procedure is finished, then you will see “Please Wait ….” for the
following IRC Status test.
Please Wait ....
When IRC network is functioning, a “**
ETHERNET LINK SUCCESS!!! **”
will print.
Receipt Example:
** ETHERNET LINK SUCCESS!!! **
or…
When test result fails, an “**
ETHERNET LINK FAIL!!! **” will
print. This is when the register is either a
Standalone unit, or there is a problem on
the IRC network.
Receipt Example:
** ETHERNET LINK FAIL!!! **
NOTE: Please see Clerk Sign-On/Sign-Off for detail when CLOSED appears on the display
after IRC Status Test.
124 • Service Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Hardware Test
Various components of the SPS-300 can be tested by using this program.
1. From SERVICE MODE menu press 0 to display the H/W TEST menu:
0.TEST
1.TEST
2.TEST
3.TEST
4.TEST
5.TEST
6.TEST
H/W TEST
PRINTER
DISPLAY
KEYBOARD
MODE
RS-232
MCR
DALLAS
È
Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the H/W TEST menu:
H/W TEST
7.TEST SD CARD
8.PRINTING PATTERN
Ç
2. Press the digit representing the test you wish to perform. See the table that follows for notes
about each test.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Service Mode Programming • 125
Hardware Test Table
Page
1
2
Test
Description
PRINTER
A printer test pattern is printed. The H/W TEST menu
automatically returns when the test is complete.
DISPLAY
A display test is initiated. The H/W TEST menu
automatically returns when the test is complete.
KEYBOARD
The display indicates: "KEYBOARD TEST". Press any key
location to display its' position. Turn the key lock to end the
test.
MODE
Check the mode lock with this test. As you turn the key lock,
the display will show the current position. Return the key to
the SERVICE position to end the test.
RS-232
Select LOOP TEST PORT 1,2,3,4 or LOOP TEST IRC. (to
loop test port 1,2,3 or 4 , a loop back connector must be in
place; to loop test IRC, the IRC cable must be connected
between all registers.) Then after a moment, the display
indicates NG (not good) or OK.
IRC RANGE
This test checks communication with each register
programmed in IRC options. Reports pass or fail.
TEST MCR
Check the MCR. (MCR must be in placed). Select this menu
and then swiped the card through the machine.
TEST DALLAS
Check the DALLAS. Select this menu and then contacted the
Dallas key.
TEST SD CARD
Check the SD CARD. After insert the SD CARD in slot,
select this menu.
126 • Service Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Clear All Totals
This section clears all totals and counters, including the grand total. The Clear All Totals will not
change your program.
1. From SERVICE MODE menu press 1 to display the CLEAR ALL TOTALS screen:
CLEAR ALL TOTALS
ARE YOU SURE ?
NÅ
2. Press the YES/NO key to display Y at the "ARE YOU SURE ?" question. Press ENTER
(CASH).
CLEAR ALL TOTALS
ARE YOU SURE ?
YÅ
3. The display reads: "PLEASE WAIT". The message "ALL TOTAL CLEAR" is printed and
the screen returns to the SERVICE MODE menu.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
================================
ALL TOTAL CLEAR
================================
CLERK 1
Please Wait ....
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Æ
No.000011
SERVICE MODE
0.H/W TEST
1.CLEAR ALL TOTALS
2.CLEAR GRAND TOTAL
3.CLEAR PLU FILE
4.FLASHROM INFORMATION
5.MEMORY ALLOCATION
6.KEY ASSIGNMENT
00001
È
Service Mode Programming • 127
Clear Grand Total
This section clears only the grand total.
1. From SERVICE MODE menu press 2 to display CLEAR GRAND TOTALS screen:
CLEAR GRAND TOTAL
ARE YOU SURE ?
NÅ
2. Press the YES/NO key to display Y at the "ARE YOU SURE ?" question. Press ENTER
(CASH).
CLEAR GRAND TOTAL
ARE YOU SURE ?
YÅ
3. The message "GRAND TOTAL CLEAR" is printed and the screen returns to the SERVICE
MODE menu.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
================================
GRAND TOTAL CLEAR
================================
CLERK 1
SERVICE MODE
0.H/W TEST
1.CLEAR ALL TOTALS
2.CLEAR GRAND TOTAL
3.CLEAR PLU FILE
4.FLASHROM INFORMATION
5.MEMORY ALLOCATION
6.KEY ASSIGNMENT
128 • Service Mode Programming
No.000011
00001
È
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Clear/Delete PLU File
This section clears/deletes the entire PLU file, including totals, counters and programming.
1. From SERVICE MODE menu press 3 to display the CLEAR PLU FILE screen:
CLEAR PLU FILE
ARE YOU SURE ?
NÅ
2. Press the YES/NO key to display Y at the "ARE YOU SURE ?" question. Press ENTER
(CASH).
CLEAR PLU FILE
ARE YOU SURE ?
YÅ
3. The message "PLU FILE CLEAR" is printed and the screen returns to the SERVICE MODE
menu.
Receipt Example:
DATE 01/05/2012 TUE
TIME 08:30
================================
PLU FILE CLEAR
================================
CLERK 1
SERVICE MODE
0.H/W TEST
1.CLEAR ALL TOTALS
2.CLEAR GRAND TOTAL
3.CLEAR PLU FILE
4.FLASHROM INFORMATION
5.MEMORY ALLOCATION
6.KEY ASSIGNMENT
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
No.000011
00001
È
Service Mode Programming • 129
FlashROM Information
This section displays the version, check sum and date of the FlashROM. You may be asked to check
you EPROM version if you contact your dealer for assistance. You should also verify that all registers
in an IRC configuration have the same version FlashROM.
1. From SERVICE MODE menu press 4. The "PLEASE WAIT" message displays momentarily
until the SPS-300 EPROM INFO screen displays:
Please Wait ....
Æ
FLASHROM INFORMATION
VERSION :
GSON 01.005
CHECKSUM :
0991
BOOT/APP :
420B/C786
PLUs USED:
300/2000
MAY. 31 2012
PRESS CLEAR KEY
2. Press CLEAR to return to the SERVICE MODE menu.
130 • Service Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Memory Allocation
NOTE: You must step through every memory allocation field to implement new memory allocation.
If you press CLEAR, at any field you will abort memory allocation processes without
making changes. Changing this has important consequences. Please consult your dealer.
1. At the SM control lock position menu, press 5 for Memory Allocation programming. The
MEMORY ALLOCATION screen displays:
MEMORY ALLOCATION.
TTL AVAIL :
1855488
TTL USED :
318867
# PLUS
2000Å
# LEVELS (1-5)
1
# CLERKS
10
# GROUP TOTALS
20
Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the MEMORY ALLOCATION options:
MEMORY ALLOCATION.
TTL AVAIL :
1855488
TTL USED :
318867
# EJ LINES
1000Å
# CHECKS
10
Y=HARD/N=SOFT CHK
N
# LINES/SFT CHK
50
2. The total available memory is displayed on the first line of the screen (TTL AVAIL). The
total memory currently allocated is displayed on the second line of the screen (TTL USED).
The TTL USED field is updated when you complete a change and press ENTER (CASH) on
each option.
Starting at the PLUs field, enter the quantity of each memory variable. Press ENTER
(CASH) after each entry, and the cursor will move to the next variable. Page 2 of Memory
Allocation will display after the # OF GROUP TOTALS field is set:
3. Continue filling each variable until complete. Press ENTER (CASH) after setting the last
field, "# LINES/SFT CHK". The screen will display "ARE YOU SURE ?". N (No) will
display as the default answer to the question. If you wish to implement the new allocation you
have entered, press the YES/NO key, then press ENTER (CASH)
4. The message "PLEASE WAIT . . . . " displays when successful. The display will remain in
Memory Allocation screen, with “MEMORY ALLOCATION SIZE OVER” docket printed,
followed by “INVALID ENTRY” on the display with beep! if you attempt to allocate
features requiring more memory than is available.
5. The SERVICE MODE menu screen displays when memory allocation programming is
completed.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Service Mode Programming • 131
Function Key Assignment
Any key location may be reprogrammed with a function from the list of available functions. The
default program installs the functions as they are shown with the standard key legends.
To change the function on a specific key:
1. At the SM control lock position menu, press 6 for Key Assignment programming. The KEY
ASSIGNMENT screen displays:
KEY ASSIGNMENT
PUSH KEY TO BE
PROGRAMMED
0Å
2. Press any key location. The current key assignment is displayed:
KEY ASSIGNMENT
KEY NUMBER :
CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
CONV1
ENTER NEW CODE,
PRESS CASH
337
0Å
3. When the function key code of the new function key is already known, just enter the key
code, then press ENTER (CASH) key,
KEY ASSIGNMENT
KEY NUMBER :
CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
CONV1
ENTER NEW CODE,
PRESS CASH
337
379Å
or,
Press PAGE DOWN key to start browsing the function key list, then PAGE UP or PAGE
DOWN key to browse through the function key list on the operator display,
FUNCTION
KEYCODE
-------------------------------NLU#1 – NLU#300(1-300)
ONE
301
TWO
302
THREE
303
FOUR
304
FIVE
305
132 • Service Mode Programming
Æ
FUNCTION
KEYCODE
-------------------------------PFEED
378
PRICEINQ
379
PRINT CHK
380
PROMO
381
RA1
382
RA2
383
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
When the function key you want appear on the display, type the key code number you wish to
place and the screen returns to the KEY ASSIGNMENT screen then press ENTER (CASH).
KEY ASSIGNMENT
KEY NUMBER :
CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
CONV1
ENTER NEW CODE,
PRESS CASH
337
379Å
4. The KEY ASSIGNMENT screen displays again, with additional info “PRESS CASH TO
EXIT”. Press CASH as Enter to exit.
KEY ASSIGNMENT
PUSH KEY TO BE
PROGRAMMED
PRESS CASH TO EXIT
0Å
5. Press the ENTER (CASH) key to finalize current function key assignment, or ESC
(CLEAR) key to cancel the programming.
KEY ASSIGNMENT
PRESS CASH TO
SAVE CHANGES
OR
PRESS ESCAPE TO EXIT
WITHOUT SAVING
6. The current function key assignment is finished. The screen go back to SM Mode. If more
function keys are about to be assigned, repeat the procedure from Step 1.
SERVICE MODE
0.H/W TEST
1.CLEAR ALL TOTALS
2.CLEAR GRAND TOTAL
3.CLEAR PLU FILE
4.FLASHROM INFORMATION
5.MEMORY ALLOCATION
6.KEY ASSIGNMENT
È
NOTE 1: Numeric keys (0-9), CLEAR/ESC, and CASH/ENTER cannot be removed from
the keyboard unless they have been assigned to a new keyboard location. This
protects the programmer from accidentally removing keys that are required for
register programming and operations.
NOTE 2: If you wish to program the CASH/ENTER key, select it immediately after
selecting KEY ASSIGNMENT from the SERVICE MODE menu. After the
initial key is programmed, the CASH/ENTER key is used to finalize the program.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Service Mode Programming • 133
Function Code Table
Code
Function
Code
Function
Code
Function
1
NLU 1
334
CHECK #
369
MOD 3
~ 300
~ NLU 300
335
CLEAR (ESC)
370
MOD 4
301
Numeric 1
336
CLERK
371
MOD 5
405
INACTIVE
302
Numeric 2
337
CONV 1
372
PBAL
406
NONADD #
303
Numeric 3
338
CONV 2
373
PAGE DOWN
407
CASH OUT
304
Numeric 4
339
CONV 3
374
PAGE UP
408
NOT USED
305
Numeric 5
340
CONV 4
375
PO1
409
NOT USED
306
Numeric 6
341
DVTHR
376
PO2
410
MACRO11
307
Numeric 7
342
EATIN
377
PO3
411
MACRO12
308
Numeric 8
343
ERRCORR
378
PFEED
412
MACRO13
309
Numeric 9
344
FSHIFT
379
PRICE INQ
413
MACRO14
310
Numeric 0
345
F/S SUB
380
PRINT CHK
414
MACRO15
311
Numeric 00
346
F/S TEND
381
PROMO
415
MACRO16
312
DECIMAL
347
FUNCLK1
382
RA1
416
MACRO17
313
#/NS
348
FUNCLK2
383
RA2
417
MACRO18
314
%1
349
GUEST
384
RA3
418
MACRO19
315
%2
350
PLU
385
SUBTOTAL
419
MACRO20
316
%3
351
LEVEL 1
386
SCALE
420
PLU LOOKUP1
317
%4
352
LEVEL 2
387
SERVICE
421
PLU LOOKUP2
318
%5
353
LEVEL 3
388
TABLE
422
PLU LOOKUP3
319
X/TIME
354
LEVEL 4
389
TARE
423
PLU LOOKUP4
320
ADDCHK
355
LEVEL 5
390
TKOUT
424
PLU LOOKUP5
321
CANCEL
356
MACRO1
391
TAXEXMT
425
PLU LOOKUP6
322
CASH
357
MACRO2
392
GST
426
PLU LOOKUP7
323
CHARGE1
358
MACRO3
393
TAX 2
427
PLU LOOKUP8
324
CHARGE2
359
MACRO4
394
TAX 3
428
PLU LOOKUP9
325
CHARGE3
360
MACRO5
395
TAX 4
429
PLU LOOKUP10
326
CHARGE4
361
MACRO6
396
TIME IN/OUT
430
PLU LOOKUP11
327
CHARGE5
362
MACRO7
397
TIP
431
PLU LOOKUP12
328
CHARGE6
363
MACRO8
398
VOID
432
PLU LOOKUP13
329
CHARGE7
364
MACRO9
399
WASTE
433
PLU LOOKUP14
330
CHARGE8
365
MACRO10
400
YESNO
434
PLU LOOKUP15
331
CHKCASH
366
RETURN
401
VALIDATION
435
NOT USED
332
CHKENDOR
367
MOD 1
402
FINALISE
~ 446
~ NOT USED
333
CHECK
368
MOD 2
403
RCPT ON/OFF
134 • Service Mode Programming
Code
Function
404
JFEED
(SPS-34x ONLY)
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
IRC Options
NOTE: When IRC feature is activated, All register number in the IRC network have to be start from
#1 and be numbered contiguously. If one unit is removed from the IRC network, you need
to fill the gap in order to make the register number contiguous and then change following
settings accordingly.
The following screen image shows the example of register number 1 in a 4 unit IRC network.
1. At the SM control lock position menu, press 7 for IRC Option programming. The IRC
OPTIONS screen displays:
IRC OPTIONS
REG# (1-16)
STORE#
FROM REG#
TO REG#
IRC RETRIES(0-99)
#SHARE KP REG#(1-16)
1Å
000000
1
4
3
1
2. Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the IRC OPTIONS menu:
IRC OPTIONS
#SHARE CHKTRACK REG#(1-16)
2Å
3. Refer to the table below to fill the fields on the IRC OPTIONS screen.
4. Press the CLEAR key to finalize and return to the SERVICE MODE screen.
IRC Options Table
Page
Field
Description
REG#
Enter the IRC number of this register (1-16).
STORE#
Enter the store number. (Do not change this if not advised
to do so)
FROM REG#
Enter the first register number in the IRC system.
TO REG#
Enter the last register number in the IRC system.
IRC RETRIES
Each retry equals approximately 0.5 seconds.
SHARE KP REG#
Enter the Register# connected to common shared KP. Please
set CHECK # function key accordingly.
SHARE CHKTRACK REG#
Enter the Register# to manage Check# file. Please set
CHECK # function key accordingly.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Service Mode Programming • 135
RS232C/USB Port 1/2/3/4 Options
1. At the SM control lock position menu, press 8, then select proper RS232C Port by enter the
number represent the port for programming.
RS232 PORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
RS232
RS232
RS232
RS232
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
1
2
3
4
2. The appropriate PORT PROGRAM screen displays (Port #1 for example):
PORT 1 PROGRAM
pg1
BAUD RATE
0:9600
1:1200
2:2400
3:4800
4:19200
5:38400
6:57600 7:115200
PARITY CHECK
0:NONE
1:ODD
2:EVEN
DATA BITS (0:8 1:7)
6Å
0
0
3. At each field, press ENTER (CASH) to view the selections. Enter the digit representing your
selection from the pop-up window.
4. Press PAGE DOWN to view page 2 of the RS232C port program:
PORT 1 PROGRAM
pg2
STOP BITS (0:1 1:2)
0Å
DEVICE FUNCTION
1
-------------------------------0:NONE
1:PC
2:SCL
3:RJ
4:RP
5:KV
6:SCAN
7:COIN
8:EFT
9:POLE
5. Press PAGE DOWN to view page 3 of the RS232C port program:
PORT 1 PROGRAM
pg3
INITIAL FEEDING LINE ON KP
(0-20)
ENDING FEEDING LINE ON KP
(0-20)
INITIAL FEEDING LINE ON SLIP
(0-20)
136 • Service Mode Programming
0Å
7
0
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
6. Press PAGE DOWN to view page 4 of the RS232C port program:
PORT 1 PROGRAM
pg4
PRINT LINE ON GUEST CHECK
(0-50)
SCALE TYPE
0:NCI
1:CAS
PRINTER TYPE
0:NONE
1:SAM4S ELLIX 10
0Å
0
0
7. Press PAGE DOWN to view page 5 of the RS232C port program:
PORT 1 PROGRAM
PRINTER TYPE
2:SAM4S ELLIX 20II
3:SAM SRP-250
4:SAM SRP-350
5:CITIZEN 3550/3551
6:CITIZEN 810
7:CITIZEN 230
pg5
0Å
8. Press PAGE DOWN to view page 6 of the RS232C port program:
PORT 1 PROGRAM
PRINTER TYPE
8:EPSON TM-T88-2
9:EPSON U200
10:EPSON U295
11:EPSON U300
12:EPSON U325
13:EPSON U375
pg6
0Å
9. Press PAGE DOWN to view page 7 of the RS232C port program:
PORT 1 PROGRAM
PRINTER TYPE
14:STAR SP-200
15:STAR SP-298
16:STAR SP-300
17:STAR TSP-200
pg7
0Å
10. Press PAGE DOWN to view page 8 of the RS232C port program:
PORT 1 PROGRAM
pg8
POLE DISPLAY TYPE
0Å
0:EPSON
1:CITIZEN
EFT TYPE
0
0:NONE
1:INGENICO
2:TYRP EFTPOS
3:NZINGENICO
RESERVED
11. Refer to "RS232C Settings Screen Program Notes" on the next page to fill the fields for each
port.
12. Press the CLEAR key to finalize and return to the SERVICE MODE screen.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Service Mode Programming • 137
RS232C Settings Screen Program Notes
Page
1
2
Field
Description
BAUD RATE
Select proper baud rate from the list. COM#1 defaults to 6
(57600), COM#2~#4 default to 0 (9600).
PARITY
Select between 0 (NONE), 1 (EVEN), or 2 (ODD) from list.
0 (NONE) is default.
DATA BITS
Select 0 (8) or 1 (7) from the list. 0 (8) is default.
STOP BITS
Select 0 (1) or 1 (2) from the list. 0 (1) is default.
DEVICE FUNCTION
Enter the number represents the device you wish to attach to
this port from the list. COM#1 and #4 default to 1 (PC),
COM#2 and #3 default to 0 (NONE)
Some device function has related feature to select as well:
2 (SCL - Scale) Æ SCALE TYPR (pg4)
3 (RJ - Remote Journal) Æ PRINTER TYPE (pg4 - 7)
4 (RP - Remote Printer) Æ PRINTER TYPE (pg4 - 7)
8 (EFT - EFTPOS) Æ EFT TYPE (pg8) (not for AU
market)
9 (POLE - Pole Display) Æ POLE DISPLAY TYPE
(pg8)
3
4
4~7
8
INITIAL FEEDING LINE ON
KP (0-20)
Enter the number as the number of lines will be advanced
before the content of KP starts to print when a external
printer (RP - Remote Printer) is used.
ENDING FEEDING LINE ON
KP (0-20)
Enter the number as the number of lines will be advanced
after the content of KP has been printed when a external
printer (RP - Remote Printer) is used.
INITIAL FEEDING LINE ON
SLIP (0-20)
Enter the number as the number of lines will be advanced
before printing starts on a new slip when a slip printer is
used..
PRINT LINE ON GUEST
CHECK (0-50)
Enter the number of lines that represent the maximum that
can be printed on a single guest check.
SCALE TYPE
When DEVICE is 2 (SCL), select the scale protocol by enter
the number represent the interface on this port.
PRINTER TYPE
When DEVICE is 3 (RJ) or 4 (RP), select the printer driver
by enter the number represent the printer model on this port.
POLE DISPLAY TYPE
When DEVICE is 9 (POLE), select the pole display protocol
by enter the number represent the protocol on this port.
EFT TYPE
Select the digit that represents the EFT type connected to this
port.
138 • Service Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
SD Card Operation
Programs Backup and Restore
You can use an SD flash memory card to backup and restore the full program. The program data is
saved in a separate folder named with the default store name “STORE_A” where you can change in
Program Mode Æ System Option Æ pg18 (page 18).
The SD card can also be used to save reports, which can then be viewed on a PC using the SPS-300
PC Utility. The report data is saved in a separate folder named with current date and time.
NOTE: SD cards must be formatted as FAT 32 File Allocation Table format.
If you are Using an SD Card in SPS-300 for the First Time . . .
CAUTION: Formatting the SD card will clear all data on the SD card and prepare it for use.
1. Start Windows Explorer.
2. Select the SD card drive, right click and select Format. (Win XP screen shown; slightly
different procedures are used with different operating systems.)
Select
“Format…”
3. From the Format dialog you must select the
File System: FAT32.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Service Mode Programming • 139
1. At the SM control lock position menu, press 9 and then select menu for SD Card operation.
The appropriate SD CARD Operation screen displays:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SD CARD OPERATION
PROGRAM BACKUP
PROGRAM LOAD
REPORT BACKUP
PRE-IMAGE LOGO LOAD
PRE-IMAGE LOGO BACKUP
POST-IMAGE LOGO LOAD
POST-IMAGE LOGO BACKUP
SD Card Operation Table
Page
Field
Description
Program Backup
Save Program File to SD card
Program Load
Load Program File to SPS-300
Report Backup
Save Report File to SD card
Pre-Image Logo Load
Load Preamble Image File to SPS-300
Pre-Image Logo Backup
Save Preamble Image File to SD card
Post-Image Logo Load
Load Postamble Image File to SPS-300
Post-Image Logo Backup
Save Postamble Image File to SD card
140 • Service Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Load/Save Receipt Images
You can load a preamble and postamble image for your SPS-300 receipt. Before loading, the images
must be converted by the PC Utility to .img format. After conversion, they can be loaded directly by
connecting a PC to the SPS-300 or by copying the images to a SD card and loading (or saving the
image) using the SD utility program described here.
NOTE: After loading the images, you must set Program Mode Æ Print Options Æ pg14 (page 14)
to activate the image printing.
1. Preparing a Graphic Logo Bitmap for an SPS-300 Series
The image must be black/white, 384 x 192 pixels, and 10 Kbytes or less in size.
1. Open MS Paint.
2. Open the image file you wish to use.
3. Choose Attributes from the Image menu. The Attributes dialog box displays.
4. The image dimensions must be no larger than 384 pixels wide by 192 pixels high. If the
image size in pixels is greater than the maximum, you must resize your image.
a. Click OK to exit the Attributes dialog.
b. Select your image. (Choose Select All from the Edit menu.)
c. Using the handles of the selected image, resize the image. Keep the image in the
upper left corner of the screen.
d. Choose Attributes from the Image menu. The Attributes dialog box displays again.
Enter 384 in the Width field; enter 192 in the Height field; select Pixels as the unit.
Click OK to exit the dialog box.
e. Your image will be cropped to the 384 x 192 pixel size. If you cropped part of the
image you wish to keep, you can undo (Ctrl + Z) and try again. You may have to
experiment a bit to resize the image inside the 384 x 192 pixel limit.
5. After the image is sized, select Black and white in the Attributes dialog.
6. Save your image as type “Monochrome Bitmap (*.bmp,*.dib)” and confirm that the size
is 10k or less. If you resized your original image, you may wish to rename when you
save, so that you preserve a copy of the original image.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Service Mode Programming • 141
2. Use the PC Utility to Convert the Image
1. Install the SPS-300 PC Utility on your PC.
2. At your PC, start the SPS-300 PC Utility. (Select Start, Programs, SHC PC UTILITY,
SPS-300 PC UTILITY.) The Store Setting dialog box displays.
3. If you are starting the SPS-300 PC Utility for the first time, you must define a store name,
or if a store is already defined, you can select the store from the drop down list. After the
store is defined or selected, click Close. The PC Utility program starts.
4. Move the .bmp logos you wish to use into the store directory
(i.e. C:\SPS-300PC\storename.)
5. At the PC Utility, choose Convert Logo Image from the Utility menu. The Bmp dialog
box displays.
6. Click FILE OPEN. Select the bitmap image you wish to use from the Open dialog and
click the Open command button.
7. Click the SAVE AS PRE IMG or SAVE AS POST IMG button.
8. When the image is selected, click OK. Verify that the message “Save As UserPre.Img” or
“Save As UserPost.Img” displays. If the file is too large, and cannot be loaded, the
message “File Size Error” displays.
142 • Service Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
3. Copy the Images to an SD Card
The PC Utility will create two image files:
•
USERPRE.IMG
•
USERPOST.IMG
They will be located in your PC at:
C:\SPS-300PC\<Store Name>
Copy the images to the following path on your SD card:
SD\\SPS300\PgmBack\<Store Name>
Important: In the path: C:\SPS-300PC\<Store Name>, the store name is the name you have
defined as the store in the PC Utility.
NOTE: You must use the same store name in the SPS-300 Series ECR at System Option.
4. Load the Images to the Register
via SD Card Operation
Please refer to S-Mode, SD Card Operation for detail.
via PC Utility
1. At the PC Utility, choose PreAmble Image or PostAmble Image from the
DownProgram(PC->ECR) menu.
2. Cash Register should enter PC Online Mode and download procedure should start.
3. When complete, press OK to exit from download process.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Service Mode Programming • 143
Flash ROM Updates
The SPS-300 register software is loaded in a Flash ROM . This program may occasionally be updated
by the manufacturer. Your SAM4s dealer can update the software if necessary.
The Flash ROM can be loaded through a PC Utility or by SD card.
CAUTION: Flash ROM update by either method must be done by a qualified, trained technician. DO
NOT POWER OFF OR ABORT any program loading once it has started. Failure to
follow the procedures exactly may cause the program to load incompletely and for the
register to fail completely.
Flash ROM Update by SD
The SPS-300 Flash ROM program is contained in a file named SPS300.bin. This file will be
provided to the authorized dealer and contains both the Boot program area and the Application
program area.
1. At your PC, format the SD Card for FAT32. (See the “If you are Using an SD Card for
SPS-300 the First Time . . . ")
2. Create a folder named “update” in the root of the SD card.
3. Copy SPS300.bin to: SD\\update\.
4. Insert the SD card into the register. (The SD slot is located inside the printer
compartment. Remove the security screw and open the flap securing the SD slot. Insert
the SD card until you hear a click and the SD card is locked in.)
Boot Area Update
Update instructions included with the .bin file will tell whether both Boot Area and
Application Area updates are required. In most cases you may be instructed only to update
the Application Area. For application only updates please see next section. Below is for boot
area updates.
1. At the SPS-300, turn the control lock to the S position.
2. Power off the SPS-300.
3. Press and hold the Numeral 1 key on the keyboard. While continuing to hold the Numeral
1 key, turn on the power switch.
4. Release the Numeral 1 Key.
5. The display will flash between blue and red backlight, slowly at first. After a few seconds
a rapid beep-beep-beep will be heard, and the display will flash rapidly. The boot update
is now complete
6. Turn the ECR power switch OFF and proceed directly to the next step: Application
Update.
144 • Service Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Application Area Update
1. Set the control lock to the S position.
2. Press and hold the Numeral 2 key on the keyboard. While continuing to hold the Numeral
2 key, turn on the power switch.
3. Release the Numeral 2 Key.
4. The display will flash between blue and red backlight, after a few seconds, the display
will continue to flash, but at a slower rate. This continues for about 1-minute while the
new program is being loaded. When the load is complete, a rapid beep-beep-beep will be
heard, and the display will flash rapidly.
5. Power the register OFF. The Flash ROM update is complete.
6. Remove the SD card from the register.
7. Perform a memory all clear on the ECR. The ECR is now ready to program or to load a
previously saved end-user program.
Flash ROM update via PC by Flash Utility
Update Files
To complete the firmware update, you will be supplied with the following files:
•
NEWNET_DOWN.exe (The update utility program)
•
S3xxXXXX.bin (”XXXX” is the version number)
PC Connection Cable
YOU MUST USE Port #1. Use the following cable:
•
CAB-E101PC9 (Register DB-9F COM 1 to PC DB-9F)
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Service Mode Programming • 145
PC Update - Boot Area
Update instructions included with the .bin file will tell whether both Boot Area and
Application Area updates are required. In most cases you may be instructed only to update
the Application Area.
1. Connect the Serial Cable From ECR to PC.
2. At the register, turn the control lock to the S position.
3. Turn the power switch to the OFF position.
4. Press and hold the CASH and CLERK keys. (Use the keys in their default locations, the
upper-right and lower-right keys on the keyboard.)
5. While continuing to hold the CASH and CLERK keys, turn the power switch to the ON
position. (The display will illuminate and the error tone will sound beep-beep-beep in
quick succession.) Release the keys.
6. At the PC, execute the program
“NEWNET_DOWN.exe”. The Download dialog
box displays.
7. Select the appropriate com port connection at your
PC at the PORT# option buttons.
8. Click SEL. find the folder where the update files
are located and select S3xxXXXX.bin.
9. Select Boot Area Only in the Select One option
buttons.
10. Press OK Button. The download takes about 30
seconds; the scroll bar will track the progress of the
download. At the ECR, the display will flash
slowly while the update is taking place.
11. When complete, the message Completed displays
on the PC. Click OK and the Download program
will close. At the ECR, a rapid beep-beep-beep will
be heard, and the display will flash rapidly, which
indicates the update is complete.
12. Turn the power switch to OFF on the register, the
Boot Area update is complete. Then follow PC
Update - Program Area steps.
146 • Service Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
PC Update - Program Area
1. Connect the Serial Cable From ECR to PC.
2. At the register, turn the control lock to the S position.
3. Turn the power switch to the OFF position.
4. Press and hold the CASH and CLERK keys. (Use the keys in their default locations, the
upper-right and lower-right keys on the keyboard.)
5. While continuing to hold the CASH and CLERK keys, turn the power switch to the ON
position. (The display will illuminate and the error tone will sound beep-beep-beep in
quick succession.) Release the keys.
6.
At the PC, execute the program
“NEWNET_DOWN.exe”. The Download dialog
box displays.
7. Select the appropriate com port connection at your
PC at the PORT# option buttons.
8. Click SEL. find the folder where the update files
are located and select S3xxXXXX.bin.
9. Select Program code in the Select One option
buttons.
10. Press OK Button. The download takes about 3½
minutes; the scroll bar will track the progress of the
download. At the ECR, the display will flash
slowly while the update is taking place.
11. When complete, the message Completed displays on the PC. Click OK and the
Download program will close. At the ECR, a rapid beep-beep-beep will be heard, and the
display will flash rapidly, which indicates the update is complete.
12. Turn the power switch to OFF on the register, the Program Area update is complete.
13. Disconnect the PC cable.
14. Perform a memory all clear on the ECR. The ECR is now ready to program or to load a
previously saved end-user program.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Service Mode Programming • 147
Program Mode Programming
Default Programming
•
The first 300 (1 ~ 300) PLUs have been pre-programmed in default program, including all
keyboard PLUs. They are preset to Taxable by GST (Tax1), Preset Price and
Overridable on Preset Price.
•
All programming (unless otherwise noted) is done with the control lock in the PGM-Mode.
Each section details a specific area of register programming.
•
The default Tax program is set to 10.000% VAT on Tax 1 and the description is set to
GST already.
Descriptor Programming Methods
Descriptors are programmable for PLUs, function keys, groups, clerks and the logo/messages. There
are two methods available to program descriptors, the Program Overlay Method and the Descriptor
Code Method. Program Overlay Method is the default programming method.
Program Overlay Method
The Alpha Overlay layout for each model is shown below. During descriptor programming, the
keyboard button function changes to this layout.
When the descriptor field is selected on the program screen, you can simply type the descriptor. Press
ENTER (CASH) to finalize your descriptor.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 149
SPS-320/340 (150 Buttons)Alpha Keyboard Overlay
RECEIPT JOURNAL
FEED FEED*
’
”
<
>
-
+
=
:
?
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
(
)
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
;
CLEAR
PLU
X/TIME
Z
X
C
V
B
N
M
,
.
/
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
SUBTL
0
00
y
CASH
BACK
CAPS DOUBLE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE CAPS DOUBLE
SPACE
SPS-325/345 (91 (or 98) Buttons) Alpha Keyboard Overlay
A
H
O
V
#
)
”
SPACE
B
I
P
W
$
-
,
SPACE
C
J
Q
X
%
+
.
CAPS
CLEAR
PLU
X/TIME
D
K
R
Y
^
=
/
DOUBLE
7
8
9
E
L
S
Z
&
;
<
BACK
SPACE
4
5
6
F
M
T
!
*
:
>
1
2
3
G
N
U
@
(
’
?
0
00
y
150 • Program Mode Programming
RECEIPT JOURNAL
FEED FEED*
SUB TOTAL
CASH
TEND
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Descriptor Code Method
If you customise your keyboard by covering key locations, or by installing double or quad size keys,
you will need to program descriptors using the descriptor code method.
See Program Mode Æ System Option Æ pg17 (page 17). You must set the option PROGRAM
DESCRIPTOR BY CODE to Y to use the descriptor code method.
Program Sequence
1. With the cursor pointed at a descriptor field, refer to the Descriptor Code Chart below and
type the code for the first character. Press the decimal “·” key.
2. For each additional character, type the code and press the decimal key. Each character
will be displayed as it is entered.
3. Press ENTER (CASH) when the descriptor is complete.
Program Example
To program the descriptor "APPLE", type:
6
•
5
8
A
6
9
•
0
8
0
P
•
•
7
P
6
•
L
ENTER
E
Note:
For lower case enter 98 after the descriptor code. For example:
a= 6
5
9
8
ENTER
•
For DOUBLE (wide) characters enter 99 after the descriptor code. For example:
A= 6
5
9
9
•
ENTER
The Descriptor Code Table is on the following page.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 151
Descriptor Code Table
Char. Space
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
Code
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Char.
*
+
,
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
Code
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Char.
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
Code
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
Char.
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Code
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
Char.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Code
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
Char.
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
Code
82
83
84
85
86
]
^
_
93
94
95
Char.
Code
92
152 • Program Mode Programming
96
87
88
89
90
91
Back- CAPS Double 1line Delete
space
97
98
99
0
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Menu
Turn the control lock to the PGM position. The first page of the PROGRAM MODE menu displays:
PROGRAM MODE
0.PLU
1.GROUP
2.SALES TAX
3.SYSTEM OPTION
4.PRINT OPTION
5.FUNCTION KEYS
6.CLERK
È
Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the PROGRAM MODE menu:
PROGRAM MODE
7.LOGO DESCRIPTIOR
8.NLU CODE# PROGRAM
9.DOWNLOAD PROGRAMS
00.MORE
Ç
Press 00 to view the first page of the PROGRAM MODE page 2 menu:
PROGRAM MODE
0.CLERK IN/OUT
1.PLU STOCK
2.DRAWER LIMIT
3.CHECK CHANGE LIMIT
4.TIME & DATE
5.TARE WEIGHT
6.MACRO
page2 È
Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the PROGRAM MODE page 2 menu:
PROGRAM MODE
7.MACHINE NO.
8.PC SCHEDULE TIME
9.TRAINING MODE P/W
00.SCAN
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
page2 Ç
Program Mode Programming • 153
PLU Programming
At the PGM control lock position menu, press 0 for PLU Programming. The PLU
PROGRAMMING screen displays:
PLU PROGRAMMING
0.ADD/MODIFY PLU
1.DELETE PLU
To Add/Modify PLU
1. Press 0 to add or modify a PLU. The PLU NUMBER screen displays:
PLU NUMBER
* ENTER PLU NUMBER
AND PUSH PLU, OR
* PRESS A PLU KEY ON
THE KEYBOARD
0Å
2. To view detail of a PLU or to program a PLU, either:
•
Press a keyboard PLU,
PLU#
DESC : PLU1
PRESET
PRICE/HALO1
•
1 P1
Å
Y
0.00
Enter the PLU number then follow with PLU function key of the PLU you wish to
program,
PLU NUMBER
* ENTER PLU NUMBER
AND PUSH PLU, OR
* PRESS A PLU KEY ON
THE KEYBOARD
Æ
PLU#
DESC : PLU1
PRESET
PRICE/HALO1
1 P1
Å
Y
0.00
1Å
154 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
•
Scan a Barcode as the PLU number,
PLU NUMBER
* ENTER PLU NUMBER
AND PUSH PLU, OR
* PRESS A PLU KEY ON
THE KEYBOARD
Æ
PLU#
DESC :
PRESET
PRICE/HALO1
9310061386809 P1
Å
Y
0.00
9310061386809Å
or
•
Press a Modifier key followed by a keyboard PLU.
3. To browse through the options:
•
Press ENTER key to move “Å” symbol option by option, or
•
press PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN for fast browsing page by page.
4. When reaching the option you want to modify,
•
For descriptor programming options, the keyboard will change to Program Overlay,
enter the character you need up to 18 characters. Or enter Descriptor Code to make up the
description you want.
NOTE: System Option is default to Program Overlay. Please check setting on page 17
•
For numeric programming options, enter the number through numeric pad,
•
For Yes/No programming options, press YES/NO key to toggle between Y and N
PLU#
DESC : PLU1
PRESET
PRICE/HALO1
PRICE/HALO2
PRICE/HALO3
PRICE/HALO4
PRICE/HALO5
1 P1
PLU#
NEGITIVE ITEM
HASH
SINGLE ITEM
NON-ADD # COMPULSORY
GALLONAGE ITEM
INVENTORY ITEM
DISABLE
1 P3
NÅ
N
N
N
N
N
N
PLU#
SCALABLE
AUTO SCALE
AUTO TARE (1-5)
CONDIMENT
COMP. CONDIMENT
PRINT ON RECEIPT
PRINT ON DISPLAY
1 P4
NÅ
N
0
N
N
Y
y
PLU#
PRINT ON CHECK
PRINT PRICE ON RECEIPT
PRINT PRICE ON CHECK
DISABLE PROMO
COUNTER NOT RESET
PRESET OVERRIDE
IN MGR CONTROL
1 P5
YÅ
Y
Y
N
N
PLU#
LINK PLU:
1 P6
Y
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Å
PLU#
PRESET OVERRIDE
TAXable BY:
FOOD STMP ELIGIBLE
GROUP #1 (1-20)
GROUP #2 (1-20)
GROUP #3 (1-20)
1
Y
2
N
MIX&MATCH (1-99)
DISABLE VOID MODE & RETURN
1 P2
YÅ
3 4
N N
N
1
0
0
0Å
0
N
N
Program Mode Programming • 155
PLU Options - Reference Information
Page
Field
Value
1
DESC
The field to program a descriptor for the PLU. Type the
Alpha
numeric 18 descriptor using the Program Overlay. The overlay is
automatically activated when the cursor is pointing at the
character
DESC field. The default descriptors are PLU1, PLU2, etc.
PRESET
Y or N
This determine if this PLU have a preset price or not. A PLU
will be an Open Price PLU when set to N (No). A price
(without decimal point) has to be entered before register an
Open Price PLU. If set to Y (Yes), the PLU will registered
with a pre-programmed price when pressed. A non-zero
price has to be programmed into the following
PRICE/HALO1 field to avoid selling the PLU with zero
price.
PRICE/HALO1
PRICE/HALO2
PRICE/HALO3
PRICE/HALO4
PRICE/HALO5
7 digit
amount
Here is the field(s) to program the Price or the High Amount
Lock Out (HALO) of a PLU. When a PLU is a Preset PLU
(PRESET is Y), the dollar amount entered here is a Preset
Price, the dollar amount entered here will become a HALO
when the PLU is an Open PLU (PRESET is N). You can
limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can be
entered into a PLU. According to the setting - LEVELS (1-5)
- in SM Mode Æ MEMORY ALLOCATION, you may or
may not see PRICE/HALO 2 ~ 5.
PRESET OVERRIDE
Y or N
When PRESET is Y, use this option to determine is the
Preset Price is Overridable or not. Set to Y (Yes) to allow,
N (No) to disallow.
TAXable BY TAX1 (GST),
TAX2, TAX3 or TAX4
Y (to GST
(Tax1)) or
N (to Tax
2, 3 and 4)
Determines if a PLU is taxable by any tax or is tax free. By
changing between Y and N, a PLU will be taxable or tax
free. Default setting is link to Tax1 (GST) only, therefore the
PLU is taxable by Tax1 (GST). The actual Tax program is in
Program Mode Æ 2.SALE TAX.
FOOD STMP ELIGIBLE
Y or N
Select Y to accumulate a total of food stamp eligible items in
the current sale. The total can be viewed by pressing the F/S
SUB key and food stamps can be tendered with the F/S
TEND key. (US market feature)
GROUP #1
1
GROUP #2
0
GROUP #3
0
A PLU can link to up to 3 groups for group
totaling/reporting purpose. For each of three group
assignments, enter a group where this PLU's sales will
accumulate. The number of groups available is determined
by memory allocation. For Kitchen Printing, only Group
Assignment on first Link group (GROUP #1) will take
effect.
NEGATIVE ITEM
Y or N
2
3
156 • Program Mode Programming
Description
Use this to set a PLU that entered as normal, but recorded
with a negative value. This is useful for a PLU like Lottery
Price Payment.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Page
4
Field
Value
Description
HASH
Y or N
Items designated with HASH status add to the current sale,
but do not add to the registers grand total. HASH items may
or may not add to the net sales total - see system option
programming. Use hash for lottery sales or bottle deposits.
SINGLE ITEM
Y or N
When a PLU is a single item PLU, it will automatically total
as a cash sale immediately after the PLU entry. Single item
PLUs are used to speed up one item sales.
NON-ADD # COMP
Y or N
Use this to enforce the entry of a non-add number before a
registration can be made. See Program Mode Æ
5.FUNCTION KEYS Æ #/NS for detail.
GALLONAGE ITEM
Y or N
For a liquid item which selling by volume, set this option to
Y (Yes) will allow to enter the total dollar amount then
compute volume sold. The volume sold will print along with
the price entry on the receipt. The total volume sold will
accumulate in the PLU counter. You must program the price
per volume (in tenths of a cent, i.e. $1.299 for $1.29 and
9/10) in the PRICE/HALO field. See Program Mode Æ
4.PRINT OPTION Æ pg10 (page 10) to determine volume
unit between 0:GAL (Gallon) or 1:LTR (LITER).
INVENTORY ITEM
(Keep/Add Stock)
Y or N
Use this to indicate the PLU is an inventory item. Without
setting this option to Y (Yes), a PLU cannot be added into
the PLU STOCK list in Program Mode Æ 00.MORE Æ
1.PLU STOCK.
DISABLE
Y or N
For unused PLU on the keyboard, Use this to disable the
PLUs in order to avoid unwanted item registration. An error
message will come up to notice the operator.
SCALEABLE
Y or N
For a weighing item, the weighing information can be
printed on the receipt after this option is set to Y (Yes).
AUTO SCALE
Y or N
For a weighing information sent from a optional scale, set
this option to Y (Yes) to allow communicating to a scale and
receive the weighing information through a serial interface.
AUTO TARE
(1-5)
0
For a weighing item, tare need to be deducted in order to get
net weight. A PLU can link to 1 of the 5 tare weight to
perform Auto Tare. Assigned one of the five tare by
entering the number (1-5) to link to a preprogrammed tare
weight to automatically subtract. Enter 0 to unlink automatic
tare subtraction. See Program Mode Æ 00.MORE Æ
5.TARE WEIGHT for detail on the Tare Weight
Programming.
CONDIMENT
Y or N
A Condiment PLU can be a side dish, a cooking method, or
additional choices, in relation to a “normal” (or main) PLU.
Use this to determine if the PLU is a Condiment PLU.
COMPULSORY CONDMNT
Y or N
For a normal (or main) PLU, if a choice of a side dish, a
cooking method, or additional choices has to be registered,
use this to enable compulsory condiment entry.
PRINT ON RECEIPT
Y or N
Use this to determine if the PLU descriptor prints on the
receipt. eg. “Medium rare” may not
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 157
Page
5
6
Field
Value
Description
PRINT ON DISPLAY
Y or N
Use this to determine if the PLU descriptor shows on the
display at the item registration.
PRINT ON CHECK
Y or N
Use this to determine if the PLU descriptor prints on the
Guest Check.
PRINT PRICE ON RECEIPT
Y or N
Use this to determine if the PLU price prints on the receipt.
PRINT PRICE ON CHECK
Y or N
Use this to determine if the PLU price prints on the Guest
Check.
DISABLE PROMO
Y or N
Use this to determine if block the PROMO function on this
PLU.
COUNTER NOT RESET
Y or N
The sales counter can be reset after Z PLU Report. Set to Y
to “Not Reset” the counter.
PRESET OVERRIDE IN
MGR CONTROL
Y or N
If PRESET OVERRIDE is Y, use this to limit the override
preset price operation only under manager’s authorisation.
LINK PLU
Up to 14
digit
numeric
When an additional PLU is always needed to be registered
following with this PLU, use this feature to register the
additional PLU automatically. Enter the PLU number of the
additional PLU here will activate this feature. Enter 0 to
unlink.
MIX&MATCH (1-99)
0
Enter a value (1-99) to link a PLU to a pre-programmed
MIX&MATC TABLE. Enter 0 to disable. See Z-Mode Æ
3.MIX & MATCH PROGRAM for detail.
DISABLE VOID & RETURN
Y or N
Use to disable the VOID Mode return and RETURN
function in Register Mode on this PLU.
158 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
To Delete PLU
NOTE: To delete a PLU, all totals for the PLU must be cleared from Z reports (including Stock and
PLU reports.)
Delete Single PLU
1. From the PLU PROGRAMMING screen, press 1 to display the DELETE PLU screen:
DELETE PLU
0.DELETE ONE PLU
1.DELETE PLU RANGE
2. Press 0 to delete an individual PLU. The PLU NUMBER screen displays:
PLU NUMBER
* ENTER PLU NUMBER
AND PUSH PLU, OR
* PRESS A PLU KEY ON
THE KEYBOARD
1Å
3. For the PLU you want to delete, you can
•
Enter the PLU number of the PLU (up to 14 digits) then follow with PLU function
key,
•
Press a keyboard PLU key,
•
Scan a Barcode as the PLU number,
•
Press Modifier key followed by a keyboard PLU key,
The CONFIRM DELETE screen displays:
CONFIRM DELETE
ARE YOU SURE YOU
WISH TO DELETE PLU#
1
CASH=DELETE
ESC=ABORT
4. Press ENTER (CASH) to delete the PLU; or press ESC (CLEAR) to return to the PLU
DELETE screen without deleting any PLU.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 159
Delete PLU Range
1. From the PLU PROGRAMMING screen, press 1 for to display the DELETE PLU
screen:
DELETE PLU
0.DELETE ONE PLU
1.DELETE PLU RANGE
2. Press 1 to delete a range of PLUs. The PLU NUMBER screen displays:
PLU NUMBER
* ENTER NUMBER OF
THE FIRST PLU IN THE RANGE
AND PUSH PLU
2Å
3. Enter the first PLU in the range, you can:
•
Enter the PLU number of the PLU (up to 14 digits) then follow with PLU function
key,
•
Press a keyboard PLU key,
•
Scan a Barcode as the PLU number,
•
Press Modifier key followed by a keyboard PLU key,
PLU NUMBER
* ENTER NUMBER OF
THE LAST PLU IN THE RANGE
AND PUSH PLU
5Å
4. Enter the first PLU in the range, you can:
•
Enter the PLU number of the PLU (up to 14 digits) then follow with PLU function
key,
•
Press a keyboard PLU key,
•
Scan a Barcode as the PLU number,
•
Press Modifier key followed by a keyboard PLU key,
The CONFIRM DELETE screen displays:
160 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
CONFIRM DELETE
ARE YOU SURE YOU
WISH TO DELETE PLU#
CASH=DELETE
ESC=ABORT
2 TO
5
NOTE: The PLU entry methods do not have to be the same, as far as the PLU number
entered in Step 3 is always smaller then the PLU number entered in Step 4.
5. Press ENTER (CASH) to delete the PLU; press ESC (CLEAR) to return to the PLU
DELETE screen without deleting any PLU.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 161
Group Programming
The main purpose of Group is to summarize PLU sales. There are up to 99 groups are available, the
exact number is determined in Memory Allocation. Group totals appear on reports, so that you can
track sales of different types of items. There are other features involved in Group Programming, such
as KP (Kitchen Printing), KV (Kitchen Video Ordering System), and Age Verification.
•
The group descriptors programmed here will replace the default descriptors GROUP 1
through GROUP 99 that appear on reports.
•
Each PLU can report totals to one, two or three different groups. If a PLU sends totals to
more than one group, the group total that appears on the Group report will not represent PLU
sales. Therefore, you also have the option of deciding whether each group's total will add to
the group total on the Group report.
•
The KP programming only take effect when the group with KP programming is linked to the
first group of the Group Link in PLU Programming.
1. At the PGM control lock position menu, press 1 for GROUP. The GROUP
PROGRAMMING screen displays: (The maximum group number is set by memory
allocation.)
GROUP PROGRAMMING
GROUP NO? (1-20)
0Å
2. Enter the number of the group to be programmed, press ENTER (CASH). The GROUP#
PROGRAMMING. screen displays:
GROUP #1 PROGRAMMING
DESC : GROUP 1
ADD TO GROUP TTL
SEND TO KP
KP PORT# :
1 2 3 4
SAT.
N N N N
SER.
N N N N
PRINT RED ON KP
162 • Program Mode Programming
Y
N
R
Y
Å
N
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
3. To browse through the options:
•
Press ENTER key to move “Å” symbol option by option, or
•
press PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN for fast browsing page by page.
4. When reaching the option you want to modify:
•
For descriptor programming options, the keyboard will change to Program Overlay,
enter the character you need up to 12 characters. Or enter Descriptor Code to make up the
description you want.
NOTE: System Option is default to Program Overlay. Please check setting on page 17
•
For numeric programming options, enter the number through numeric pad,
•
For Yes/No programming options, press YES/NO key to toggle between Y and N
GROUP #1 PROGRAMMING
SEND TO KV
KV GROUP#(0-16)
KV COLOR(0-16)
NÅ
0
0
AGE VERIFICATION (0-5)
0
5. Refer to the table below to fill the fields of the GROUP PROGRAMMING screens.
6. Press ENTER (CASH) to return to the GROUP PROGRAMMING screen. Continue to
program groups as necessary. Press ESC (CLEAR) to return to the PROGRAM MODE
screen.
Group Programming - Reference Information
Page
Field
Value
Description
1
DESC
You can program a descriptor for each group. Type the
Alpha
numeric 12 descriptor using the Program Overlay. The overlay is
automatically activated when the cursor is pointing at the
character
DESC field. The default descriptors are GROUP 1,
GROUP 2, etc.
ADD TO GROUP TOTAL
Y or N
Use this to determine if the sales total of this group is going
to be added into Group Total which will update the total of
Group Report.
SEND TO KP
Y or N
In a café or restaurant environment, use this to determine if
the items linked to this group print to a remote printer as a
Kitchen Printer.
NOTE: Even set this option to Y, it will not work unless this
group is the first group that a PLU is linked to.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 163
Page
Field
Value
Description
KP PORT #
(SAT.) 1, 2, 3, 4, R
(SER.) 1, 2, 3, 4
Y for R or
N for 1, 2,
3 and 4 on
both SAT.
and SER.
When Send to KP is Y, a Kitchen Printer (include Kitchen
Requisition) need to be assigned. When a KP is going to be
printed through an individual register, the SAT port(s) is
selected. More than one ticket may be printed depends on the
settings. When in a IRC network and share Printing is
preferred, the SER port(s) can be assigned as well.
* SAT. : SATELLITE (Local)
* SER. : SERVER
R : Internal Receipt Printer (Kitchen Requisition)
See Service Mode Æ 7.IRC OPTIONS for IRC settings
detail; Æ 8.RS232C PORTS for RP settings detail.
PRINT RED ON KP
Y or N
When print to KP, with a printer that capable to print 2
colors, you can set this option to Y to print item on KP as
RED (or the second color). If a thermal printer is used, the
thermal printer will print Inverse instead.
NOTE: This option does not apply to the register receipt
printer.
2
SEND TO KV
Y or N
In a cafe or restaurant environment, a Kitchen Video system
may be installed. Use this to determine if send item info to
KV.
KV GROUP# (1 - 16)
0
Select the kitchen video group to which PLUs in this group
are to be sent. Enter 0 if not using it.
KV COLOR (1 - 16)
0
The color code set here will control the color or screen
format displayed on an optional kitchen video system
requisition screen. Color codes vary by KVS system. Refer
to the documentation for your video system for specific
information. Enter 0 for not using it.
AGE VERIFICATION (1 - 5)
0
A group can be set as age restricted. All items with similar
rule can link to this group. This option allows to link a group
to 1 of the 5 Age Verification programmed in Z Mode.
When an item in this group is registered (first time in a
transaction only), the register will prompt the operator to
enter the customer’s date of birth. The sale of the item will
be registered only if the customer has reached the
appropriate age. Set to 0for no age requirement. Set 1 to 5 to
check the date of birth against the age requirement group set
in Z Mode. Enter 0 for not using it.
164 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Sales Tax Programming
The SPS-300 allows three calculation options for each of the four possible taxes.
Taxes can be calculated as either a straight percentage rate of between 0.001% and 99.999%, or an up
to 75 break point tax table (For US Market). Each tax may be either an add-on tax (added to the cost
of a taxable item), or a value added tax (VAT) that is included in the price of the item.
Tax rate 4 may be set to function as the Canadian Goods & Services Tax (GST). Definitions for tax
rates 1, 2, 3 & 4 are made as part of tax programming.
•
The Default program is set to 10.000% VAT on Tax 1 and the description is set to
GST already.
•
If you do need to program any of the 4 taxes in the system, a related tax (TAX 1 ~ 4)
function key has to be assigned on the keyboard. Please refer to Service Mode, 6.Key
Assignment programming for detail.
•
Add-On - most sales taxes can be programmed by entering an add-on tax percentage rate.
•
Tax Table - if a tax entered as an add-on tax percentage does not follow exactly the tax
chart that apply in your area, tax table programming will match tax collection exactly to the
break points of your tax table. (Tax table programming allows up to 75 breakpoints.)(FOR
USA)
•
VAT - if tax is included in the cost of the item, you can use value added tax (VAT) to
calculate the tax share of each sale.
•
If you are entering a Canadian Goods and Services Tax (GST), use Tax 4 for the Canadian
GST, and use tax rates 1, 2 and/or 3 for any other provincial tax or taxes.
Important Note: After you have entered your tax program, test for accuracy by entering several
transactions of different dollar amounts. Carefully check to make sure the tax
charged by the cash register matches the tax amounts on the printed tax chart for
your area. As a merchant, you are responsible for accurate tax collection. If the cash
register is not calculating tax accurately, or if you cannot program your tax properly
from the information in this manual, contact your Dealer for assistance.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 165
Programming a VAT (Value Added Tax)
When a tax is included in the cost of the item, you can use the Value Added Tax (VAT) program to
calculate the tax share of each sale.
1. Turn the control lock to the PGM position.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 2 to view the TAX PROGRAMMING screen.
TAX PROGRAMMING
TAX NUMBER (1-4)
DESC : TAX2
TAX TYPE (0-2)
0 : ADD-ON
1 : TAX TABLE
2 : VAT
2Å
2
3. When the arrow is pointed at the TAX NUMBER field, enter the number of the tax you wish
to program. (There are four taxes available, enter 1, 2, 3, or 4.) Tax 2 is used for example.
4. When reaching the option you want to modify,
•
For descriptor programming options, the keyboard will change to Program Overlay,
enter the character you need up to 12 characters. Or enter Descriptor Code to make up the
description you want.
NOTE: System Option is default to Program Overlay. Please check setting on page 17
•
For numeric programming options, enter the number through numeric pad,
5. Enter 2 then press ENTER (CASH) at TAX TYPE (0-2) field for VAT with a straight
percentage rate. The appropriate TAX # PROGRAMMING screen displays:
TAX #2 PROGRAMMING
TAX RATE
0.000Å
6. When the arrow is pointed at the TAX RATE field, enter the VAT rate. For example if the
tax is 6 percent, enter 6.000 or 6.0. If the tax is 7.5 percent, enter 7.500 or 7.5 using the
decimal key. If the tax is 10 percent, enter 10.000 or 10. Press ENTER (CASH) to set the
rate.
7. The TAX PROGRAMMING screen will prompt you to enter the next tax. If necessary,
continue to program additional taxes, or press ESC (CLEAR) to return to the PROGRAM
MODE screen.
166 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Programming an Add-On Tax Rate Percentage
When tax requirements can be met using a straight percentage rate, use the following method to
program a tax as a straight percentage.
1. Turn the control lock to the PGM position.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 2 to view the TAX PROGRAMMING screen.
TAX PROGRAMMING
TAX NUMBER (1-4)
DESC : TAX2
TAX TYPE (0-2)
0 : ADD-ON
1 : TAX TABLE
2 : VAT
2Å
0
3. When the arrow is pointed at the TAX NUMBER field, enter the number of the tax you wish
to program. (There are four taxes available, enter 1, 2, 3, or 4.) Tax 2 is used for example.
4. When reaching the option you want to modify,
•
For descriptor programming options, the keyboard will change to Program Overlay,
enter the character you need up to 18 characters. Or enter Descriptor Code to make up the
description you want.
NOTE: System Option is default to Program Overlay. Please check setting on page 17
•
For numeric programming options, enter the number through numeric pad,
5. Enter 0 then press ENTER (CASH) at TAX TYPE (0-2) field for an ADD-ON tax with a
straight percentage rate. The appropriate TAX # PROGRAMMING screen displays:
TAX #2 PROGRAMMING
TAX RATE
0.000Å
6. When the arrow is pointed at the TAX RATE field, enter the percentage rate for the sales tax.
For example if the tax is 6 percent, enter 6.000 or 6.0. If the tax is 7.5 percent, enter 7.500 or
7.5 using the decimal key. If the tax is 10 percent, enter 10.000 or 10.0. Press ENTER
(CASH) to set the rate.
7. The TAX PROGRAMMING screen will prompt you to enter the next tax. If necessary,
continue to program additional taxes, or press ESC (CLEAR) to return to the PROGRAM
MODE screen.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 167
Programming a Tax Table
In some cases, a tax that is entered as a percentage does not follow exactly the tax charts that apply in
your area (even if the tax chart is based on a percentage). In these cases, we recommend that you
enter your tax using tax table programming. This method will match tax collection exactly to the
break points of your tax table.
Before programming, obtain a copy of the tax table you wish to program. You will need the printed
tax table if you wish to determine the break point entries yourself. The " Tax Table Programming
Example - Illinois 6% Tax Table " is used as an example in the steps that follow.
NOTE: On SPS-300, you can enter up to 75 break points.
1. Turn the control lock to the PGM position.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 2 to view the TAX PROGRAMMING screen.
TAX PROGRAMMING
TAX NUMBER (1-4)
DESC : TAX2
TAX TYPE (0-2)
0 : ADD-ON
1 : TAX TABLE
2 : VAT
2Å
1
3. When the arrow is pointed at the TAX NUMBER field, enter the number of the tax you wish
to program. (There are four taxes available, enter 1, 2, 3, or 4.) Tax 2 is used for example.
4. When reaching the option you want to modify,
•
For descriptor programming options, the keyboard will change to Program Overlay,
enter the character you need up to 18 characters. Or enter Descriptor Code to make up the
description you want.
NOTE: System Option is default to Program Overlay. Please check setting on page 17
•
For numeric programming options, enter the number through numeric pad,
5. Enter 1 then press ENTER (CASH) at TAX TYPE (0-2) field for an TAX TABLE
programming. The appropriate TAX # PROGRAMMING screen displays:
TAX #2 PROGRAMMING
FIRST TAX AMOUNT
NON-TAXable AMOUNT
# OF NON-REPEAT BREAK
# OF REPEAT BREAK
0.00Å
0.00
0
0
6. Use the table on next page as a guide in filling the fields on this screen. After completing
these entries, your screen should look like the screen that follows.
168 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Page
Field
Value
Description
FIRST TAX AMOUNT
(0 - 9999)
0
Enter the first tax amount that is charged. For this example
the entry is 0.01.
NON-TAXable AMOUNT
(0 - 9999)
0
Enter the highest amount where no tax is charged. For this
example the entry is 0.10.
# OF NON-REPEAT BRK
(0 - 75)
0
Enter the number of Non-repeat breaks. For this example the
entry is 5.
# OF REPEAT BREAK
(0 - 99)
0
Enter the number of repeat breaks. For this example the entry
is 3.
TAX #2 PROGRAMMING
FIRST TAX AMOUNT
NON-TAXable AMOUNT
# OF NON-REPEAT BREAK
# OF REPEAT BREAK
0.01
0.10
5
3Å
7. After entering the # OF REPEAT BREAK field and press ENTER (CASH), the next TAX
TABLE PROGRAMMING screen will display.
TAX
0.00
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
TAX TABLE PROGRAMMING
È
SALE AMT RANGE
0.00 - 0.10
0.11 - 0.10Å
0.11 - 0.10
0.11 - 0.10
0.11 - 0.10
0.11 - 0.10
TAX
0.06
0.07
0.08
TAX TABLE PROGRAMMING
Ç
SALE AMT RANGE
0.00 - 0.10Å
0.11 - 0.10
0.11 - 0.10
8. Using the printed copy of your tax table, enter information in the SALE AMOUNT RANGE
fields. Enter the information as it appears on your tax table. Enter the high amount of the first
range where you are prompted. The low amount of the next range will be computed
automatically. After completing the tax range entries, your screen should look like the
following screen. Note that this screen should look exactly like the corresponding part of the
printed tax table.
TAX
0.00
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
TAX TABLE PROGRAMMING
È
SALE AMT RANGE
0.00 - 0.10
0.11 - 0.21
0.22 - 0.38
0.39 - 0.56
0.57 - 0.73
0.74 - 0.91Å
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 169
9. Because this tax table has up to 8 break points - number of non-repeat (5) plus number of
repeat (3) break points (the number of break points that can be displayed on the first screen),
you must continue to enter SALE AMT RANGE information on the additional screens until
information has been entered for each break point. After completing the tax range entries,
your screen should look like the following screen. Note that this screen should look exactly
like the corresponding part of the printed tax table.
TAX
0.06
0.07
0.08
TAX TABLE PROGRAMMING
Ç
SALE AMT RANGE
0.92 - 1.08
1.09 - 1.24
1.25 - 1.41Å
10. After you have completed entering the SALES AMOUNT RANGE information, the TAX
PROGRAMMING screen will prompting you to enter the next tax. If necessary, continue to
program additional taxes or press ESC (CLEAR) to return to the PROGRAM MODE
screen.
Tax Table Programming Example - Illinois 6% Tax Table(FOR USA)
1. Examine the printed tax table for the tax you are programming.
2. Calculate the break point differences by subtracting the high side of the previous range
from the high side of the sale amount range.
3. Examine the pattern of break point differences to determine when the break points begin
to repeat. Mark the beginning break points that do not fit a pattern as “non-repeat
breaks.” Mark the break points that are repeating in a pattern as “repeat breaks.” Count
the number of repeat and non-repeat breaks.
Tax Charged
Sale Amount
Range
Break point
Differences
$0.00
$0.00 - $0.10
$0.01
$0.11 - $0.21
0.11
$0.02
$0.22 - $0.38
0.17
$0.03
$0.39 - $0.56
0.18
$0.04
$0.57 - $0.73
0.17
$0.05
$0.74 - $0.91
0.18
$0.06
$0.92 - $1.08
0.17
$0.07
$1.09 - $1.24
0.16
$0.08
$1.25 - $1.41
0.17
$0.09
$1.42 - $1.58
0.17
$0.10
$1.59 - $1.74
0.16
$0.11
$1.75 - $1.91
0.17
$0.12
$1.92 - $2.08
0.17
$0.13
$2.09 - $2.24
0.16
170 • Program Mode Programming
Non-Repeat
Repeat
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Programming a Canadian GST
Tax 4 can be programmed to accommodate the Canadian Goods and Services tax (GST).
1. Turn the control lock to the PGM position.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 2 to view the TAX PROGRAMMING screen.
TAX PROGRAMMING
TAX NUMBER (1-4)
DESC : TAX4
TAX TYPE (0-2)
0 : ADD-ON
1 : TAX TABLE
2 : VAT
4Å
0
3. When the arrow is pointed at the TAX NUMBER field, enter 4, press ENTER (CASH).
4. When reaching the option you want to modify,
•
For descriptor programming options, the keyboard will change to Program Overlay,
enter the character you need up to 18 characters. Or enter Descriptor Code to make up the
description you want.
NOTE: System Option is default to Program Overlay. Please check setting on page 17
•
For numeric programming options, enter the number through numeric pad,
5. Enter 0 then press ENTER (CASH) at TAX TYPE (0-2) field (as Canadian GST based on
ADD-ON tax). The TAX #4 PROGRAMMING screen displays:
TAX #4 PROGRAMMING
TAX RATE
0.000Å
GST IS TAXABLE BY
RATE 1
N
RATE 2
N
RATE 3
N
6. When the arrow is pointed at the TAX RATE field, enter the GST rate. For example if the
tax is 6 percent, enter 6.000 or 6.0. If the tax is 7.5 percent, enter 7.500 or 7.5 using the
decimal key. If the tax is 10 percent, enter 10.000 or 10.0. Press ENTER (CASH) to set the
rate.
7. At the RATE 1 field, indicate if the GST is taxable by rate 1 (tax on tax) by pressing the
YES/NO key, then pressing the ENTER (CASH) key. The arrow advances to the RATE 2
field. Enter taxable status for RATE 2 and RATE 3. The PROGRAM MODE screen
returns.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 171
System Option Programming (for v01.011 and later)
NOTE: If your SPS-300 is loaded with v01.010 or earlier version firmware, please see Appendix
for System Option Screen Images and Reference Information.
Refer to " System Options - Reference Information " to make program entries or changes, press the
ENTER (CASH) key to finalize your change, then ESC (CLEAR) to exit. Default value has been
highlighted in bold print.
1. At the PGM control lock position menu, press 3 for SYSTEM OPTION Programming. The
SYSTEM OPTION pg 1 screen displays:
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 1
BEEPER ACTIVE
YÅ
RESERVED
N
CLERK ENTRY
0
0:PUSH
1:CODE
CLERK ASSIGNED WHEN CLERK KEY
IS PUSHED (1-10)
1
2. To browse through the options:
•
Press ENTER key to move “Å” symbol option by option, or
•
press PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN for fast browsing page by page.
3. When reaching the option you want to modify,
•
For STORE NAME programming on pg18 (page18), the keyboard will change to
Program Overlay, enter the character you need up to 8 characters. Or enter Descriptor
Code to make up the description you want.
NOTE: System Option is default to Program Overlay. Please check setting on page 17
•
For numeric programming options, enter the number through numeric pad,
•
For Yes/No programming options, press YES/NO key to toggle between Y and N
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 1
BEEPER ACTIVE
YÅ
RESERVED
N
CLERK ENTRY
0
0:PUSH
1:CODE
CLERK ASSIGNED WHEN CLERK KEY
IS PUSHED (1-10)
1
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 2
CLERK IS Y:POP-UP
NÅ
N:STAY-DOWN
DRAWER NEEDS TO BE SHUT TO
OPERATE
Y
ACTIVATE OPEN DRAWER ALARM
N
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 3
SECONDS TO ALLOW DRAWER OPEN 30Å
(0-99)
ALLOW POST TENDER
N
OPEN DRAWER ON POST TENDER
Y
ALLOW MULTIPLE RECEIPT
Y
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 4
CASH DECLARATION REQ
BEFORE REPORTS
NÅ
MGR CONTROL TO TEND.
NEGATIVE BALANCE
N
ZERO BALANCE
N
RESET TRANSACTION NO.ON Z RPT N
172 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 5
RESET GRAND TOTAL AFTER
NÅ
Z REPORT
OPEN DRAWER WHEN REPORTS
ARE RUN
Y
OPEN DRAWER DURING TRAIN MODE Y
DECIMAL PLACE (0-3)
SYSTEM OPTION
% AND TAX CALCULATION
SPLIT PRICE CALCULATION
2
pg 7
0Å
0
SYSTEM OPTION
DATE FORMAT IS
0:MDY
1:DYM
2:YMD
MODIFIER
0:POP UP AFTER ITEM
1:POP UP AFTER SALE
2:STAYDOWN
pg 6
1Å
0
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 8
COMPULSORY EAT-IN T-OUT D-THRU
BEFORE TENDERING
NÅ
CALCULATION CHART
0:ROUND UP AT 0.50
1:ROUND UP
2:ROUND DOWN
HASH IS
Y:NORMAL N:NON-ADD
ALLOW PRINT SCREEN ON
X/TIME KEY
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 9
RESET Z COUNTER AFTER Z1 REPORT
FINANCIAL REPORT
NÅ
TIME REPORT
N
PLU
REPORT
N
CLERK REPORT
N
GROUP REPORT
N
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 10
RESET Z COUNTER AFTER Z2 REPORT
DAILY SALES REPORT
NÅ
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 11
ALLOW DIRECT MULTIPLICATION
NÅ
INVENTORY LEVEL PROGRAM, THE N
AMOUNT PROGRAMMED IS:
Y:ADD TO CURRENT LEVEL
N:REPLACE CURRENT LEVEL
GLOBAL ENTRY LIMIT (0-14)
0
(0: NO LIMIT (15 DIGITS))
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 12
RESET GST AFTER SERVICE ON
HARD CHECK
YÅ
ROUNDING
ON SUBTOTAL
N
ON CASH
Y
SYSTEM OPTION
PRICE LEVEL IS
0:POP UP AFTER ITEM
1:POP UP AFTER SALE
2:STAYDOWN
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 14
PROMPT OPERATOR WHEN EJ BUFFER
IS FULL
NÅ
STOP OPERATIONS WHEN EJ BUFFER
IS FULL
N
SEND ONLY NEGATIVE ENTRIES
TO EJ
N
X REPORT & DECLARATION TO EJ N
pg 13
0Å
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL
SYSTEM OPTION
SEND RESET REPORT TO EJ
Y
pg 15
DIRECT MULTIPLICATION MORE
THAN ONE DIGIT
TENDER VALIDATION
Y:AMOUNT TENDERED
N:AMOUNT OF SALE
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
YÅ
N
N
Y
Y
PRINTER PAPER SENSOR ACTIVE
Y
DEACTIVATE SPLIT PRICING
N
SYSTEM OPTION
ROUNDING SYSTEM
# START END
1
00 – 02
2
03 – 07
3
08 – 09
4
00 – 00
5
00 – 00
pg 16
YÅ
VALUE
0
5
10
0
0
Program Mode Programming • 173
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 17
DISABLE NOT FOUND PLU
NÅ
EMBEDED PRICE BAR CODE TYPE
1
1/2/3/4/7
CLERK INTERRUPT
N
PROGRAM DESCRIPTOR BY CODE
N
AUTO CUTTER
Y
USE SPOOL
N
SYSTEM OPTION
USE MCR
USE TRACK 1&2 : 0
TRACK 2&3 : 1
USE DALLAS
STORE NAME:
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 19
BACK LIGHT COLOR (0-7)
0Å
0:ON 1:RED 2:GREEN 3:BLUE
4:RED+GREEN 5:GREEN + BLUE
6:RED+BLUE
7:OFF
SELECT LANGUAGE
1
0:ENGLISH 1:SPANISH 2:GERMAN
N
TAX1 SHIFT
SYSTEM OPTION
RESERVED
MIX & MATCH IS TAXABLE
pg 18
NÅ
1
N
STORE A
N
DISPLAY ADD PRICE
OF LINKED ITEMS
ALLOW SALE WITH 0 STOCK
ALLOW Z STOCK RPT
RESERVED
pg 20
NÅ
Y
Y
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 21
ALLOW Z FINANCIAL REPORT WITH 0Å
OPEN CLERK INTERRUPT
System Options - Reference Information
Page
1
2
Field
Value
Description
BEEPER ACTIVE
Y or N
Use to determine if buzzer is active when keyboard button is
pressed.
RESERVED
Y or N
CLERK ENTRY
0:PUSH
1:CODE
0
Select between PUSH or CODE for clerk entry (Sign-On).
When PUSH is selected, press CLERK button to Sign-On
(please see next option to determine which Clerk is used). If
select CODE, enter Clerk Code then press CLERK button.
See PROGRAM Mode Æ 6.CLERK for detail.
CLERK ASSIGNED WHEN
CLERK KEY IS PUSHED (110)
1
If PUSH system is selected for Clerk Entry, you can select
the clerk that is signed on when the CLERK # key is
pressed. Note that the maximum clerk number you can enter
here is determined by how many clerks are allocated in
memory.
CLERK IS
Y:POP-UP
N:STAY-DOWN
Y or N
Depends on the size of the business, or reporting purpose,
the Clerk status can be set between Pop-Up or Stay-Down. If
Pop-up is chosen, a clerk will be signed-off automatically
after a transaction is finalised (stored in Account Operation).
Otherwise, Stay-Down will have a clerk stay sign-on all the
time (except after an Initial Clear is performed).
DRAWER NEEDS TO BE
SHUT TO OPERATE
Y or N
Select between Y or N to allow or disallow operation when
drawer is open.
174 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Page
3
4
5
6
Field
Value
Description
ACTIVATE OPEN DRAWER
ALARM
Y or N
Select between Y or N to enable or disable open drawer
alarm. See next option for related settings.
SECONDS TO ALLOW
DRAWER OPEN (0 - 99)
30
When Open Drawer Alarm is enabled, enter the number as
the number of seconds before the alarm to go off.
ALLOW POST TENDER
Y or N
Select Y to allow re-tendering should a second change
calculation be necessary. Re-enter the tendered amount and
press the CASH key to show the new change computation.
OPEN DRAWER ON POST
TENDER
Y or N
If you enable post tendering, select N to not open the cash
drawer after the second tender.
ALLOW MULPTIPLE
RECEIPT
Y or N
Use this to allow multiple receipt printing. In conjunction
with Print Option - Buffer Receipt Issue when Receipt is
On (pg12) sets to Y, multiple receipt can be issued by press
CASH key as many time as you need.
CASH DECLARATION REQ
BEFORE REPORTS
Y or N
Use to determine if Cash Declaration is compulsory before
any reports is made.
MGR CONTROL TO TEND.
NEGATIVE BALANCE
Y or N
Use to determine if Manager Control is compulsory when
Negative Balance Tendering occurs. When selected the
control lock must be in the X position to finalise the
transaction.
MGR CONTROL
TO TEND.
ZERO BALANCE
Y or N
Use to determine if Manager Control is compulsory when
Zero Balance Tendering occurs. When selected the control
lock must be in the X position to finalise the transaction.
RESET TRANSACTION #
ON Z REPORT
Y or N
Use to determine if the Transaction (Receipt) Number is
reset automatically after a Z Financial Report is made.
RESET GRAND TOTAL
AFTER Z REPORT
Y or N
Use to determine if the Grand Total on the Financial
Report is reset automatically after a Z Financial Report is
made.
OPEN DRAWER WHEN
REPORTS ARE RUN
Y or N
Use to determine if Cash Drawer opens automatically when
a report is running.
OPEN DRAWER DURING
TRAIN MODE
Y or N
Use to determine if Cash Drawer opens at the end of
Training Mode transaction.
DECIMAL PLACE (0 - 3)
2
Enter a number to place the decimal point the selected
number of positions from the right.
DATE FORMAT IS 0:MDY
1:DMY 2:YMD
1
Use to determine the Date Format between 0 for
MMDDYY, 1 for DDMMYY, or 2 for YYMMDD date
printing format.
MODIFIER:
0:POP UP AFTER ITEM
1:POP UP AFTER SALE
2:STAYDOWN
0
A MODIFIER key alters the next PLU registered, either by
adding the modifier descriptor and not changing the code of
the subsequent PLU, or by changing the code number of the
PLU so that a different item is registered. If you press a
modifier key, you have the option of the modifier applying
only to the next item (0), having the same modifier apply to
any subsequent item registered in the same transaction (1), or
having the same modifier apply to any subsequent item on
any subsequent transaction (2).
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 175
Page
7
8
Field
Value
Description
% AND TAX CALCULATION
0:ROUND UP AT 0.50
1:ROUND UP
2:ROUND DOWN
0
Select the digit that represents the appropriate rounding
method for tax and discount calculations: 0 for round up at
0.5 of a penny (0.005), 1 for always round up or 2 for always
round down.
SPLIT PRICE
CALCULATION
0:ROUND UP AT 0.50
1:ROUND UP
2:ROUND DOWN
0
Select the digit that represents the appropriate rounding
method for split pricing (i.e. 2 at 3 for $1.00) calculations: 0
for round up at 0.5 of a penny (0.005), 1 for always round up
or 2 for always round down.
COMPULSORY EAT-IN TOUT D-THRU BEFORE
TENDERING
Y or N
Choose Y if you wish to enforce use of one of the destination
keys (EAT-IN, TAKE OUT, or DRIVE THRU) before the
sale is finalized.
HASH IS
Y:NORMAL N:NON-ADD
Y or N
Y: Hash adds to all totals except the gross and net sales totals
on the financial report.
N: Hash does not add to any totals, except the HASH total on
the financial report.
ALLOW PRINT SCREEN ON Y or N
X/TIME KEY
9
10
11
Choose N if you wish to disable the print screen function of
the X/TIME key.
RESET Z COUNTER
AFTER Z1 REPORT
FINANCIAL REPORT
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
counter after a Z1 of each report listed.
TIME REPORT
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
counter after a Z1 of each report listed.
PLU REPORT
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
counter after a Z1 of each report listed.
CLERK REPORT
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
counter after a Z1 of each report listed.
GROUP REPORT
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
counter after a Z1 of each report listed.
RESET Z COUNTER
AFTER Z2 REPORT
DAILY SALES RPT
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
counter after a Z2 of the daily sales report.
PRINTER PAPER SENSOR
ACTIVE
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if activate the printer paper low
sensor.
DEACTIVATE SPLIT
PRICING
Y or N
If N, both multiplication and split pricing calculations can be
done with the X/TIME key. If Y, only multiplication can be
done with the X/TIME key.
ALLOW DIRECT
MULTPLICATION
Y or N
If Y, you can multiply preset items by simply entering the
quantity, then pressing the preset PLU key.
INVENTORY CNT PGM
Y:ADD CURR. LVL
N:COUNTER REPLACE
CURR LEVEL
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine whether the quantity of
inventory you enter in the PLU stock program adds to ()
existing inventory quantity, or whether it replaces the current
inventory quantity. ()
GLOBAL ENTRY LIMIT
(0 - 14)
0
Enter a digit to determine the number of numeric digits that
can be entered for any register function. Enter 0 for no limit.
176 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Page
12
Field
Value
Y or N
RESET GST AFTER
SERVICE ON HARD CHECK
ROUNDING ON SUBTOTAL
Y or N
Description
Select Y to enable resetting GST on the Hard Check just
serviced to avoid GST amount been incorrectly cumulated.
WARNING: By law, the rounding is only apply to CASH
transaction. Please check with authority before changing this
option.
Select Y to execute rounding when SUBTOTAL is pressed.
The “ROUNDING ON CASH” has to set to N.
ROUNDING ON CASH
Y or N
WARNING: By law, the rounding is only apply to CASH
transaction. Please check with authority before changing this
option.
Select Y to execute rounding when CASH is pressed. The
“ROUNDING ON SUBTOTAL” has to set to N.
13
14
15
16
PRICE LEVEL IS
0:POP UP AFTER ITEM
1:POP UP AFTER SALE
2:STAYDOWN
0
If you press a price level key, you have the option of the
level key applying only to the next item (0), having the same
level key apply to any subsequent item registered in the same
transaction (1), or having the same level key apply to any
subsequent item on any subsequent transaction(2).
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL
Y or N
Select Y to enable the electronic journal. The electronic
journal captures in memory what you would print line by line
on a traditional journal. The four options that follow control
the electronic journal feature. The electronic journal can be
read and printed in the X control lock position or reset and
printed in the Z control lock position.
PROMPT OPERATOR
WHEN EJ BUFFER IS FULL
Y or N
If the electronic journal is enabled above, select Y if you
wish to display a message to notify the operator when the
journal memory is full.
STOP OPERATIONS WHEN
EJ BUFFER IS FULL
Y or N
If the electronic journal is enabled above, select Y if you
wish to stop operations when the journal memory is full.
SEND ONLY NEGATIVE
ENTRIES TO EJ
Y or N
If the electronic journal is enabled above, select Y if you
wish to capture only transactions with negative entries.
X REPORT AND
DECLARATION SEND TO
EJ
Y or N
If the electronic journal is enabled above, select Y if you
wish to capture X report and declaration.
SEND RESET REPORT TO
EJ
Y or N
If the electronic journal is enabled above, select Y if you
wish to capture reset reports.
DIRECT MULTIPLICATION
MORE THAN ONE DIGIT
Y or N
If you allow direct multiplication of a preset PLU, you can
allow only single digit multiplication or multiplication by
more than one digit.
TENDER VALIDATION
Y:AMT TENDERED
N:AMT OF SALE
Y or N
Validation is allowed if an appropriate optional printer is
connected to an RS-232C port. Here you can choose the
content of single line validation
ROUNDING SYSTEM
Y or N
Select Y to enable Rounding System.
Rounding Rates
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Enter the high amount of the first range where you are
prompted. The low amount of the next range will be
computed automatically.
Program Mode Programming • 177
Page
17
Field
Value
Description
DISABLE NOT FOUND PLU
Y or N
Select Y to disable the NOT FOUND PLU function.
1
EMBEDED PRICE BAR
CODE TYPE 1/2/3/4/7
(0,1,2,3,4 or 7)
ps. See next page for detail.
Enables price embedded bar codes:
1,2 = Type 1 embedded bar codes with a price check sum.
3,4 = Type 3 embedded bar codes without a check sum.
7 = Choose 7 if you are embedding a weight, rather than a
price. Use weight when different items are sold in bulk, such
as nut/bolts in a hardware store. When a weight embedded
bar code is scanned the weight is displayed and must be
extended by a price at the cash register.
18
19
CLERK INTERRUPT
Y or N
When Y, if entering a different clerk number during
registration. This saves sale information to temporary area of
clerk. And then you can continue registration after recall by
same clerk.
PROGRAM DESCRIPTOR
BY CODE
Y or N
When N, program descriptors by pressing the appropriate
key on the program overlay. When Y, program descriptors
by typing the code for each descriptor character.
AUTO CUTTER
Y or N
Select Y to use Auto Cutter.
USE SPOOL
Y or N
Select Y to activate Journal Take Out Spool.
USE MCR
Y or N
Select code entry clerk system by MCR.
USE
TRACK 1&2:0
TRACK 2&3:1
1
Select the MCR track type.
USE DALLAS
Y or N
Select Y to use Dallas function.
STORE NAME:
Alpha
numeric 8
character
Enter the Store name to use SD Card operation.
MIX & MATCH IS TAXABLE
Y or N
When Mix and Match discount is used, determine if tax
applies before or after Mix and Match discount. Default is N
- not taxable/after Mix and Match discount.
BACK LIGHT COLOR (0-7)
0:ON
1:RED
2:GREEN
3:BLUE
4:RED + GREEN
5:GREEN + BLUE
6:RED + BLUE
7:OFF
0
Select Back light color of display.
SELECT LANGUAGE
0:ENGLISH
1:SPANISH
2:GERMAN
0
Select language which you want to use.
TAX1 SHIFT
Y or N
When pressed before a PLU entry, the tax shift keys reverse
the tax status of the PLU, i.e., a PLU with non-tax status
would become taxable or a PLU with tax status would
become non-taxable.
178 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Page
20
Field
Value
Description
DISPLAY ADD PRICE OF
LINKED ITEMS
Y or N
When Y, the customer display shows a total of the item and
linked item. For example, if PLU is $1.00 and is linked to
PLU2 which is $0.25, the customer display will show $1.25.
ALLOW SALE WITH 0
STOCK
Y or N
When N, inventory PLUs cannot be sold when stock reaches
"0".
ALLOW Z STOCK RPT
Y or N
When N, the operator is not allowed to clear (Z) stock.
Y or N
A Z Financial Report will clear transaction detail. Select N if
not allow Z Financial Report before all Clerk Interrupt are
closed.
RESERVED
RESERVED
21
ALLOW Z FINANCIAL
REPORT WITH OPEN CLK
INTERRUPT SALES
Price Embedded Barcode Format
Barcode
Format
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 7
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
I1
I1
I1
I1
I1
I2
I2
I2
I2
I2
I3
I3
I3
I3
I3
I4
I4
I4
I4
I4
I5 S P1 P2 P3
S P1 P2 P3 P4
I5 I6 P1 P2 P3
I5 P1 P2 P3 P4
I5 W1 W2 W3 W4
8th
9th
10th 11th 12th 13th
P4
P5
P4
P5
W5
C
C
C
C
C
(5 and 4)
(4 and 5)
(6 and 4)
(5 and 5)
(5 and 5)
D1, D2
= Department Number (02, 20 ~ 29)
I1 ~ I6
= Item Code digits
P1 ~ P5
= Price digits
W1 ~ W5 = Weight digits
S
= Check sum digit for price
C
= Check sum digit for all characters
Type 0:
Type 1:
Type 2:
Type 3:
Type 4:
Type 7:
Price Embedded Barcode not used
2 digits Department Number, 5 digits Item Code, 1 digit Price Checksum, 4 digits Price, and 1 digit Checksum.
2 digits Department Number, 4 digits Item Code, 1 digit Price Checksum, 5 digits Price, and 1 digit Checksum.
2 digits Department Number, 6 digits Item Code, 4 digits Price, and 1 digit Checksum.
2 digits Department Number, 5 digits Item Code, 5 digits Price, and 1 digit Checksum.
2 digits Department Number, 5 digits Item Code, 5 digits Weight, and 1 digit Checksum.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 179
Print Option Programming (for v01.011 and later)
NOTE: If your SPS-300 is loaded with v01.010 or earlier version firmware, please see Appendix
for System Option Screen Images and Reference Information.
Refer to " Print Options - Reference Information " to make program entries or changes, press the
ENTER (CASH) key to finalize your change, then ESC (CLEAR) to exit. Default value has been
highlighted in bold print.
1. At the PGM control lock position menu, press 4 for PRINT OPTION Programming. The
SYSTEM OPTION pg 1 screen displays:
PRINT OPTION
pg 1
PRINT MEDIA TOTALS
ON CLERK REPORT
NÅ
PRINT TAX SYMBOL
Y
PRINT VOID MODE AND RETURN
ON REPORT
Y
PRINT AUDACTION ON REPORT
N
2. To browse through the options:
•
Press ENTER key to move “Å” symbol option by option, or
•
press PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN for fast browsing page by page.
3. When reaching the option you want to modify,
•
For numeric programming options, enter the number through numeric pad,
•
For Yes/No programming options, press YES/NO key to toggle between Y and N
PRINT OPTION
pg 1
PRINT MEDIA TOTALS
ON CLERK REPORT
NÅ
PRINT TAX SYMBOL
Y
PRINT VOID MODE AND RETURN
ON REPORT
Y
PRINT AUDACTION ON REPORT
N
PRINT OPTION
SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON
FINANCIAL REPORT
SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON
CLERK REPORT
PRINT CLERK REPORT AFTER
FINANCIAL REPORT
PRINT SALE ITEM NO.
pg 2
PRINT OPTION
pg 3
PRINT PLU WITH ZERO TOTALS
ON REPORT
NÅ
PRINT SUBTOTAL WHEN PRESSED
N
PRINT % OF SALES ON PLU REPORT
N
PRINT CONSECUTIVE NO.
Y
PRINT OPTION
PRINT DATE
PRINT TIME
PRINT MACHINE NO.
PRINT CLERK NAME
HOME CURRENCY SYMBOL IS
pg 4
180 • Program Mode Programming
PRINT Z COUNTER
YÅ
Y
N
N
$
YÅ
Y
Y
Y
Y
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
PRINT OPTION
pg 5
PRINT RECEIPT WHEN SIGN ON/OFF
NÅ
PRINT GRAND TOTAL
ON X REPORT
Y
ON Z REPORT
Y
PRINT PLU# ON EJ
PRINT OPTION
PRINT TAX AMOUNT
PRINT TAXABLE TOTAL
PRINT TAX % RATE
VAT BREAKDOWN
PRINT TRAIN MODE TITLE
IN TRAINING MODE
N
pg 7
PRINT
ON X
ON Z
PRINT
PRINT OPTION
pg 6
GROSS TOTAL
REPORT
YÅ
REPORT
Y
SUBTOTAL WITHOUT TAX
N
TAX AMOUNT IS
Y:COMBINE
N:ITEMIZE
N
PRINT OPTION
CURRENCY SYMBOL
CONV.#1
CONV.#2
CONV.#3
CONV.#4
E.J PORT (0-4)
REPORT PORT(0-4)
pg 8
PRINT OPTION
pg 9
PRINT KP ORDER # ON RECEIPT
YÅ
PRINT OPTION
COMBINE LIKE ITEMS ON KP
pg 10
NÅ
PRINT PRICE ON KP
SEND TO KP IN VOID MODE
CONSOLIDATION ON CHECK TRACK
YÅ
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
SEND TO KP IN TRAIN MODE
PRINT OPTION
PRINT PREAMBLE
PRINT POSTAMBLE
MESSAGE ON RECEIPT
PRINT PREAMBLE
PRINT POSTAMBLE
ON THE GUEST CHECK
N
pg 11
YÅ
Y
N
N
VOLUME UNIT
0:GAL
1:LTR
▪
▪
▪
▪
Å
0
0
N
1
PRINT OPTION
pg 12
PRINT ON FINANCIAL REPORT
AVG ITEM/CUST
YÅ
AVG $/CUST
Y
BUFFER RECEIPT ISSUE WHEN
RECEIPT IS ON
Y
PRIORITY PRINT BY GROUP
ON KP/KV
N
PRINT OPTION
pg 13
GRAND TOTAL IS
NÅ
Y: NET
N: GROSS
PRINT E.J FROM
N
Y: OLDEST N:NEWEST
PRINT JOURNAL IS SMALL
N
SEND ORDER TO KP AT SUBTOTAL N
N
PRINT PLU# ON REPORT
PRINT OPTION
PRINT PLU# ON RECEIPT
PRE-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
POST-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
ON RECEIPT
PRE-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
POST-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
ON THE GUEST CHECK
PRINT OPTION
pg 15
PRE-FEED LINE# RECEIPT (0-5) 0Å
POST-FEED LINE# RECEIPT (0-5) 2
PRINT IN HIGH DENSITY
N
PRINT DATE ON SERVICE
Y
ON HARD CHECK
PRINT TAX CHARGED
Y
FOR LAST SERVICED ITEMS
PRINT OPTION
pg 16
NOT PRINT WHEN POLLING REPORT NÅ
PRINT WHEN PROGRAM UP/DOWN
N
ADJUST CUT (0-70)
40
PRINT LAST LINE OF EJ
0
DISABLE LINE FIND
N
ON SLIP PRINTER
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
pg 14
NÅ
Y
N
N
N
Program Mode Programming • 181
PRINT OPTION
PRINT CHECK# LINE ON
GUEST CHECK
PRINT ROUND AMT ON KP
pg 17
YÅ
N
Print Options - Reference Information
Page
1
2
3
Field
Value
Description
PRINT MEDIA TOTALS ON
CLERK REPORT
Y or N
Select Y to print media totals for each clerk, thus allowing
clerk cash drawer accountability.
PRINT TAX SYMBOL
Y or N
Select N to remove the tax symbol (i.e."T1") from the print
and display.
PRINT VD MODE AND
RETURN ON REPORT
Y or N
Select N to remove the VOID MODE and RETURN totals
from the financial and clerk reports.
PRINT AUDACTION ON
REPORT
Y or N
Select N to remove the AUDACTION total from the
financial and clerk reports.
SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON
FINANCIAL REPORT
Y or N
By default, the register prints only totals with information
other than zero. Select N, if you wish to print the contents of
all the financial report totals, even if the total is zero.
SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON
CLERK REPORT
Y or N
By default, the register prints only totals with information
other than zero. Select N, if you wish to print the contents of
all the clerk report totals, even if the total is zero.
PRINT CLERK REPORT
AFTER FINANCIAL
REPORT
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to include the clerk report information
at the end of the financial report.
PRINT SALE ITEM NO.
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to print sale item no.
PRINT PLU WITH ZERO
TOTALS ON REPORT
Y or N
By default, the register prints only totals with information
other than zero. Select Y, if you wish to print the contents of
all the PLUs, even if the total is zero.
PRINT SUBTOTAL WHEN
PRESSED
Y or N
Select Y if you wish the subtotal to print when the SBTL key
is pressed.
PRINT % OF SALES ON
PLU REPORT
Y or N
The register can calculate the percentage of sales represented
by each PLU. Select Y if you wish to print this percentage on
the PLU report. Note: the percentage will print only on
standalone register reports, not IRC report.
PRINT CONS. NO.
Y or N
The consecutive number (also referred to as the transaction
counter, or receipt counter) normally prints on each receipt.
Select N if you do not wish to print this counter.
182 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Page
4
5
6
7
Field
Value
Description
PRINT DATE
Y or N
Select N if you wish to stop printing the date.
PRINT TIME
Y or N
Select N if you wish to stop printing the time.
PRINT MACHINE NO.
Y or N
If you are using more than one cash register, you can identify
the specific register where a receipt was printed. Enter Y if
you wish to print the register number on the receipt.
PRINT CLERK NAME
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the clerk name
on the receipt.
HOME CURRENCY
SYMBOL IS
$
See following Currency Symbol Programming section for
detail.
PRINT Z COUNTER
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the reset
counter on Z reports.
PRINT RECEIPT WHEN
SIGN ON/OFF
Y or N
Select N if you do not wish to print a receipt when signing
on or off a clerk.
PRINT GRAND TOTAL
ON X REPORT
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the grand total
on the financial report reading (X report).
ON Z REPORT
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the grand total
on the financial report resetting (Z report).
PRINT PLU# ON EJ
Y or N
Determines whether PLU# is displayed on the EJ.
PRINT GROSS TOTAL ON X Y or N
REPORT
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the gross sales
total on the financial report reading (X report).
PRINT GROSS TOTAL ON Z Y or N
REPORT
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the gross sales
total on the financial report resetting (Z report).
PRINT SUBTOTAL W/O TAX Y or N
If you hand write credit card slips, you may find it useful to
print the merchandise subtotal. Select Y if you wish to print
the subtotal without tax on the receipt.
TAX AMOUNT IS
Y:COMBINE
N:ITEMIZE
Y or N
Select Y if you are calculating and reporting more that one
sales tax rate separately and you wish to print just the total of
multiple taxes rather than itemize each tax on the receipt.
PRINT TAX AMOUNT
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to delete the printing of the tax amount
on the receipt.
PRINT TAXABLE TOTAL
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to print the total of merchandise eligible
for each tax on the receipt.
PRINT TAX % RATE
Y or N
If you are calculating a tax percentage (add-on or VAT),
select Y if you wish to print the tax rate on each receipt.
VAT BREAKDOWN
Y or N
If Y, a breakdown of the VAT eligible sale will print, the net
amount and the VAT amount.
PRINT TRAIN MODE TITLE
IN TRAINING MODE
Y or N
When in training mode, the message "TRAIN MODE"
normally prints on each receipt. Select N if you wish to
delete this message.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 183
Page
8
9
10
11
Field
Value
Description
CURRENCY SYMBOL
CONV.#1
•
See following Currency Symbol Programming section for
detail.
CONV.#2
•
CONV.#3
•
CONV.#4
•
E.J PORT (0-4)
0
Choose a port for a remote printer or the CCTV system to
print EJ reports.
REPORT PORT (0-4)
0
Choose a port for a remote printer to print Z reports.
PRINT KP ORDER # ON
RECEIPT
Y or N
A system wide counter creates an order number for each
kitchen requisition. Choose Y or N to print the order number
on the kitchen Printer or kitchen printer requisition.
PRINT PRICE ON KP
Y or N
You can choose to print the item with or without its' price on
the kitchen Printer or kitchen printer requisition.
SEND TO KP IN
VOID MODE
Y or N
You can choose whether to print or not print registrations in
void mode on the kitchen Printer or kitchen printer
requisition.
SEND TO KP IN
TRAIN MODE
Y or N
You can choose whether to print or not print registrations in
training mode on the kitchen Printer or kitchen printer
requisition.
COMBINE LIKE ITEMS ON
KP
Y or N
If two of the same items are registered in the same
transaction, you can choose the format on the kitchen
requisition. For example, if Y, "2 HAMBURGERS; if N, "1
HAMBURGER" and "1 HAMBURGER".
CONSOLIDATION ON
CHECK TRACK
Y or N
Consolidation of like items can be selected for soft guest
check printing. For example, if three rounds of drinks are
served, the check will print "3 TAP BEER" rather than "1
TAP BEER" three times.
VOLUME UNIT
0:GAL
1:LTR
1
If gallonage is selected in PLU programming, choose gallons
or liters here.
PRINT PREAMBLE MESG
ON RECEIPT
Y or N
Choose whether to print the PREAMBLE on the receipt.
PRINT POSTAMBLE MESG
ON RECEIPT
Y or N
Choose whether to print the POSTAMBLE on the receipt.
PRINT PREAMBLE ON THE
GUEST CHECK
Y or N
Choose whether to print the PREAMBLE on the guest
check.
PRINT POSTAMBLE ON
THE GUEST CHECK
Y or N
Choose whether to print the POSTAMBLE on the guest
check.
184 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Page
12
13
14
15
Field
Value
Description
PRINT ON FIN RPT - AVG
ITEM/CUST
Y or N
Choose whether to print the average items per customer
(PLU sales counter/Net sales counter).
PRINT ON FIN RPT - AVG
$/CUST
Y or N
Choose whether to print the average sales per customer (Net
Sales/Net Sales counter).
BUFFER RECEIPT ISSUE
WHEN REC IN ON
Y or N
Determine whether you can issue a second receipt for the
same transaction with the CASH key
PRIORITY PRINT BY
GROUP ON KP/KV
Y or N
If Y, the order in which items appear on a kitchen requisition
is determined by the group to which the item is assigned, i.e.
items reported to group 1 will print before items reported to
group 2.
GRAND TOTAL IS
Y:NET
N:GROSS
Y or N
Choose Y if you wish the grand total to accumulate daily net
sales totals. Choose N if you wish the grand total to
accumulate daily gross sales totals.
PRINT E.J FROM
Y:OLDEST
N:NEWEST
Y or N
Y: Prints electronic journal from lowest consecutive number
to highest.
PRINT JOURNAL IS SMALL
Y or N
Choose Y to print Journal Printer in small size font. (2Station)
SEND ORDER TO KP AT
SUBTOTAL
Y or N
Choose Y to print orders on the KP when the SUBTOTAL
key is pressed. Choose N to print orders on the KP when the
order is finalized.
PRINT PLU # ON RECEIPT
Y or N
If Y, the PLU number and descriptor will print. If N, only the
PLU number will print.
PRINT PLU # ON REPORT
Y or N
Determines whether PLU# is displayed on the report.
PRE-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
Y or N
Choose Y to print Preamble-Image Logo on receipt
N: Prints electronic journal from highest consecutive number
to lowest.
POST-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO Y or N
ON RECEIPT
Y or N
PRE-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
Choose Y to print Postamble- Image Logo on receipt
POST-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO Y or N
ON GUEST CHECK
PRE-FEED LINE# RECEIPT 0
(0 - 5)
2
POST-FEED LINE#
RECEIPT (0 - 5)
Y or N
PRINT IN HIGH DENSITY
Choose Y to print Postamble- Image Logo on Guest Check
PRINT DATE ON SERVICE
ON HARD CHECK
Y or N
If Y, the posting date will print at every posting on the hard
check.
PRINT TAX CHARGED FOR
LAST SERVICED ITEMS
Y or N
If Y, the tax printed on the check/receipt is only for the items
since the last service. If N, the tax is for all items on check.
Necessary flag for charge posting.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Choose Y to print Preamble-Image Logo on Guest Check.
Enter the # which you want to feed line at the start of receipt.
Enter the # which you want to feed line at the end of receipt.
Program Mode Programming • 185
Page
16
17
Field
Value
Description
NOT PRINT WHEN
POLLING REPORTS
Y or N
Choose N if you would like to suppress register printing
when reports are polled.
PRINT WHEN PROGRAM
UP/DOWN
Y or N
Choose Y if you would like to suppress register printing
when program are up/download.
ADJUST CUT (0-70)
40
PRINT LAST LINE OF EJ
(0 - 99)
0
Enter the number for the number of lines of Electronic
Journal you want to print in REG-Mode, Quick EJ
LookUp.
DISABLE LINE FIND ON
SLIP PRINTER
Y or N
Choose Y if you want to disable/override Line Find feature
on a slip printer, or when using a POS printer.
PRINT CHECK# LINE ON
GUEST CHECK
Y or N
PRINT ROUND AMT ON KP
Y or N
186 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Currency Symbol Programming
1. If you want to program currency symbol or special character, on PGM-Mode, 4.PRINT
OPTION Æ pg4 Æ HOME CURRENCY SYMBOL and pg8 Æ CURRENCY SYMBOL
1 - 4, press ENTER (CASH) button to move “Å” to the currency symbol you want to
program.
PRINT OPTION
PRINT DATE
PRINT TIME
PRINT MACHINE NO.
PRINT CLERK NAME
HOME CURRENCY SYMBOL IS
pg 4
$
PRINT Z COUNTER
YÅ
Y
Y
Y
Y
PRINT OPTION
CURRENCY SYMBOL
CONV.#1
CONV.#2
CONV.#3
CONV.#4
E.J PORT (0-4)
REPORT PORT(0-4)
pg 8
▪
▪
▪
▪
Å
0
0
2. Press 00 button to view the first page of OTHER ALPHA MENU to see currency symbols.
OTHER ALPHA MENU
1. Ç 7. å 13. î
2. ü 8. ç 14. ì
3. é 9. ê 15. Ä
4. â 10. ë 16. Å
5. ä 11. è 17. É
6. à 12. ï 18. æ
È
0Å
3. Press PAGE DOWN to view the second page of OTHER ALPHA MENU to see more
currency symbols.
OTHER ALPHA MENU
19. Æ 24. ù 29. £
20. ô 25. ÿ 30. ¥
21. ö 26. Ö 31. Ñ
22. ò 27. Ü 32. Å
23. û 28. ¢ 33. €
Ç
0Å
4. Select the digit that represents the special character and ENTER (CASH) key.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 187
Clerk Programming
1. At the PGM control lock position menu, press 6 for CLERK. The CLERK NUMBER
screen displays:
CLERK NUMBER
CLERK NO? (1-10)
0Å
2. Enter the clerk number 1-99, (the actual number of clerks is set in memory allocation). Press
the ENTER (CASH) key to display the CLERK # programming screen:
CLERK NUMBER
NAME : CLERK 1
PASSWORD
DRAWER ASSIGN(0-2)
1
1
Å
3. To browse through the options, press ENTER key to move “Å” symbol option by option.
4. When reaching the option you want to modify,
•
For descriptor programming options, the keyboard will change to Program Overlay,
enter the character you need up to 12 characters. Or enter Descriptor Code to make up the
description you want.
NOTE: System Option is default to Program Overlay. Please check setting on page 17
•
For numeric programming options, enter the number through numeric pad,
5. Refer to " Clerk Programming - Reference Information" to make choices or changes on the
screens provided.
6. After making new entries or changes for a function key, press the ESC (CLEAR) key to
finalise and return to the PROGRAM MODE screen.
188 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Clerk Programming - Reference Information
Page
Field
Value
Description
NAME
Alpha
numeric up
to 12
character
You can program a descriptor for each clerk. The name you
program will print on the receipt in place of the default
CLERK #1-99. Type the descriptor using the Program
Overlay. The overlay is automatically activated when the
cursor is pointing at the DESC field.
PASSWORD
Up to 9
digit
number
If you are using the code entry clerk system, the number you
set here is the number you must use to sign on or clock
in/out. This field - depends on the setting in the System
Option - can be used for MCR Card number (first 9 digit) or
Dallas Key Code. When both turned on, MCR Code has
higher priority.
DRAWER (0 - 2)
1
Enter 0 to allow check track operations only. (No cash sales.)
Enter 1 or 2 (with the multiple drawer option) to select which
drawer the clerk will open.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 189
Function Key Programming
This Function Key Programming allows to program function key name, and status available. A
function key can not be programmed unless has been assigned on the real keyboard or on one of the
two Func Lookup (Function Key Look Up) keys.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 5 for FUNCTION KEY. The FUNCTION
KEY PROGRAM screen displays:
FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
PUSH FUNCTION KEY TO
BE PROGRAMMED
2. Select the function key you want to program,
•
Press the function key on the keyboard,
or
•
When the function key you want to program locates on one of the Func Lookup keys,
press the Func Lookup key, press 1 to select 1.STATUS PROGRAM, then press the
number on the numeric pad for the function key you want to program.
FUNC #1 PROGRAM
0.MENU ASSIGNMENT
1.STATUS PROGRAM
1.CANCEL
2.MDSE RETURN
3.RA1
4.PO1
5.TIP
6.TAXEXMT
7.CONV1
8.TIME IN/OUT
3. To browse through the options, press ENTER key to move “Å” symbol option by option.
4. When reaching the option you want to modify,
•
For descriptor programming options, the keyboard will change to Program Overlay,
enter the character you need up to 12 characters. Or enter Descriptor Code to make up the
description you want.
NOTE: System Option is default to Program Overlay. Please check setting on page 17
•
For numeric programming options, enter the number through numeric pad,
•
For Yes/No programming options, press YES/NO key to toggle between Y and N
190 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
NON ADD # / NO SALE
1. Press the #/NS key to view the #/NS function key options:
#/NS KEY PROGRAMMING
DESC1: NOSALE
DESC2: NON ADD #
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
INHIBIT NO SALE
AFTER NON-ADD #
PRINT NON-ADD# ON GUEST CHECK
È
Å
N
N
N
N
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page of
#/NS function key options:
#/NS KEY PROGRAMMING
ENFORCE# ENTRY AT
START OF SALE
PRINT ON N/S
NON-ADD# PROHIBIT
COMP. NON-ADD# MUST
MATCH MAX DIGIT
MAX DIGIT(0-8)
Ç
NÅ
Y
N
N
0
3. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 191
NON ADD # / NO SALE Key Function Options
Page
1
2
Field
Value
DESC1
Alpha
You can program a descriptor for the no sale function. The
numeric up default descriptor is NOSALE.
to 12
character
DESC2
Alpha
You can program a descriptor for the non add # function.
numeric up The default descriptor is NON ADD #.
to 12
character
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y to allow operation only in manager operation mode.
INHIBIT NO SALE AFTER
NON-ADD #
Y or N
Select Y if you want disable the NO SALE function after a
non-add number is entered.
PRINT NON-ADD# ON
HARD CHECK
Y or N
ENFORCE # ENTRY AT
START OF SALE
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to enforce the entry of a non-add
number at the beginning of each transaction. (For example,
to track the number of customers in each sale, or to identify a
customer number with each sale.)
PRINT ON N/S
Y or N
Select N to stop printing when a NO SALE is performed.
NON-ADD # PROHIBIT
Y or N
Select Y to disable the non-add # function.
COMP NON-ADD # MUST
MATCH MAX DIGIT
Y or N
Select Y if you wish all non-add number entries to have the
exact number of digits selected in the MAX DIGIT flag
below.
MAX DIGIT (0-8)
0
Enter the maximum number of digits for non-add number
entry. Zero (0) means no limit.
192 • Program Mode Programming
Description
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
%1~5
1. Press the one of the % keys to view the appropriate % function key options:
%1 PROGRAMMING
DESC : % 1
AMOUNT:Y %:N
RATE
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
OPEN:Y PRESET:N
SALE:Y
ITEM:N
È
N
0.000
N
N
N
N
Å
The % keys are default to RATE, when AMOUNT is selected, it becomes
%1 PROGRAMMING
DESC : % 1
AMOUNT:Y %:N
AMOUNT
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
OPEN:Y PRESET:N
SALE:Y
ITEM:N
È
Y
0.00
N
N
N
N
Å
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page of
% function key options:
%1 PROGRAMMING
OVERRIDEABLE
POS.:Y NEG.:N
TAXable BY TAX1
TAXable BY TAX2
TAXable BY TAX3
TAXable BY TAX4
F/S ELIGIBLE
↕
NÅ
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
NOTE: Modified at FlashROM v1.011. For FlashROM v1.010 and earlier was set to N.
3. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the next page of
% function key options:
%1 PROGRAMMING
ALLOW ONLY ONE TIME
SUBTOTAL ENTRY
ALLOW MULTIPLE AMOUNT
DISCOUNT(COUPON)
WITHOUT SUBTOTAL
PRESET OVERRIDE IN
MGR ONLY
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
↕
NÅ
N
N
Program Mode Programming • 193
4. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the last page of %
function key options:
%1 PROGRAMMING
COMPULSORY VALID
NON-ADD# COMP.
Ç
NÅ
N
5. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
% 1 ~ 5 Key Function Options
Page
Field
Entry
1
DESC
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptors are
Alpha
numeric up % 1 ~ % 5.
to 12
character
AMOUNT:Y %:N
Y or N
Select Y if you wish this key to apply an amount (as in a
coupon). Select N if you wish this key to apply a percentage
(as in a discount or surcharge).
RATE / AMOUNT
5 digit
If the function is an amount, enter an amount from 0 to
999.99. If not zero, the amount will be the preset coupon
amount. If the function is a percentage, enter a percentage
from 0 to 99.999%. If not zero, the percentage will be the
preset percentage
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
OPEN:Y PRESET:N
Y or N
Select Y if you with the amount or percentage to be entered
by the operator; select N if you with the amount or
percentage to be preset.
SALE:Y ITEM:N
Y or N
Select Y if you wish the amount or percentage to apply to the
sale total. Select N if you wish the amount or percentage to
apply to an item.
OVERRIDEABLE
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to enter a percentage or amount to
override the preset percentage or amount set in the RATE
field.
POS.:Y NEG.:N
Y or N
Select Y if you wish the amount or percentage to add to the
sale total. Select N if you wish the amount or percentage to
subtract from the sale.
2
194 • Program Mode Programming
Description
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Page
3
4
Field
Entry
Description
TAXable BY TAX1
Y or N
TAXable BY TAX2
Y or N
TAXable BY TAX3
Y or N
Select N to tax any taxable items before the discount or
surcharge is applied (tax the gross amount). Select Y to tax
any taxable items after the discount or surcharge is applied
(tax the net amount).
TAXable BY TAX4
Y or N
F/S ELIGIBLE
Y or N
Select Y to reduce (increase) the food stamp subtotal by the
amount of % entry.
ALLOW ONLY ONE TIME
SUBTOTAL ENTRY
Y or N
If Y, you can enter only a single coupon and you must press
the SBTL key before the coupon entry.
ALLOW MULTIPLE
AMOUNT DISCOUNT
(COUPON) WITHOUT
SUBTOTAL
Y or N
If you set a % key to be used for vendor coupons (i.e.
amount, negative and sale status) then choose Y to allow the
function to be operated multiple times, without requiring the
SBTL key to be pressed prior to the coupon entry.
PRESET OVERRIDE IN
MGR ONLY
Y or N
Select Y to allow preset override only in manager operation
mode.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
NON-ADD# COMP.
Y or N
Use this to enforce the entry of a non-add number before
apply % function. See Program Mode Æ 5.FUNCTION
KEYS Æ #/NS for detail.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
NOTE: Modified at FlashROM v1.011. For FlashROM
v1.010 and earlier was set to N.
Program Mode Programming • 195
ADD CHECK (Tray Total)
1. Press the ADD CHECK key to view the ADD CHECK function key options:
ADD CHECK PROGRAMMING
DESC : ADDCHK
KEY DISABLE
COMPULSORY BEFORE TENDERING
CONSECUTIVE NUMBER ADVANCED
RECEIPT CONDENCING
È
N
Å
N
Y
N
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of add check function key options:
ADD CHECK PROGRAMMING
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
COMPULSORY VALID
Ç
NÅ
N
N
N
N
3. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
196 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
ADD CHECK Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
1
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up ADDCHK.
to 12
character
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
COMPULSORY BEFORE
TENDERING
Y or N
Select Y if you want to force the operator to use the ADD
CHECK function before tendering.
CONSECUTIVE NUMBER
ADVANCED
Y or N
Select Y if you want to advance the consecutive number each
time the ADD CHECK key is used.
RCPT CONDENCING
Y or N
Select Y if you want to print check normally with receipt
header/footer and cut separately when Auto Cutter is used,
when ADD CHECK key is used.
EXEMPT TAX 1
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 2
Y or N
Select Y to exempt the appropriate tax automatically when
finalized with this key.
EXEMPT TAX 3
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 4
Y or N
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
2
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Description
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
Program Mode Programming • 197
CANCEL
1. Press the CANCEL key to view the CANCEL function key options:
CANCEL KEY PROGRAMMING
Å
DESC : CANCEL
KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
COMPULSORY VALIDATION
N
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
CANCEL Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up CANCEL.
to 12
character
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
198 • Program Mode Programming
Description
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
CASH
1. Press the CASH key to view the CASH function key options:
CASH KEY PROGRAMMING
È
DESC : CASH
Å
HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
AMOUNT TEND COMPULSORY
N
OVER/UNDER TENDER
IN MGR CONTROL
N
N
DISABLE UNDER TENDER
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of cash function key options:
CASH KEY PROGRAMMING
DOES DRAWER OPEN
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
COMPULSORY VALIDATION
Ç
YÅ
N
N
N
N
N
3. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 199
CASH Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
1
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up CASH.
to 12
character
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be tendered. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
AMOUNT TEND COMP.
Y or N
Select Y if you want to force the operator to enter the
tendered amount and let the register calculate the change.
OVER/UNDER TENDER IN
MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender more than
the amount of the sale and issue change. When selected, over
and under tendering is allowed only in the X control lock
position.
DISABLE UNDER TEND.
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender less than
the amount of the sale.
DOES DRAWER OPEN
Y or N
Select N if you do not want the drawer to opened with this
key.
EXEMPT TAX 1
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 2
Y or N
Select Y to exempt the appropriate tax automatically when
finalized with this key.
EXEMPT TAX 3
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 4
Y or N
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
2
200 • Program Mode Programming
Description
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
CHARGE 1 ~ 8
1. Press one of the CHARGE key to view the appropriate CHARGE function key options:
CHARGE 1 PROGRAMMING
È
DESC : CHARGE1
Å
KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
AMOUNT TEND COMPULSORY
N
OVER/UNDER TENDER
IN MGR CONTROL
N
N
DISABLE UNDER TENDER
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of charge function key options:
CHARGE 1 PROGRAMMING
DOES DRAWER OPEN
ALLOW OVER TENDER
NON-ADD # COMPULSORY
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
↕
YÅ
N
N
N
N
N
N
3. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the last page of
charge function key options:
CHARGE 1 PROGRAMMING
COMPULSORY VALIDATION
SEND TO EFT
EFT OUTPUT
COM PORT#(0-4)
Ç
NÅ
N
0
4. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 201
CHARGE 1 ~ 8 Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
1
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptors are
numeric up CHARGE1 ~ CHARGE8.
to 12
character
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be tendered. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
AMOUNT TEND COMP.
Y or N
Select Y if you want to force the operator to enter the
tendered amount and let the register calculate the change.
OVER/UNDER TENDER IN
MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender more than
the amount of the sale and issue change. When selected, over
tendering is allowed only in the X control lock position.
DISABLE UNDER TEND.
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender less than
the amount of the sale.
DOES DRAWER OPEN
Y or N
Select N if you do not want the drawer to opened with this
key.
ALLOW OVER TEND.
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to allow tender greater than the amount
of the sale.
NON-ADD # COMP.
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to enforce the entry of a non-add
number prior to tendering.
EXEMPT TAX 1
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 2
Y or N
Select Y to exempt the appropriate tax automatically when
finalized with this key.
EXEMPT TAX 3
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 4
Y or N
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
SEND TO EFT
Y or N
Set to Y if connected to a Lan Tran credit authorization
terminal.
EFT OUTPUT COM PORT#
(0-4)
0
Select the port (1,2,3 or 4) where the EFT is attached.
2
3
202 • Program Mode Programming
Description
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
CHECK (Cheque) CASHING - CHKCASH
1. Press the CHECK CASHING key to view the CHECK CASHING function key options:
CHECK CASH PROGRAMMING
Å
DESC : CHKCASH
KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
COMPULSORY VALIDATION
N
COMPULSORY CHECK ENDORSEMENT N
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
CHECK (Cheque) CASHING Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up CHKCASH.
to 12
character
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
COMPULSORY CHECK
ENDORSEMENT
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce check endorsement if an optional
printer with endorsement capability is connected to an RS232C port.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Description
Program Mode Programming • 203
CHECK (Cheque) ENDORSEMENT - CHKENDOR
1. Press the CHECK ENDORSEMENT key to view the CHECK ENDORSEMENT function
key options:
CHECK ENDORSEMENT
DESC : CHKENDOR
KEY DISABLE
PRINT CHECK AMT IN
THE ENDORSEMENT
N
Å
N
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
CHECK (Cheque) ENDORSEMENT Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up CHKENDOR
to 12
character
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
PRINT CHECK AMT IN THE
ENDORSEMENT
Y or N
Choose Y to print the amount of the check as well as the
endorsement message. Choose N to print only the
endorsement message.
204 • Program Mode Programming
Description
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
CHECK (Cheque)
1. Press the CHECK key to view the CHECK function key options:
CHECK KEY PROGRAMMING
È
DESC : CHECK
Å
HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
AMOUNT TEND COMPULSORY
N
OVER/UNDER TENDER
IN MGR CONTROL
N
N
DISABLE UNDER TENDER
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of check function key options:
CHECK KEY PROGRAMMING
DOES DRAWER OPEN
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
COMPULSORY CHECK ENDORSEMENT
↕
YÅ
N
N
N
N
N
3. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the third page of
check function key options:
CHARGE 1 PROGRAMMING
COMPULSORY VALID
Ç
NÅ
4. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 205
CHECK (Cheque) Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
1
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up CHECK.
to 12
character
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be tendered. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
AMOUNT TEND COMP.
Y or N
Select Y if you want to force the operator to enter the
tendered amount and let the register calculate the change.
OVER/UNDER TENDER IN
MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender more than
the amount of the sale and issue change. When selected, over
tendering is allowed only in the X control lock position.
DISABLE UNDER TEND.
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender less than
the amount of the sale.
DOES DRAWER OPEN
Y or N
Select N if you do not want the drawer to open with this key.
EXEMPT TAX 1
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 2
Y or N
Select Y to exempt the appropriate tax automatically when
finalized with this key.
EXEMPT TAX 3
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 4
Y or N
COMPULSORY CHECK
ENDORSEMENT
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce check endorsement if an optional
printer with endorsement capability is connected to an RS232C port.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
2
3
206 • Program Mode Programming
Description
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
CHECK # (for Account Management)
1. Press the CHECK TRACK # key to view the CHECK TRACK function key options:
CHECK TRACK PROGRAMMING
DESC : CHECK #
KEY DISABLE
COMPULSORY FOR ALL
SALES
OPENING CLERK HAS
EXCLUSIVE ACCESS
PRINT ON RECEIPT
È
N
Å
N
N
Y
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of check track function key options:
CHECK TRACK PROGRAMMING
PRINT ON REMOTE
ALLOW ONLY ONE CHECK
PER TABLE
CHECK # ASSIGNED BY
REGISTER
DRIVE THRU FEATURE
ENABLED
↕
YÅ
N
N
N
3. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of check track function key options:
CHECK TRACK PROGRAMMING
LENGTH OF CHECK
(0-9, 0 : NO LIMIT)
SCAN CHECK #
SHARE CHECK FILE
PRINT CHECK TO
THE SERVER
THE SATELLITE
Ç
0Å
N
N
N
N
4. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 207
CHECK # Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
1
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up CHECK #.
to 12
NOTE: You may wish to use TABLE # as the description.
character
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
COMPULSORY FOR ALL
SALES
Y or N
Select Y you must begin a new, or recall an existing tracking
number before registering items.
OPENING CLERK HAS
EXCLUSIVE ACCESS
Y or N
If Y, the clerk that begins a tracking number is the only clerk
who can recall a check. If N, any clerk can recall any check.
PRINT ON RECEIPT
Y or N
If N, the check track number and balance will not print on
the receipt.
PRINT ON REMOTE
Y or N
If N, the check track number and balance will not print on
the remote.
ALLOW ONLY ONE CHK
PER TABLE
Y or N
If Y, you can begin only one check with the same table #.
CHECK # ASSIGNED BY
REGISTER
Y or N
If Y, press the CHECK. # key to automatically assign the
next sequential check. Check numbers will begin with #1
and continue until the open check report is reset, at which
point the check number will be reset and start at #1 again.
DRIVE THRU FEATURE
ENABLED
Y or N
If you wish to implement a drive thru recall key, this setting
changes the function of the PBAL key to that of a recall key.
Press the PBAL key directly to automatically recall the open
check with the lowest tracking number
LENGTH OF CHECK
(0-9, 0 : NO LIMIT)
0
Set the length of check in number of digits. For example, if
4, then checks must be used in the range from 1000, to 9999.
This setting applies only to check numbers input by the
operator, not to check numbers assigned by the register.
SCAN CHECK #
Y or N
Choose Y to allow the check number to be input by a
scanner (must be nine digits or less).
SHARE CHECK FILE
Y or N
Choose Y to allow share check file within IRC network. See
SM-Mode, 7.IRC OPTIONS for related settings.
PRINT CHECK TO THE
SERVER
Y or N
Choose Y to allow printing Guest Check to the Server
Register. See SM-Mode, 7.IRC OPTIONS for related
settings.
PRINT CHECK TO THE
SATELLITE
Y or N
Choose Y to allow printing Guest Check to the Satellite
Register. See SM-Mode, 7.IRC OPTIONS for related
settings.
2
3
208 • Program Mode Programming
Description
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
CURRENCY CONVERSION 1 ~ 4 - CONV 1 ~ 4
1. Press one of the CURRENCY CONVERSION keys to view the appropriate CURRENCY
CONVERSION function key options:
CONVERSION #1 PROGRAMMING
Å
DESC : CONV1
RATE
0
NUMBER OF DECIMAL
0
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
CURRENCY CONVERSION 1 ~ 4 Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
Description
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor for each foreign currency. The
numeric up default descriptors are CONV 1 ~ CONV 4.
to 12
character
RATE
5 digits
Enter the exchange rate of up to 5 digits (do not enter the
decimal point). See the examples on the next page.
NUMBER OF DEC. (0 - 6)
0
Enter a number from 0 to 6 to indicate the decimal position
of the exchange rate. Count the decimal position from the
right. See the examples below.
Currency Exchange Rate Programming Examples
NOTE: Foreign currency exchange rates can be stated as “foreign currency in home
currency”, or “home currency in foreign currency”. Use the rate stated in “home
currency in foreign currency” when you are programming this section.
The home currency is worth 1.92573 EURO (foreign currency).
RATE: 192573
NUMBER OF DEC.: 5
* You can EURO currency exchange rate program on CONV #1 only.
The home currency is worth 64.5863 foreign currency.
RATE: 645863
NUMBER OF DEC.: 4
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 209
EAT-IN - EATIN
TAKE OUT - TKOUT
DRIVE THROUGH - DVTHR
1. Press the EAT-IN, TAKE OUT, or DRIVE THRU key to view the appropriate function key
options:
DRIVE-THRU PROGRAMMING
DESC : DVTHR
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
COMPULSORY VALIDATION
N
N
N
N
N
Å
EAT-IN PROGRAMMING
DESC : EATIN
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
COMPULSORY VALIDATION
TAKE-OUT PROGRAMMING
DESC : TKOUT
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
COMPULSORY VALIDATION
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Å
Å
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
EAT-IN/TAKE OUT/DRIVE THROUGH Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptors are
numeric up EATIN, TKOUT and DVTHR.
to 12
character
EXEMPT TAX 1
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 2
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 3
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 4
Y or N
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
210 • Program Mode Programming
Description
If you wish to automatically exempt a tax for a particular
type of sale, select Y for the appropriate tax. For example, if
items are non-taxable for take out, but taxable for eat-in, set
this program to exempt tax on take out sales.
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
ERROR CORRECT - ERRCORR
1. Press the ERROR CORRECT key to view the ERROR CORRECT function key options:
ERR CORRECT PROGRAMMING
Å
DESC : ERRCORR
KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
ERROR CORRECT Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up ERRCORR.
to 12
character
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Description
Program Mode Programming • 211
FOOD STAMP SUBTOTAL - F/S SUB
1. Press the F/S SUB key to view the FOOD STAMP SUBTOTAL function key options:
FOOD SUBTOT PROGRAMMING
DESC : F/S SUB
KEY DISABLE
N
Å
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
FOOD STAMP SUBTOTAL Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up F/S SUB.
to 12
character
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
212 • Program Mode Programming
Description
Select Y to disable this function.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
FOOD STAMP TENDER - F/S TEND
1. Press the F/S TEND key to view the FOOD STAMP TENDER function key options:
FOOD STAMP PROGRAMMING
È
DESC : F/S TEND
Å
KEY HALO
0.00
EXEMPT TAX 1
N
EXEMPT TAX 2
N
EXEMPT TAX 3
N
EXEMPT TAX 4
N
ALL DECIMAL
N
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page of
food stamp tender function key options:
FOOD STAMP PROGRAMMING
CHANGE IS ISSUED IS CASH
DOES DRAWER OPEN
COMPULSORY VALIDATION
ALLOW OVER TENDER
Ç
NÅ
Y
N
N
3. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 213
FOOD STAMP TENDER Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
1
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up F/S TEND.
to 12
character
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
EXEMPT TAX 1
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 2
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 3
Y or N
If taxes are exempted automatically on food stamp sales (as
is most often the case) select Y for each tax that is actively
used and needs to be exempted.
EXEMPT TAX 4
Y or N
ALLOW DECIMAL
Y or N
If N, food stamp tender must be in whole dollar amounts, i.e.
$1, $5, or $10. If Y, the tender is allowed in any amount.
CHANGE IS ISSUED IN
CASH
Y or N
If Y, food stamp change less than $1 will be issued in cash.
DOES DRAWER OPEN
Y or N
Select N if you do not want the drawer to opened with this
key.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
ALLOW OVER TEND.
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to allow tender greater than the amount
of the sale.
2
214 • Program Mode Programming
Description
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
FUNCTION LOOK UP(FLU) #1 ~ 2 - FUNCLK1 ~ 2
Two function keys (FUNCTION LOOK 1and FUNCTION LOOK 2) are available to access up to
eight functions each. You can use function look up keys to locate functions that are necessary for
your application, but may not fit on the keyboard layout, or to locate functions that are used only
occasionally.
With this program, you can determine which functions are located on each function look up key, and
you can also access these functions for option programming.
Press the FUNCTION LOOK UP 1 or FUNCTION LOOK UP 2 key to view the appropriate
function program menu screen:
FUNC #1 PROGRAM
È
0.MENU ASSIGNMENT
1.STATUS PROGRAM
To Assign Different Function key into Function Lookup
1. Press 0 to select the menu assignment on the function look-up key, the FUNC. # MENU
ASSIGN screen displays:
FUNC #1 MENU ASSIGN.
PUSH MENU NUMBER TO
BE PROGRAMMED (1-8)
0Å
2. Enter the number of the menu position (there are eight functions listed on each function
look up menu) that you wish to edit, press ENTER (CASH).
FUNC #1 MENU ASSIGN.
MENU NUMBER :
CURRENT ASSIGNMENT
CANCEL
ENTER NEW FUNC. CODE,
PRESS CASH
1 0Å
3. Type the code for the function you wish to place on the function look up key menu, press
ENTER (CASH). See Function Key Code Table in S-Mode, Function Key
Assignment or press PAGE DOWN to view a list of functions and codes.
4. Go to step 1 above and continue to program menu numbers for the function look up key,
or press ESC (CLEAR) to return to the PROGRAM MODE menu.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 215
To Program Function key Status in Function Lookup
1. Press 1 to program the options for a function on the function look-up key, the function
key list of FUNCTION LOOKUP #1 key screen displays:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
CANCEL
MDSE RETURN
RA1
PO1
TIP
TAXEXMT
CONV1
TIME IN/OUT
2. Press the number represents the function key you want to modify. The function key status
screen will then displays.
3. If you are programming function key options, refer to each function separately in this
chapter to set function options.
4. Press ESC (CLEAR) to go back to FUNCTION LOOKUP #1 key list screen for
different function key, or press ESC (CLEAR) key a second time to return to the
PROGRAM MODE menu.
216 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
GUEST (for Account Management)
1. Press the GUEST key to view the GUEST function key options:
GUEST # PROGRAMMING
DESC : GUEST
COMPULSORY FOR
GUEST CHECK
COMPULSORY FOR ALL SALES
PRINT AT REMOTE PRINTER
Å
N
N
N
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
GUEST Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up GUEST.
to 12
character
COMPULSORY WHEN
GUEST CHECK
Y or N
Select Y to enforce an entry into the GUEST # key before a
tracking number can be accessed for the first time.
COMPULSORY FOR ALL
SALES
Y or N
Select Y to enforce an entry into the GUEST # key before an
item can be registered on any sale.
PRINT AT REMOTE
PRINTER
Y or N
Select N if you do not want GUEST # entry to print at the
kitchen printer if items from the same transaction are sent to
the KP.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Description
Program Mode Programming • 217
PRICE LEVEL 1 ~ 5 - LEVEL 1 ~ 5
1. Press the LEVEL key to view the PRICE LEVEL function key options:
LEVEL1 PROGRAMMING
DESC : LEVEL 1
KEY DISABLE
SEND DESCRIPTION TO KP
UNDER MGR CONTROL
SEND DESCRIPTION TO RECEIPT
SEND DESCRIPTION TO CHECK
N
N
N
N
N
Å
NOTE: Option added at FlashROM v1.011.
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
PRICE LEVEL 1 ~ 5 Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
Description
DESC
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
Alpha
numeric up LEVEL 1 ~ LEVEL 5.
to 12
character
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
NOTE: Option added at FlashROM v1.011.
SEND DESCRIPTION TO KP Y or N
Select Y if you wish function key description to print on the
kitchen printer.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
SEND DESCRIPTION TO
RECEIPT
Y or N
Select Y if you wish function key description to print on the
receipt printer.
NOTE: Option added at FlashROM v1.011.
SEND DESCRIPTION TO
CHECK
Y or N
Select Y if you wish function key description to print on the
(guest) check.
NOTE: Option added at FlashROM v1.011.
218 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
MACRO 1 ~ 10, 11 ~ 20
(Program Screen Added in FlashROM v1.011)
1. Press a MACRO key to view the MACRO function key options:
MACRO 1 PROGRAMMING
DESC : MACRO1
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
Å
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
MACRO 1 ~ 10, 11 ~ 20 Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
Description
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up MACRO1 ~ MACRO20.
to 12
character
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
NOTE: See Z / Report Reset Mode Æ 5.PLU LOOKUP PROGRAM for PLU LOOKUP PLU list
programming.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 219
MDSE RETURN
1. Press the MDSE RETURN key to view the MERCHANDISE RETURN function key
options:
RETURN KEY PROGRAMMING
Å
DESC : MDSE RETURN
KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
COMPULSORY VALIDATION
N
NOTE: Option added at FlashROM v1.011.
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
MDSE RETURN Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
Description
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up MDSE RETURN.
to 12
character
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
NOTE: Option added at FlashROM v1.011.
220 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
MODIFIER 1 ~ 5 - MOD1 ~ 5
1. Press one of the MODIFIER keys to view the appropriate MODIFIER function key options:
MOD 1 PROGRAMMING
DESC : MOD1
UNDER MGR CONTROL
AFFECT PLU #
PRINT ON CHECK
PRINT ON RECEIPT
AFFECT DIGIT 1-14
OF PLU#
È
N
N
N
N
Å
4
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of modifier function key options:
MOD 1 PROGRAMMING
VALUE OF AFFECTED DIGIT(0-9)
PRINT ON KP
Ç
1Å
N
NOTE: Options modified/added at FlashROM v1.011.
3. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
NOTE: For MOD (1 ~ 5) function keys, all 5 of them has been preset to following values. Modified
on FlashROM v1.011.
Modifier
1
2
3
4
5
Affect Digit
4(th)
4(th)
4(th)
4(th)
4(th)
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Values of Affect Digit
1
2
3
4
0
Program Mode Programming • 221
MODIFIER 1 ~ 5 Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
Description
1
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptors are
numeric up MOD1 ~ MOD5.
to 12
character
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
AFFECT PLU #
Y or N
Select Y, if you wish the modifier entry to modify the PLU
and cause a different item/price to be registered. Select N to
only add the modifier descriptor.
PRINT ON CHECK
Y or N
Select N to not print the modifier descriptor on the guest
check.
PRINT ON RECEIPT
Y or N
Select N to not print the modifier descriptor on the receipt.
AFFECT DIGIT 1-14
4
Preceding a PLU with a Size and/or Modifier key
manipulates the PLU code assigned to the PLU key, causing
a different PLU to be registered when the PLU key is
pressed. Enter the digit of the PLU number you wish to be
changed when using this key. (Digit #1 is the rightmost digit;
digit #14 is the leftmost digit.)
Use this feature, you can prefix a barcode (such as a drink)
here is sold by barcode take away - press MODIFIER then
scan the barcode.
2
VALUE OF AFFECTED
DIGIT (0-9)
1/2/3/4/0
Enter the value you wish to be added in the digit position
selected. For example, if you wish to affect PLU digit #4
with a value of 1, then pressing this modifier key prior to the
registration of PLU #17 will result in the registration of PLU
#1017.
PRINT ON KP
Y or N
Choose Y to allow to print to KP.
NOTE: Option added at FlashROM v1.011.
222 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Modifier Key Programming Example
Selling soft drinks in different sizes is an excellent modifier application. For example, a
restaurant sells Coke, Sprite and Root Beer in 3-sizes: small, medium & large.
If the PLU number assignment is:
PLU #1 =
Coke
PLU #2 =
Sprite
PLU #3 =
Root Beer
You may choose to modify the 4th digit of the PLU number with the digit 1 for small, 2 for
medium and 3 for large. (Always count right-to-left to determine the PLU digit#.)
When the 4th digit is modified to a value of 1, and the Small modifier key is pressed before
the Root Beer key, the registration of PLU #1003 results.
PLU digit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
3
New PLU #
To complete the application, set modifier programming options as shown:
Modifier Name
Affected Digit
(Program 90)
Value of Affected Digit
(Program 70, option N3)
Small
4
1
Medium
4
2
Large
4
3
You can program PLUs as follows:
PLU Number
Item
1001
Small Coke
1002
Small Sprite
1003
Small Root Beer
2001
Medium Coke
2002
Medium Sprite
2003
Medium Root Beer
3001
Large Coke
3002
Large Sprite
3003
Large Root Beer
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 223
PREVIOUS BALANCE - PBAL
1. Press the PBAL key to view the PREVIOUS BALANCE function key options:
PREVIOUS BALANCE PROGRAMMING
Å
DESC : PBAL
ENTER ANY TIME
N
REQUIRE AT START OF SALE
N
PRINT ON CHECK (SOFT & HARD) N
NOTE: Option added at FlashROM v1.011.
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
PREVIOUS BALANCE Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
Alpha
numeric up PBAL.
to 12
character
ENTER ANY TIME
Y or N
Select Y to allow the PBAL entry at any time. Select N to
allow a PBAL entry only at the start of a sale.
REQUIRE AT START OF
SALE
Y or N
Select Y to require an entry into the PBAL key at the start of
every transaction.
PRINT ON CHECK (SOFT &
HARD)
Y or N
224 • Program Mode Programming
Description
NOTE: Option added at FlashROM v1.011.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
PAID OUT 1 ~ 3 - PO1 ~ 3
1. Press one of the PAID OUT keys to view the PAID OUT function key options:
PO #1 KEY PROGRAMMING
Å
DESC : PO1
KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
COMPULSORY VALID
N
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
PAID OUT 1 ~ 3 Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptors are
numeric up PO 1 ~ PO 3.
to 12
character
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Description
Program Mode Programming • 225
PRINT CHECK - PRINT CHK (for Account Management
- Soft Check)
1. Press the PRINT CHECK key to view the PRINT CHECK function key options:
PRINT CHECK PROGRAMMING
DESC : PRINT CHK
CHECK PRINT
COM PORT #(0-4)
AUTO SERVICE CHECK
PRINT CHECK ON RECEIPT
SKIP PRINT OF CONSECUTIVE
NUMBER ON CHECK
Å
0
N
N
N
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
PRINT CHECK Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
Description
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up PRINT CHK.
to 12
character
CHECK PRINT COMM PORT 0
# (0-4)
Select the port (1,2,3 or 4) where the check print printer is
attached. If 0 is selected, the check will print on the receipt
printer.
AUTO SERVICE CHK
Y or N
Select Y if you want the Check Print function to
automatically service the check.
PRT CHECK ON RECP
Y or N
Select Y if you want the Check Print function to print on the
receipt printer.
SKIP PRT OF CONSEC# ON Y or N
CHECK
Select Y if you wish to delete the printing of the consecutive
# on the guest check.
226 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
PROMOTION - PROMO
1. Press the PROMO key to view the PROMOTION function key options:
PROMO PROGRAMMING
DESC : PROMO
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
TAXABLE BY TAX1
TAXABLE BY TAX2
TAXABLE BY TAX3
TAXABLE BY TAX4
N
N
N
N
N
N
Å
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
PROMO Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up PROMO.
to 12
character
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
TAXABLE BY TAX1
Y or N
TAXABLE BY TAX2
Y or N
TAXABLE BY TAX3
Y or N
If an item is taxable, and you wish to remove taxes and an
item's cost when using the PROMO key, set the taxable
status for the appropriate tax to Y.
TAXABLE BY TAX4
Y or N
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Description
Program Mode Programming • 227
RECEIVED ON ACCOUNT 1 ~ 3 - RA 1 ~ 3
1. Press one of the RECD ON ACCT keys to view the RECEIVED ON ACCOUNT function
key options:
RA #1 KEY PROGRAMMING
Å
DESC : RA1
KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
COMPULSORY VALID
N
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
RECEIVED ON ACCOUNT 1 ~ 3 Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptors are
numeric up RA1 ~ RA3.
to 12
character
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
228 • Program Mode Programming
Description
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
SCALE
1. Press the SCALE key to view the SCALE function key options:
SCALE KEY PROGRAMMING
DESC : SCALE
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
KEY IS MANUAL ENTRY
TARE-WEIGHT COMPULSORY
WEIGHT SYMBOL FOR MANUAL
(0:lb
1:kg)
È
N
N
N
N
1
Å
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of scale function key options:
SCALE KEY PROGRAMMING
ALLOW DOLLAR ENTRY W/O SCALE
ON SCALEABLE ITEM
Ç
NÅ
3. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
SCALE Function Options
Page
Field
Value
1
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up SCALE.
to 12
character
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
KEY IS MAN. ENTRY
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to scale key to enter a manual weight.
Select N if you wish to automatically recall the weight from
the attached scale.
TARE-WEIGHT COMP.
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to enforce the subtraction a
preprogrammed tare weight on the scale entry.
WEIGHT SYMBOL FOR
MAN (0:lb 1:kg)
1
Select 1 if you wish to use the weight symbol Kg (kilogram)
for weights entered manually.
ALLOW DOLLAR ENTRY
W/O SCALE ON
SCALEABLE ITEM
Y or N
If N, you must use the scale to register scaleable PLU items.
If Y, you can either register scaleable items by weight
extension, or by price entry.
2
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Description
Program Mode Programming • 229
SERVICE (New Balance for Account Management)
1. Press the SERVICE key to view the SERVICE function key options:
SERVICE KEY PROGRAMMING
DESC : SERVICE
NON-ADD # COMPULSORY
PRINT ON RECEIPT
NEGATIVE BALANCE
IN MGR CONTROL
CALCULATE TAX1
CALCULATE TAX2
È
N
Y
Å
N
Y
Y
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of service function key options:
SERVICE KEY PROGRAMMING
CALCULATE TAX4
CALCULATE TAX4
COMPULSORY VALID
HARD CHECK PRINTER
PORT(0-4)
Ç
YÅ
Y
N
0
3. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
230 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
SERVICE Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
1
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up SERVICE.
to 12
character
NON-ADD # COMP
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to force the entry of a non-add number
(i.e. a tax exempt #) before the key is used.
PRINT ON RECEIPT
Y or N
Select N to not print on the receipt.
NEGATIVE BALANCE IN
MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
CALCULATE TAX1
Y or N
CALCULATE TAX2
Y or N
Select Y to calculate and add the appropriate tax
automatically when finalized with this key.
CALCULATE TAX3
Y or N
CALCULATE TAX4
Y or N
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
HARD CHECK PRINTER
PORT (0-4)
0
If you are using a hard check system, enter the RS232C port
number (1,2,3 or 4) where the optional guest check printer is
attached.
2
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Description
Program Mode Programming • 231
SUBTOTAL
1. Press the SUBTOTAL key to view the SUBTOTAL function key options:
SUBTOTAL PROGRAMMING
DESC : SUBTOTAL
KEY DISABLE
N
Å
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
SUBTOTAL Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up SUBTOTAL.
to 12
character
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
232 • Program Mode Programming
Description
Select Y to disable this function.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
TABLE # - TABLE
1. Press the TABLE key to view the TABLE # function key options:
TABLE # PROGRAMMING
DESC : TABLE
ENFORCE ON CHECK TRACK
ENFORCE ON ALL SALES
PRINT AT REMOTE PRINTER
N
N
N
Å
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
TABLE Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up TABLE.
to 12
character
ENFORCE ON CHECK
TRACK
Y or N
If Y, you must enter the table number before opening a new
check track #.
ENFORCE ON ALL SALES
Y or N
If Y, you must enter the table number before beginning any
transaction.
PRINT AT REMOTE
PRINTER
Y or N
Choose Y to print the table number at the remote printer.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Description
Program Mode Programming • 233
TARE
1. Press the TARE key to view the TARE function key options:
TARE KEY PROGRAMMING
DESC : TARE
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
#5 IS MANUAL TARE
N
N
N
Å
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
TARE Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up TARE.
to 12
character
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
#5 IS MANUAL TARE
Y or N
Choose Y to use tare number five to manually enter a tare
weight.
234 • Program Mode Programming
Description
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
TAX EXEMPT - TAXEXMT
1. Press the TAX EXEMPT key to view the TAX EXEMPT function key options:
TAX EXEMPT PROGRAMMING
DESC : TAXEXMT
EXEMPT TAX 1
EXEMPT TAX 2
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
NON-ADD # COMPULSORY
COMPULSORY VALIDATION
N
N
N
N
N
N
Å
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
TAX EXEMPT Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
Description
DESC
Alpha
numeric
12
character
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
TAXEXMT.
EXEMPT TAX 1
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 2
Y or N
Select Y or N for each tax to determine which tax or taxes
are exempted when this key is used.
EXEMPT TAX 3
Y or N
EXEMPT TAX 4
Y or N
NON-ADD # COMP
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to force the entry of a non-add number
(i.e. a tax exempt #) before the key is used.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 235
TIME IN/OUT
1. Press the TIME IN/OUT key to view the TIME IN/OUT function key options:
TIME IN/OUT PROGRAMMING
DESC : TIME IN/OUT
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
COMPULSORY VALIDATION
N
N
N
Å
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
TIME IN/OUT Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up TIME IN/OUT.
to 12
character
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
236 • Program Mode Programming
Description
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
TIP
1. Press the TIP key to view the TIP function key options:
TIP KEY PROGRAMMING
DESC : TIP
KEY DISABLE
UNDER MGR CONTROL
TYPE IS
%:1 AMOUNT:0
ADD TAX RATE 1
ADD TAX RATE 2
È
N
N
0
Å
N
N
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field or press PAGE DOWN to view the second page
of tip function key options:
TIP KEY PROGRAMMING
ADD TAX RATE 3
ADD TAX RATE 4
AMOUNT ADDED TO
NET & GROSS TOTAL
Ç
NÅ
N
N
3. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
TIP Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is TIP.
numeric up
to 12
character
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
TYPE IS
%:1
AMOUNT:0
0
Select 0 if the tip is to be a calculated percentage based on a
percentage entry. Select 1 if the TIP is to be an amount entry.
ADD TAX RATE 1
Y or N
ADD TAX RATE 2
Y or N
Choose Y to if tax is to calculated and added on the tip
amount.
ADD TAX RATE 3
Y or N
ADD TAX RATE 4
Y or N
AMOUNT ADDED TO NET
AND GROSS TOTAL
Y or N
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Description
Choose Y if you wish to add the TIP total to the NET and
GROSS sales totals on the financial report.
Program Mode Programming • 237
VALIDATION
1. Press the VALIDATION key to view the VALIDATION function key options:
VALID KEY PROGRAMMING
DESC : VALIDATION
SLIP OUTPUT
COM PORT #(0-4)
KEY DISABLE
Å
0
N
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
VALIDATION Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up VALIDATION.
to 12
character
SLIP OUTPUT COMM PORT
# (0 - 4)
0
If validation is used, identify the communications port (1,2,3
or 4) where the validating printer is attached. Enter 0 if
validation is not used.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
238 • Program Mode Programming
Description
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
VOID ITEM - VOID
1. Press the VOID key to view the VOID ITEM function key options:
VOID KEY PROGRAMMING
Å
DESC : VOID
KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
COMPULSORY VALIDATION
N
NOTE: Option added at FlashROM v1.011.
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
VOID ITEM Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
Description
DESC
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
Alpha
numeric up VOID.
to 12
character
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
NOTE: Option added at FlashROM v1.011.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 239
WASTE
1. Press the WASTE key to view the WASTE function key options:
VOID KEY PROGRAMMING
Å
DESC : VOID
KEY HALO
0.00
(0 : NO LIMIT)
KEY DISABLE
N
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
COMPULSORY VALID
N
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
WASTE Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up WASTE.
to 12
character
HALO
7 digit
amount
You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.
KEY DISABLE
Y or N
Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
COMPULSORY
VALIDATION
Y or N
Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
240 • Program Mode Programming
Description
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
FINALISE (for Account Management)
1. Press the FINALISE key to view the FINALISE function key options:
FINALISE KEY PROGRAMMING
DESC : FINALISE
REQUIRE TO CLOSE CHECK
N
Å
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
FINALISE Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric up FINALISE.
to 12
character
REQUIRE TO CLOSE
CHECK
Y or N
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Description
Select Y, if want to activate partly payment, layby or bar
tab. Once activate, a check can be serviced/stored after a
payment is made. Press FINALISE key at the beginning of
the payment when the a Check / Account is about to be
closed. Once key is pressed, the Check / Account has to be
paid in full, then will be closed automatically.
Program Mode Programming • 241
PLU LOOKUP 1 ~ 15
(Program Screen Added in FlashROM v1.011)
1. Press a PLU LOOKUP key to view the PLU LOOKUP function key options:
PLU LOOKUP1 PROGRAMMING
DESC : PLU LOOKUP1
UNDER MGR CONTROL
N
Å
2. Press ENTER (CASH) from the last field to return to the FUNCTION KEY PROGRAM
screen, or press ESC (CLEAR) key at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY
PROGRAM screen without saving changes.
PRICE LEVEL 1 ~ 15 Key Function Options
Page
Field
Value
DESC
Alpha
You can program a descriptor. The default descriptor is PLU
numeric up LOOKUP1 ~ PLU LOOKUP15.
to 12
character
UNDER MGR CONTROL
Y or N
242 • Program Mode Programming
Description
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Logo Descriptor
There are messages you can program for the Preamble (Receipt Header), Postamble (Receipt
Footer), Check (Cheque) Endorsement, Financial Report Messages and Clerk Report Messages
can program on the register.
By changing the settings in PGM-Mode, Print Option, Preamble and Postamble messages can also
print on Guest Check.
The message on Financial Report and Clerk Report can also be modified to make the report more
understandable. Many of the titles refer to the function key is used. However, Change function key
name only affect the print out on the receipt. For report line name, please modified according to the
report that is used.
•
From the PGM control lock position menu, press 7 for LOGO DESCRIPTOR. The LOGO
DESCRIPTOR. PROGRAM screen displays:
LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM
0.PREAMBLE
1.POSTAMBLE
2.ENDORSEMENT MESSAGE
3.FINANCIAL REPORT
4.CLERK REPORT
5.MIX & MATCH NAME
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 243
Preamble
The preamble is a programming message of up to six lines of 32 single space characters that appears
at the top of each receipt and/or guest check.
1. From the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen, press 0 to display the PREAMBLE
screen:
LINE 1 :
PREAMBLE
È
Å
LINE 2 :
LINE 3 :
2. Using the alpha numeric keyboard overlay, type the first line of the message. Each line can be
up to 32 single space characters. If you make a mistake, press the BACKSPACE key to erase
the previous character. After you have completed typing the first line, press ENTER (CASH)
to accept the new line and advance to the second line, or press ESC (CLEAR) to return to the
LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen without making any changes.
3. Using the same procedure, continue programming each line as necessary. Press ESC
(CLEAR) at any time to exit. After programming the third line, the fourth, fifth, and sixth
lines display:
LINE 4 :
LINE 5 :
PREAMBLE
Ç
Å
LINE 6 :
4. When the last line has been entered, press ENTER (CASH) to accept the line and return to
the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen.
244 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Postamble
The postamble is a programming message of up to six lines of 32 single space characters that appears
at the bottom of each receipt and/or guest check.
1. From the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen, press 0 to display the POSTAMBLE
screen:
LINE 1 :
POSTAMBLE
È
Å
LINE 2 :
LINE 3 :
2. Using the alpha numeric keyboard overlay, type the first line of the message. Each line can be
up to 32 single space characters. If you make a mistake, press the BACKSPACE key to erase
the previous character. After you have completed typing the first line, press ENTER (CASH)
to accept the new line and advance to the second line, or press ESC (CLEAR) to return to the
LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen without making any changes.
3. Using the same procedure, continue programming each line as necessary. Press ESC
(CLEAR) at any time to exit. After programming the third line, the fourth, fifth and sixth
lines display:
LINE 4 :
LINE 5 :
POSTAMBLE
Ç
Å
LINE 6 :
4. When the last line has been entered, press ENTER (CASH) to accept the line and return to
the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 245
Endorsement Message
The Endorsement Message is a programming message of up to six lines of 32 single space characters
that prints when a check is endorsed on an optional printer.
1. From the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen, press 2 to display the
ENDORSEMENT MESG. Screen:
ENDORSEMENT MESSAGE
LINE 1 :
LINE 2 :
È
Å
LINE 3 :
2. Using the alpha numeric keyboard overlay, type the first line of the message. Each line can be
up to 32 single space characters. If you make a mistake, press the BACKSPACE key to erase
the previous character. After you have completed typing the first line, press ENTER (CASH)
to accept the new message and advance to the second line, or press ESC (CLEAR) to return
to the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen without making any changes.
3. Using the same procedure, continue programming each line as necessary. Press ESC
(CLEAR) at any time to exit. After programming the third line, the fourth, fifth and sixth
lines display:
ENDORSEMENT MESSAGE
LINE 4 :
LINE 5 :
LINE 6 :
↕
Å
ENDORSEMENT MESSAGE
LINE 7 :
LINE 8 :
↕
Å
LINE 9 :
ENDORSEMENT MESSAGE
LINE 10 :
Ç
Å
4. When the last line has been entered, press ENTER (CASH) to accept the message and return
to the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen.
246 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Financial Report
The Financial Report selection from the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen allows you to
reprogram the descriptors that appear with the Financial Report totals and counters. For example, the
first total on the financial report "+PLU TTL" represents the total of all positive PLU entries. You
might wish to re-label this total to say "FOOD SALES". You can reprogram any of the Financial
Report totals listed here with any 12 character descriptor.
1. From the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen, press 3 to display the FINANCIAL
REP MESG. Screen:
FINANCIAL REP MESSAGE
LINE 1 :
+PLU TTL
LINE 2 :
-PLU TTL
LINE 3 :
ADJST TTL
È
Å
2. The first 3 report descriptors (TTLs 1-3) display with the cursor arrow pointing at the first
descriptor. Using the alpha numeric keyboard overlay, type the descriptor. Each descriptor
can be up to 12 single space characters. If you make a mistake, press the BACKSPACE key
to erase the previous character. After you have completed typing the first descriptor, press
ENTER (CASH) to accept the new message and advance to the TTL, or press ESC
(CLEAR) to return to the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen without making any
changes.
3. Press ENTER (CASH) repeatedly, or press PAGE UP and/or PAGE DOWN to locate the
next descriptor you wish to program. After the last item on each screen, the screen shifts to
display the next 3 descriptors. (There are 84 Financial Report descriptors that you may
program.) Using the same procedure, continue programming each line as necessary. Press
ESC (CLEAR) at any time to exit and return to the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM
screen.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 247
Financial Report Message Table
Page Line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Message Line
1
+PLU TTL
2
Page Line
Message Line
31
RETURN
-PLU TTL
32
3
ADJST TTL
4
NONTAX
5
Page Line
Message Line
61
CHG3 SALES
ERROR CORR
62
CHG4 SALES
33
PREVIOUS VD
63
CHG5 SALES
34
MODE VOID
64
CHG6 SALES
GST SALES
35
CANCEL
65
CHG7 SALES
6
TAX2 SALES
36
GROSS SALES
66
CHG8 SALES
7
TAX3 SALES
37
CASH SALES
67
FOREIGN 1
8
TAX4 SALES
38
CHECK SALES
68
FOREIGN 2
9
GST
39
R/A 1
69
FOREIGN 3
10
TAX2
40
R/A 2
70
FOREIGN 4
11
TAX3
41
R/A 3
71
DRWR TTL
12
TAX4
42
P/O 1
72
MIX & MATCH
13
XMPT1 SALES
43
P/O 2
73
PROMO
14
XMPT2 SALES
44
P/O 3
74
WASTE
15
XMPT3 SALES
45
HASH TTL
75
TIP
16
XMPT4 SALES
46
AUDACTION
76
TRAIN TTL
17
EATIN TTL
47
NOSALE
77
BAL FORWARD
18
TAKEOUT TTL
48
CASH-IN-D
78
GUESTS
19
DRTHRU TTL
49
CHECK-IN-D
79
P/BAL
20
%1
50
FD/S-IN-D
80
CHECKS PAID
21
%2
51
CHG1-IN-D
81
SERVICE
22
%3
52
CHG2-IN-D
82
PAYMENT
23
%4
53
CHG3-IN-D
83
CASH OUT
24
%5
54
CHG4-IN-D
84
ROUND TTL
25
NET SALE
55
CHG5-IN-D
26
CREDIT GST
56
CHG6-IN-D
27
CREDIT TAX2
57
CHG7-IN-D
28
CREDIT TAX3
58
CHG8-IN-D
29
CREDIT TAX4
59
CHG1 SALES
30
FD/S CREDIT
60
CHG2 SALES
248 • Program Mode Programming
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
85
86
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Clerk Report
The Clerk Report selection from the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen allows you to
reprogram the descriptors that appear with the Clerk Report totals and counters. For example, the first
total on the clerk report "NET SALES" might be re-labelled to say "GROSS SALES". You can
reprogram any of the Financial Report totals listed here with any 12 character descriptor.
1. From the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen, press 4 to display the CLERK REP
MESG. Screen:
CLERK REP MESSAGE
LINE 1 :
NET SALE
LINE 2 :
NON TAX
LINE 3 :
GST SALES
È
Å
2. The first 3 report descriptors (TTLs 1-3) display with the cursor arrow pointing at the first
message. Using the alpha numeric keyboard overlay, type the descriptor. Each descriptor can
be up to 12 characters. If you make a mistake, press the BACKSPACE key to erase the
previous character. After you have completed typing the first descriptor, press ENTER
(CASH) to accept the new message and advance to the TTL, or press ESC (CLEAR) to
return to the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen without making any changes.
3. Press ENTER (CASH) repeatedly, or press PAGE UP and/or PAGE DOWN to locate the
next descriptor you wish to program. After the last item on each screen, the screen shifts to
display the next 3 descriptors. (There are 68 Clerk Report descriptors that you may program.)
Using the same procedure, continue programming each line as necessary. Press ESC
(CLEAR) at any time to exit and return to the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 249
Clerk Report Message Table
Page Line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Message Line
1
NET SALE
2
Page Line
Message Line
28
RETURN
NONTAX
29
3
GST SALES
4
TAX2 SALES
5
Page Line
Message Line
55
CHG2 SALES
ERROR CORR
56
CHG3 SALES
30
PREVIOUS VD
57
CHG4 SALES
31
VOID MODE
58
CHG5 SALES
TAX3 SALES
32
CANCEL
59
CHG6 SALES
6
TAX4 SALES
33
GROSS SALES
60
CHG7 SALES
7
GST
34
CASH SALES
61
CHG8 SALES
8
TAX2
35
CHECK SALES
62
FOREIGN 1
9
TAX3
36
R/A 1
63
FOREIGN 2
10
TAX4
37
R/A 2
64
FOREIGN 3
11
XMPT1 SALES
38
R/A 3
65
FOREIGN 4
12
XMPT2 SALES
39
P/O 1
66
DRWR TTL
13
XMPT3 SALES
40
P/O 2
67
PROMO
14
XMPT4 SALES
41
P/O 3
68
WASTE
15
EATIN TTL
42
HASH TTL
69
TIP
16
TAKEOUT TTL
43
CASH-IN-D
70
TRAIN TTL
17
DRTHRU TTL
44
CHECK-IN-D
71
BAL FORWARD
18
%1
45
FD/S-IN-D
72
GUESTS
19
%2
46
CHG1-IN-D
73
P/BAL
20
%3
47
CHG2-IN-D
74
CHECKS PAID
21
%4
48
CHG3-IN-D
75
SERVICE
22
%5
49
CHG4-IN-D
76
CASH OUT
23
CREDIT GST
50
CHG5-IN-D
77
NO SALE
24
CREDIT TAX2
51
CHG6-IN-D
25
CREDIT TAX3
52
CHG7-IN-D
26
CREDIT TAX4
53
CHG8-IN-D
27
FD/S CREDIT
54
CHG1 SALES
250 • Program Mode Programming
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Mix & Match Name
The Mix & Match Message is a programming message of up to 99 lines of 12 characters.
1. From the LOGO DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen, press 5 to display the Mix & Match
Desc. Screen:
M
M
M
M
M
M
&
&
&
&
&
&
M
M
M
M
M
M
MIX & MATCH DESC.
1 :
1
2 :
2
3 :
3
È
Å
2. Using the alpha numeric keyboard overlay, type the descriptor. You can also program by
using the descriptor code method. Each descriptor can be up to 12 characters. If you make a
mistake, press the BACKSPACE key to erase the previous character. After you have
completed typing the first descriptor, press ENTER (CASH) to accept the new message and
advance to the second line, or press ESC (CLEAR) to return to the LOGO DESCRIPTOR
PROGRAM screen without making any changes.
3. Press ENTER (CASH) repeatedly, or press PAGE UP and/or PAGE DOWN to locate the
next descriptor you wish to program. Using the same procedure, continue programming each
line as necessary. Press ESC (CLEAR) at any time to exit and return to the LOGO
DESCRIPTOR PROGRAM screen.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 251
NLU Code Number (Keyboard PLU’s)
NLUs are fixed keys on the keyboard (like traditional department keys) that access specific PLUs.
On the ER-320 and ER-340 default keyboard, there are 100 keyboard PLU keys. The ER-325 and
ER-345 come equipped with 21 Keyboard PLUs and may be expanded to up to 63 Keyboard PLUs.
On the default keyboard, the PLU# assigned to the NLU key is the same, i.e. NLU key number one is
PLU #1. However, with this program, you can assign any PLU number you wish to any one of the
300 possible NLU keys.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 8 for NLU CODE# PGM. The NLU
CODE PROGRAM screen displays:
NLU CODE PROGRAM
PRESS THE NLU KEY ON
THE KEYBOARD YOU
WISH TO PROGRAM
PRESS ESC TO EXIT
2. Press the NLU key on the keyboard you wish to program, or press ESC (CLEAR) to exit.
NLU CODE PROGRAM
CURRENT PLU CODE#
ENTER
NEW PLU CODE#
1
0Å
3. The current PLU code number displays. Type the new PLU code number you wish to use for
this NLU key, press ENTER (CASH).
4. The NLU CODE PROGRAM screen returns. Continue from step 2 to program additional
NLU keys, or press ESC (CLEAR) to exit.
252 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Download Programs
When multiple registers are connected in an IRC network, you can download programs from one
register to any or all of the remaining registers.
NOTE: If there is a failure in IRC communication, the register that programs are being sent from will
display "TIME OVER" indicating that the IRC retries have been completed and no
communication was possible.
To All Registers in IRC Network
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 9 for DOWNLOAD PROGRAMS. The
PROGRAM DOWN screen displays:
PROGRAM DOWN
0.IRC ALL
1.IRC SELECT
2. From the PROGRAM DOWN screen, press 0 if you wish to download programs to all of the
registers, the PROGRAM DOWN screen appears.
PROGRAM DOWN
0.PLU
1.GROUP
2.SALES TAX
3.SYSTEM OPTION
4.PRINT OPTION
5.FUNCTION KEYS
6.CLERK
È
3. From the PROGRAM DOWN screen, find the digit that represents the program you wish to
download. Press PAGE DOWN to view the second page of the PROGRAM DOWN
options. Note that 00 on this screen is MORE.
PROGRAM DOWN
7.LOGO DESCRIPTIOR
8.REPORT LOGO DESCRIPTOR
9.STOCK COUNT
DEC.TIME & DATE/MISC
00.MORE
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Ç
Program Mode Programming • 253
4. Press 00, more program you can download on the next screen.
PROGRAM DOWN
0.MACRO
1.PLU LOOK-UP
2.MIX & MATCH
00.ALL
5. This time, the 00 is for downloading all programs. Press the digit that represents your
selection. This display will indicate the number of the machine that the program is
downloading to. The printer at the receiving register will indicate "PROGRAM DOWN" to
indicate if the download is successful.
To Selected Register(s) in IRC Network
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 9 for DOWNLOAD PROGRAMS. The
PROGRAM DOWN screen displays:
PROGRAM DOWN
0.IRC ALL
1.IRC SELECT
2. From the PROGRAM DOWN screen, press 1 if you wish to download programs to selected
registers, the PROGRAM DOWN screen appears.
PROGRAM DOWN
0.IRC ALL
1.IRC SELECT
#
254 • Program Mode Programming
1YÅ2N 3N 4N 5N 6N 7N 8N 9N
10N 11N 12N 13N 14N 15N 16N
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
3. The PROGRAM DOWN screen now displays Y or N for each of the eight possible registers
in an IRC system. For example, if your IRC system consists of 3 registers, the default Y will
display for register 1, 2, and 3. The cursor arrow points at the first register. Press the
YES/NO key to toggle the selection for register #1 to Y or N. Press ENTER (CASH). The
cursor arrow moves to #2. Select Y or N for second register. In this manner you can
determine which registers you wish to download programs to. When you have selected Y or
N for the last register, the PROGRAM DOWN screen appears.
PROGRAM DOWN
0.PLU
1.GROUP
2.SALES TAX
3.SYSTEM OPTION
4.PRINT OPTION
5.FUNCTION KEYS
6.CLERK
È
4. From the PROGRAM DOWN screen, find the digit that represents the program you wish to
download. Press PAGE DOWN to view the second page of the PROGRAM DOWN
options. Note that 00 on this screen is MORE.
PROGRAM DOWN
7.LOGO DESCRIPTIOR
8.REPORT LOGO DESCRIPTOR
9.STOCK COUNT
DEC.TIME & DATE/MISC
00.MORE
Ç
5. Press 00, more program you can download on the next screen.
PROGRAM DOWN
0.MACRO
1.PLU LOOK-UP
2.MIX & MATCH
00.ALL
6. This time, the 00 is for downloading all programs. Press the digit that represents your
selection. This display will indicate the number of the machine that the program is
downloading to. The printer at the receiving register will indicate "PROGRAM DOWN" to
indicate if the download is successful.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 255
Clerk In/Out
The Clerk In/Out program allows you to edit actual punch in/out times for the day.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The PROGRAM MODE
page 2 screen displays.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 0 for CLERK I/O. The CLERK
NUMBER screen displays:
CLERK NUMBER
CLERK NO? (1-10)
0Å
3. Type the number of the clerk you wish to edit and press ENTER (CASH) to display the
CLERK I/O PROG. screen:
CLERK IN/OUT PROGRAM
IN 00.00.00Å 00:00
OUT 00.00.00 00:00
IN 00.00.00 00:00
OUT 00.00.00 00:00
IN 00.00.00 00:00
OUT 00.00.00 00:00
TIME WORKED: 00:00
4. The cursor will point at the date for the first time punch. Press ENTER (CASH) until the
cursor points at the field you wish to edit. Note that you can edit the last 20 time punches,
although only 6 dates/times display on the screen at one time. When you leave the last field
displayed on the current screen, your view will shift to the next 6 dates/times
•
If you wish to edit a date, type a new date and press ENTER (CASH). Be sure to enter
the date in a six digit format, i.e. enter May 30th, 2011as 053011.
•
If you wish to edit a time field, type the new time in a 24 hour (military) format, i.e. enter
7:00 PM as 1900.
5. Note that when you edit time information, the TIME WORKED field is updated with a new
total. When you have completed editing, press ESC (CLEAR) to return to the CLERK
NUMBER selection screen.
256 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
PLU Stock
If you designate a PLU as an inventory item (see PLU programming) then a special PLU stock
counter keeps a running inventory count. This program is where you can set the current inventory
level.
•
Refer to "System Option Programming" on page 172 to determine whether the quantity of
inventory you enter in this program adds to existing inventory quantity, or whether it replaces
the current inventory quantity.
•
Inventory is kept in decimal units two digits beyond the decimal. For example, if 1.75 pounds
are multiplied times the PLU with the preset price per pound of apples, 1.75 is subtracted
from the PLU representing apples.
To program inventory:
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The PROGRAM MODE
page 2 screen displays.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 1 for PLU STOCK. The PLU
NUMBER screen displays:
PLU NUMBER
* ENTER PLU NUMBER
AND PUSH PLU, OR
* PRESS A PLU KEY ON
THE KEYBOARD
0Å
3. Enter the PLU number and press the PLU key, or press an PLU key on the keyboard. The
stock quantity for the selected PLU displays:
PLU#
STOCK QUANTITY
1 P1
0.00Å
4. Type the new or additional stock quantity and press ENTER (CASH). Note that stock is kept
in decimal units and you must enter new or additional stock to two digits beyond the decimal.
For example, type 1 0 0 0 to enter ten units of inventory.
5. Return to step 2 to continue recording inventory, or press ESC (CLEAR) to return to the
PROGRAM MODE menu.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 257
Drawer Limit
You can set a limit for cash in drawer. When cash in drawer exceeds the limit you program here, a
warning will display on the screen. You must press CLEAR to remove the warning and continue
operations. The warning will continue to appear at the completion of every transaction with the limit
exceeded, until you use the PAID OUT function to remove cash from the drawer.
Set the drawer limit to 0 to disable the drawer limit warning.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The PROGRAM MODE
page 2 screen displays.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 2 for DRAWER LIMIT. The LIMIT
PROGRAM screen displays:
LIMIT PROGRAM
DRAWER LIMIT
0.00Å
3. Type the amount you wish to use for a limit (or type 0 for no limit.) Press ENTER (CASH).
Check Change Limit
Use this program to set the maximum amount of cash that can be returned when a check is tendered
for an amount greater than the amount of the sale. For example, if the check change limit is $10.00
the maximum amount that can be tendered into the check key on a $5.00 sale is $15.00.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The PROGRAM MODE
page 2 screen displays.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 3 for CHECK CHANGE LIMIT. The
CHECK LIMIT PGM. screen displays:
CHANGE LIMIT PROGRAM
CHECK CHANGE LIMIT
0.00Å
3. Type the amount for the check change limit. Press ENTER (CASH).
258 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Time & Date
Use this program to set the clock and calendar on your SPS-300. The date changes automatically.
After initial setting, time changing will probably be required only for beginning and ending daylight
savings time.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The PROGRAM MODE
page 2 screen displays.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 4 for TIME & DATE. The SET DATE
& TIME screen displays:
SET TIME & DATE
SET TIME :
(MILITARY)
SET DATE :
HH:MM
12:30Å
MM.DD.YY
10.15.12
3. Type the current time in 24 hour format (i.e. military time, where 13:00 is 1:00 PM.) Press
ENTER (CASH).
4. Type the current date in MM (month) DD (day) and YY (year) format. Press ENTER
(CASH).
Tare Weight
A tare is the amount of weight representing the container, or package when items are sold by weight.
You can pre-program five tare weights, representing the weight of different containers. When you
place an item and a container on an optional scale, you can enter the tare number to automatically
subtract the pre-programmed tare weight.
If you choose to use tare #5 for manual tare weight entry, do not enter a weight for tare #5. (See
Program Mode Programming Æ 5.FUNCTION KEYS Æ TARE for detail.)
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The PROGRAM MODE
page 2 screen displays.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 5 for TARE WEIGHT. The TARE
WEIGHT PROG. screen displays with the cursor arrow pointed at the weight for tare #1:
TARE WEIGHT PROGRAM
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
TARE
1
2
3
4
5
:
:
:
:
:
È
0.000Å
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
3. Type the weight for the first tare, press ENTER (CASH). The cursor advances to TARE 2.
Type the weight for the second tare and press ENTER (CASH). Continue until all 5 tares are
programmed, or press ESC (CLEAR) to exit.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 259
Macro
Macro keys may be programmed to record, then later perform, up to 50 keystrokes. For example, a macro
key could be set to tender (preset tender) a common currency, such as $5 into the cash key. Use this
program to record keystrokes for each of the 10 possible macro keys.
NOTE: You can also program macros in function key programming.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The PROGRAM MODE
page 2 screen displays.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 6 for MACRO. The MACRO
PROGRAM screen displays:
0.MACRO
1.MACRO
2.MACRO
3.MACRO
4.MACRO
5.MACRO
6.MACRO
MACRO PROGRAM
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
3. Press the digit that represents the macro you wish to program. Press PAGE DOWN to view
the remainder of the list:
MACRO PROGRAM
7.MACRO #8
8.MACRO #9
9.MACRO #10
260 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Programming a New Macro
1. After selecting a new macro to program, the screens displays with the arrow pointing at the
first macro line:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Å
2. Press the first key of the macro sequence, for example, press 1 (numeric one):
1. ONE
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Å
3. The keystroke is recorded on the screen and the cursor moves to the next keystroke.
4. Continue to enter keystrokes until the macro is complete. Press ESC (CLEAR) to end the
macro recording and return to the MACRO PROGRAM screen.
If you wish to add a function to a macro that is not located on the keyboard, or if you
wish to include the CLEAR/ESC, Y/N, PAGE UP, or PAGE DOWN function to a macro
string (these keys are used for editing purposes inside this program), press PAGE DOWN to
display a keycode list:
FUNCTION
KEYCODE
-------------------------------NLU#1 – NLU#300(1-300)
ONE
301
TWO
302
THREE
303
FOUR
304
FIVE
305
5. With the keycode list displayed, press PAGE DOWN and PAGE UP to find the function
you wish to add to the macro. Type the numeric code number press ENTER (CASH). The
function is added to the macro.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 261
Editing an Existing Macro
1. After selecting a macro to program the screen displays the keystrokes currently programmed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
ONE
TWO
THREE
FOUR
Å
2. Press the YES/NO key to advance the cursor to the line you wish to edit.
3. With the cursor pointing at a line, press (or select) the new function you wish to place in the
macro sequence.
4. If you wish to remove a key stroke from a macro, replace the current function with the
INACTIVE function by pressing the PAGE DOWN to display a keycode list, then enter
1 9 9.
262 • Program Mode Programming
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Machine No.
The machine number is printed on the register receipt. Program a machine number so that any receipt
can be identified with the store or register where the transaction took place. The machine number may
be a different number than the IRC register number programmed in IRC programming (See Service
Mode Æ 7.IRC OPTIONS for detail.)
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The PROGRAM MODE
page 2 screen displays. Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the page 2 program
options.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 7 for MACHINE NO. The MACHINE
# PROG. screen displays:
MACHINE # PROGRAM
MACHINE #
0Å
3. Type the machine number, up to 5 digits, press ENTER (CASH).
Training Mode Password
If you wish to use training mode, you must program a password that you will use to enter training
mode. The password may be up to 4 digits long, however, if you choose to use a password less that
for digits, you must enter preceding zeros to complete a 4 digit entry. For example, if you program the
password to be "77", you must type "0077" when entering training.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The PROGRAM MODE
page 2 screen displays. Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the page 2 program
options.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 9 for TRAINING MODE P/W. The
TRAINING MODE P/W screen displays:
TRAINING MODE PASSWORD
PASSWORD :
0Å
3. Type the password, up to 4 digits, press ENTER (CASH).
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Program Mode Programming • 263
Program Scan
You can make a printed record of your SPS-300 program.
1. From the PGM control lock position menu, press 00 for MORE. The PROGRAM MODE
page 2 screen displays. Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the page 2 program
options.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE page 2 screen, press 00 for SCAN. The PROGRAM SCAN
screen displays:
PROGRAM SCAN
0.PROGRAM SCAN
1.ALL PROGRAM SCAN
3. Press 1 to initiate a printout of all programs. Press 0 to select the program you wish to print
from the PROGRAM SCAN screen.
È
PROGRAM SCAN
0.PLU
1.GROUP
2.SALES TAX
3.SYSTEM OPTION
4.PRINT OPTION
5.FUNCTION KEYS
6.CLERK
4. Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the program scan selections. If you see the
program you wish to print, press the digit representing that program.
Ç
PROGRAM SCAN
7.LOGO DESCRIPTOR
8.NLU CODE# PROGRAM
00.MORE SCAN
5. Press 00 to view the PROGRAM SCAN page 2 screen:
PROGRAM SCAN
0.CLERK IN/OUT
1.PLU STOCK
2.DRAWER LIMIT
3.CHECK CHANGE LIMIT
4.TIME & DATE
5.TARE WEIGHT
6.MACRO
264 • Program Mode Programming
page2 È
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
6. Press PAGE DOWN to view the remainder of the program scan selections. When you see the
program you wish to print, press the digit representing that program.
PROGRAM SCAN
7.MACHINE NO.
8.PC SCHEDULE TIME
9.TRAINING MODE P/W
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
page2 Ç
Program Mode Programming • 265
Sample Reports
Financial
Total and count of
all positive PLUs
Total and count of
all Negative PLUs
Total of +PLU and
–PLU sales
Total and count of
Non-taxable sales
Total and count of
tax eligible sales for
each sale tax
Total and count of
tax collected for
each tax
Total and count
exempted sales for
each tax
Total and count
sales for each type
of destination
Total and count for
each % function key
(i.e. discounts &
coupons)
DATE 11/01/2011 TUE
TIME 13:32
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------FINANCIAL
+PLU TTL
179.56
$288.60
-PLU TTL
10
-20.00
ADJST TTL
189.56
$268.60
-------------------------------NONTAX
$30.47
TAX1 SALES
$153.60
TAX2 SALES
$11.92
TAX3 SALES
$16.77
TAX4 SALES
$31.89
TAX1
$10.00
TAX2
$1.21
TAX3
$1.18
TAX4
$2.18
XMPT1 SALES
$7.00
XMPT2 SALES
$1.50
XMPT3 SALES
$7.95
XMPT4 SALES
$7.50
EATIN TTL
1
$10.12
TAKEOUT TTL
2
$40.77
DRTHRU TTL
1
$3.04
% 1
3
-0.48
continued . . .
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Sample Reports • 267
continued from previous page
Total and count for
each % function key
(i.e. discouts &
coupons)
% 2
2
-5.22
3
$3.23
0
$0.00
0
$0.00
26
$281.18
4
-1.11
1
-0.23
2
-0.89
1
-0.39
0
$0.23
33
-59.73
2
-4.00
1
-1.50
-2
-6.40
2
$16.00
$375.63
13
$133.49
1
$23.05
1
$145.00
0
$0.00
0
$0.00
1
-140.00
0
$0.00
0
$0.00
% 3
% 4
% 5
Net Sales
Credited tax for
each tax. (Tax is
credited for negative
taxable sales, i.e.
mdse return
transactions.)
NET SALE
CREDIT TAX1
CREDIT TAX2
CREDIT TAX3
CREDIT TAX4
Food stamp change
credited to sales
FD/S CREDIT
RETURN
Total and count for
each type of
transaction
correction.
ERROR CORR
PREVIOUS VD
MODE VOID
CANCEL
Gross Sales
Totals and counters
for CASH and
CHECK sales
GROSS SALES
CASH SALES
CHECK SALES
R/A 1
R/A 2
R/A 3
Total and count for
each type R/A
(received on
account) and P/O
(paid out) key.
P/O 1
P/O 2
P/O 3
continued . . .
268 • Sample Reports
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Total and count of
items sold with
HASH status.
continued from previous page
HASH TTL
AUDACTION
Count of No Sales.
Total of numbers
entered into the nonadd key
Total and count of
expected CASH,
CHECK in drawer
NOSALE
NON ADD #
CASH-IN-D
CHECK-IN-D
FD/S-IN-D
CHG1-IN-D
CHG2-IN-D
CHG3-IN-D
CHG4-IN-D
CHG5-IN-D
CHG6-IN-D
CHG7-IN-D
CHG8-IN-D
CHG1 SALES
CHG2 SALES
Total and count for
each CHARGE key.
CHG3 SALES
CHG4 SALES
CHG5 SALES
CHG6 SALES
CHG7 SALES
Total and count for
each Foreign
currency in drawer.
CHG8 SALES
0
$0.00
4
$0.00
4
547
14
$269.99
3
-108.45
2
$21.00
0
$0.00
1
$8.43
1
$8.52
2
-1.60
1
$2.67
2
$13.09
0
$0.00
1
$3.04
0
$0.00
1
$8.43
1
$8.52
2
-1.60
1
$2.67
2
$13.09
0
$0.00
1
$3.04
continued . . .
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Sample Reports • 269
continued from previous page
Total of CASH,
CHECKS and
CHARGES in
drawer.
Total and count for
PROMO and
WASTE.
Number of
transactions and
total activity in
Training Mode
Total of all
balances serviced
Total number of
guests served
Total of balances
entered into PBAL
key.
Total of balances
paid.
Total of items
serviced.
Total of items
payment.
Average number if
items per customer,
and average dollar
sales per customer
FOREIGN 1
FOREIGN 2
FOREIGN 3
FOREIGN 4
DRWR TTL
MIX & MATCH
▪0.00
▪0.00
▪0.00
▪0.00
$216.69
0
$0.00
PROMO
1
$1.50
WASTE
8
$12.50
TIP
0
$0.00
TRAIN TTL
5
$62.59
BAL FORWARD
4
$88.13
GUESTS
5
P/BAL
4
$0.00
CHECKS PAID
2
$18.64
SERVICE
4
$88.13
PAYMENT
0
$0.00
AVG ITEM/CUST
7.29
AVG $/CUST
$10.81
********************************
GRAND
$375.63
ETHAN
No.000209
00000
Grand total.
270 • Sample Reports
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Time
Time Period
Number of
Transactions
Net sales in this
period.
Percentage of total
sales
Number of
Transactions all
periods
Net sales in all
periods.
DATE 11/01/2011 TUE
TIME 15:48
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------TIME
14:00-15:00
CNT
26
SALES AMT
$281.18
SALES RATE
71.92%
15:00-16:00
CNT
6
SALES AMT
$109.78
SALES RATE
28.08%
********************************
TOTAL CNT
32
TOTAL AMT
$390.96
ETHAN
No.000236
00000
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Sample Reports • 271
PLU
PLU number
PLU Descriptor
Count and sales
total.
Percentage of total
sales
Total activity for all
PLUs
Total sales for all
PLUs.
272 • Sample Reports
DATE 11/01/2011 TUE
TIME 15:33
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------ALL PLU
PLU#1
HAMBURGER
CNT 28
$42.00
SALES RATE
15.64%
PLU#2
DBL BURGER
CNT 40
$99.75
SALES RATE
37.14%
PLU#4
COKE
CNT 26
$38.85
SALES RATE
14.46%
PLU#5
SPRITE
CNT 18
$13.42
SALES RATE
5.00%
PLU#7
ROAST
CNT 19.16
$30.47
SALES RATE
11.34%
PLU#28
UNLEADED
CNT 32.85
$39.39
SALES RATE
14.66%
PLU#29
RETURNS
CNT 10
-20.00
SALES RATE
-7.44%
PLU#33
NAILS
CNT 15.55
$24.72
SALES RATE
9.20%
********************************
TOTAL CNT
189.56
TOTAL AMT
$268.60
ETHAN
No.000213
00000
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Clerk
Note: Media totals can be printed for each clerk, if selected in System Option Programming.
Clerk Name
Number of
Transactions
Net sales for this
clerk
Drawer total for this
clerk
Net sale for all
clerks.
Drawer total for all
clerks.
DATE 11/01/2011 TUE
TIME 15:36
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------ALL CLERK
ETHAN
NET SALE
10
$155.23
DRWR TTL
$109.81
-------------------------------ZACH
NET SALE
5
$45.14
DRWR TTL
$43.22
-------------------------------ANNA
NET SALE
4
$78.75
DRWR TTL
$67.03
-------------------------------LAURA
NET SALE
2
$0.00
DRWR TTL
$18.64
-------------------------------PEGGY
-------------------------------MOLLY
NET SALE
5
$2.06
DRWR TTL
-22.01
-------------------------------ETHAN
No.000218
00000
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Sample Reports • 273
Individual Clerk
Clerk Name
Number of
Transactions
Net sales for this
clerk
Drawer total for this
clerk
274 • Sample Reports
DATE 11/01/2011 TUE
TIME 15:36
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------INDIVIDUAL CLERK
ETHAN
NET SALE
10
$155.23
DRWR TTL
$109.81
-------------------------------ETHAN
No.000218
00000
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Groups
Group Descriptor
Number of items
sold in this group
Net sales for this
group
Number of items
sold in all groups.
Net sales for all
groups.
DATE 11/01/2011 TUE
TIME 15:34
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------GROUP
GROUP : 1 FOOD
CNT
113
SALES AMT
$157.75
GROUP : 2 DRINK
CNT
30
SALES AMT
$45.00
GROUP : 3 REST.
CNT
129.16
SALES AMT
$241.47
GROUP : 5 STORE
CNT
240.11
SALES AMT
$380.58
GROUP : 8 MDSE
CNT
130.11
SALES AMT
$169.58
GROUP : 9 STORE MDSE
CNT
110.95
SALES AMT
$139.11
********************************
TOTAL CNT
753.33
TOTAL AMT
$1133.49
ETHAN
No.000237
00000
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Sample Reports • 275
Stock
PLU number
PLU Descriptor
Current inventory
count
276 • Sample Reports
DATE 11/01/2011 TUE
TIME 15:47
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------ALL PLU STOCK
PLU#1
HAMBURGER
CNT
26
PLU#2
DBL BURGER
CNT
15
PLU#7
ROAST
CNT
25.96
PLU#28
UNLEADED
CNT
1488.47
PLU#33
NAILS
CNT
161.25
ETHAN
No.000228
00000
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Clerk Time Report
Clerk Name
Date and time for
the last four time
clock punches (in or
out).
Net sales for this
clerk
DATE 11/01/2011 TUE
TIME 15:36
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------INDIVI. CLERK TIME
ETHAN
TIME IN :
10/30/2009
07:52
TIME OUT:
10/30/2011
15:44
TIME IN :
10/31/2011
07:52
TIME OUT:
10/31/2011
13:50
TIME WORKED :
0013:50
ZACH
TIME IN :
10/30/2011
07:26
TIME OUT:
10/30/2011
14:55
TIME IN :
10/31/2011
07:26
TIME OUT:
10/31/2011
14:22
TIME IN :
11/01/2011
06:58
TIME WORKED :
0014:25
ANNA
TIME IN :
10/30/2011
12:52
TIME OUT:
10/30/2011
15:42
TIME IN :
10/31/2011
06:44
TIME OUT:
11/31/2011
14:55
TIME WORKED :
0011:01
LAURA
TIME IN :
10/30/2011
02:33
TIME OUT:
10/30/2011
07:55
TIME IN :
10/30/2011
12:44
TIME OUT:
10/30/2011
18:44
TIME IN :
10/31/2011
09:55
TIME WORKED :
0011:22
PEGGY
TIME IN :
10/31/2011
13:52
TIME WORKED :
0000:00
MOLLY
TIME IN :
10/30/2011
01:05
TIME OUT:
10/30/2011
09:55
TIME IN :
10/31/2011
07:44
TIME WORKED :
0008:50
-------------------------------TOTAL WORKED :
0059:28
ETHAN
No.000217
00000
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Sample Reports • 277
Check File
Open check number
and balance.
Clerk responsible
for the check.
278 • Sample Reports
DATE 11/01/2011 TUE
TIME 15:59
X 1
REPORT
00001
-------------------------------OPEN CHECK
CHECK : 3
$24.07
MOLLY
CHECK : 4
$45.42
ETHAN
CHECK : 5
$24.50
ETHAN
CHECK : 6
$28.33
ETHAN
ETHAN
No.000243
00000
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Appendix
System Option Programming (for v01.010 and earlier)
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 1
BEEPER ACTIVE
YÅ
RESERVED
N
CLERK ENTRY
0
0:PUSH
1:CODE
CLERK ASSIGNED WHEN CLERK KEY
IS PUSHED (1-10)
1
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 2
CLERK IS Y:POP-UP
NÅ
N:STAY-DOWN
DRAWER NEEDS TO BE SHUT TO
OPERATE
Y
ACTIVATE OPEN DRAWER ALARM
N
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 3
SECONDS TO ALLOW DRAWER OPEN 30Å
(0-99)
ALLOW POST TENDER
N
OPEN DRAWER ON POST TENDER
Y
ALLOW MULTIPLE RECEIPT
Y
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 4
CASH DECLARATION REQ
BEFORE REPORTS
NÅ
MGR CONTROL TO SEND.
NEGATIVE BALANCE
N
ZERO BALANCE
N
RESET TRANSACTION NO.ON Z RPT N
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 5
RESET GRAND TOTAL AFTER
NÅ
Z REPORT
OPEN DRAWER WHEN REPORTS
ARE RUN
Y
OPEN DRAWER DURING TRAIN MODE Y
SYSTEM OPTION
DATE FORMAT IS
0:MDY
1:DYM
2:YMD
MODIFIER
0:POP UP AFTER ITEM
1:POP UP AFTER SALE
2:STAYDOWN
DECIMAL PLACE (0-3)
SYSTEM OPTION
% AND TAX CALCULATION
SPLIT PRICE CALCULATION
2
pg 7
CALCULATION CHART
0:ROUND UP AT 0.50
1:ROUND UP
2:ROUND DOWN
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
0Å
0
pg 6
1Å
0
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 8
COMPULSORY EAT-IN T-OUT D-THRU
BEFORE TENDERING
NÅ
HASH IS
Y:NORMAL N:NON-ADD
ALLOW PRINT SCREEN ON
X/TIME KEY
Y
Y
Appendix • 279
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 9
RESET Z COUNTER AFTER Z1 REPORT
FINANCIAL REPORT
NÅ
TIME REPORT
N
PLU
REPORT
N
CLERK REPORT
N
GROUP REPORT
N
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 10
RESET Z COUNTER AFTER Z2 REPORT
DAILY SALES REPORT
NÅ
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 11
ALLOW DIRECT MULTIPLICATION
NÅ
INVENTORY CNT PROGRAM,
N
Y:ADD CURRENT LEVEL
N:COUNTER REPLACE CURRENT
LEVEL
GLOBAL ENTRY LIMIT (0-14)
0
SYSTEM OPTION
DISABLE PRICE LEVEL KEY
LEVEL 1 :
LEVEL 2 :
LEVEL 3 :
LEVEL 4 :
LEVEL 5 :
SYSTEM OPTION
PRICE LEVEL IS
0:POP UP AFTER ITEM
1:POP UP AFTER SALE
2:STAYDOWN
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 14
PROMPT OPERATOR WHEN EJ BUFFER
IS FULL
NÅ
STOP OPERATIONS WHEN EJ BUFFER
IS FULL
N
SEND ONLY NEGATIVE ENTRIES
TO EJ
N
X REPORT & DECLARATION TO EJ N
pg 13
0Å
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL
SYSTEM OPTION
SEND RESET REPORT TO EJ
Y
pg 15
PRINTER PAPER SENSOR ACTIVE
Y
DEACTIVATE SPLIT PRICING
N
pg 12
NÅ
N
N
N
N
SYSTEM OPTION
EUROPEAN ROUNDING
# START END
1
00 – 02
2
03 – 07
3
08 – 09
4
00 – 00
5
00 – 00
pg 16
YÅ
VALUE
0
5
10
0
0
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 17
DISABLE NOT FOUND PLU
NÅ
EMBEDED PRICE BAR CODE TYPE
1
1/2/3/4/7
CLERK INTERRUPT
N
PROGRAM DESCRIPTOR BY CODE
N
AUTO CUTTER
Y
USE SPOOL
N
SYSTEM OPTION
USE MCR
USE TRACK 1&2 : 0
TRACK 2&3 : 1
USE DALLAS
STORE NAME:
pg 18
NÅ
1
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 19
BACK LIGHT COLOR (0-7)
0Å
0:ON 1:RED 2:GREEN 3:BLUE
4:RED+GREEN 5:GREEN + BLUE
6:RED+BLUE
7:OFF
SELECT LANGUAGE
0
0:ENGLISH 1:SPANISH 2:GERMAN
TAX1 SHIFT
N
SYSTEM OPTION
ALLOW PRICE LEVEL
ONLY MGR MODE
DISPLAY ADD PRICE
OF LINKED ITEMS
ALLOW SALE WITH 0 STOCK
ALLOW Z STOCK RPT
RESERVED
DIRECT MULTIPLICATION MORE
THAN ONE DIGIT
TENDER VALIDATION
Y:AMOUNT TENDERED
N:AMOUNT OF SALE
280 • Appendix
NÅ
N
N
MIX & MATCH IS TAXABLE
N
STORE A
N
pg 20
NÅ
N
Y
Y
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
SYSTEM OPTION
MACRO KEY UNDER MGR
MACRO 1 :
MACRO 2 :
MACRO 3 :
MACRO 4 :
MACRO 5 :
pg 21
SYSTEM OPTION
MACRO KEY UNDER MGR
MACRO11 :
MACRO12 :
MACRO13 :
MACRO14 :
MACRO15 :
pg 23
NÅ
N
N
N
N
NÅ
N
N
N
N
SYSTEM OPTION
MACRO KEY UNDER MGR
MACRO 6 :
MACRO 7 :
MACRO 8 :
MACRO 9 :
MACRO10 :
pg 22
SYSTEM OPTION
MACRO KEY UNDER MGR
MACRO16 :
MACRO17 :
MACRO18 :
MACRO19 :
MACRO20 :
pg 24
NÅ
N
N
N
N
NÅ
N
N
N
N
SYSTEM OPTION
pg 25
ALLOW Z FINANCIAL REPORT WITH 0Å
OPEN CLERK INTERRUPT
System Options - Reference Information
Page
1
2
Field
Value
Description
BEEPER ACTIVE
Y or N
Use to determine if buzzer is active when keyboard button is
pressed.
RESERVED
Y or N
CLERK ENTRY
0:PUSH
1:CODE
0
Select between PUSH or CODE for clerk entry (Sign-On).
When PUSH is selected, press CLERK button to Sign-On
(please see next option to determine which Clerk is used). If
select CODE, enter Clerk Code then press CLERK button.
See PROGRAM Mode Æ 6.CLERK for detail.
CLERK ASSIGNED WHEN
CLERK KEY IS PUSHED (110)
1
If PUSH system is selected for Clerk Entry, you can select
the clerk that is signed on when the CLERK # key is
pressed. Note that the maximum clerk number you can enter
here is determined by how many clerks are allocated in
memory.
CLERK IS
Y:POP-UP
N:STAY-DOWN
Y or N
Depends on the size of the business, or reporting purpose,
the Clerk status can be set between Pop-Up or Stay-Down. If
Pop-up is chosen, a clerk will be signed-off automatically
after a transaction is finalised (stored in Account Operation).
Otherwise, Stay-Down will have a clerk stay sign-on all the
time (except after an Initial Clear is performed).
DRAWER NEEDS TO BE
SHUT TO OPERATE
Y or N
Select between Y or N to allow or disallow operation when
drawer is open.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Appendix • 281
Page
3
4
5
6
Field
Value
Description
ACTIVATE OPEN DRAWER
ALARM
Y or N
Select between Y or N to enable or disable open drawer
alarm. See next option for related settings.
SECONDS TO ALLOW
DRAWER OPEN (0 - 99)
30
When Open Drawer Alarm is enabled, enter the number as
the number of seconds before the alarm to go off.
ALLOW POST TENDER
Y or N
Select Y to allow re-tendering should a second change
calculation be necessary. Re-enter the tendered amount and
press the CASH key to show the new change computation.
OPEN DRAWER ON POST
TENDER
Y or N
If you enable post tendering, select N to not open the cash
drawer after the second tender.
ALLOW MULPTIPLE
RECEIPT
Y or N
Use this to allow multiple receipt printing. In conjunction
with Print Option - Buffer Receipt Issue when Receipt is
On (pg12) sets to Y, multiple receipt can be issued by press
CASH key as many time as you need.
CASH DECLARATION REQ
BEFORE REPORTS
Y or N
Use to determine if Cash Declaration is compulsory before
any reports is made.
MGR CONTROL TO TEND.
NEGATIVE BALANCE
Y or N
Use to determine if Manager Control is compulsory when
Negative Balance Tendering occurs. When selected the
control lock must be in the X position to finalise the
transaction.
MGR CONTROL
TO TEND.
ZERO BALANCE
Y or N
Use to determine if Manager Control is compulsory when
Zero Balance Tendering occurs. When selected the control
lock must be in the X position to finalise the transaction.
RESET TRANSACTION #
ON Z REPORT
Y or N
Use to determine if the Transaction (Receipt) Number is
reset automatically after a Z Financial Report is made.
RESET GRAND TOTAL
AFTER Z REPORT
Y or N
Use to determine if the Grand Total on the Financial
Report is reset automatically after a Z Financial Report is
made.
OPEN DRAWER WHEN
REPORTS ARE RUN
Y or N
Use to determine if Cash Drawer opens automatically when
a report is running.
OPEN DRAWER DURING
TRAIN MODE
Y or N
Use to determine if Cash Drawer opens at the end of
Training Mode transaction.
DECIMAL PLACE (0 - 3)
2
Enter a number between to place the decimal point the
selected number of positions from the right.
DATE FORMAT IS 0:MDY
1:DMY 2:YMD
1
Use to determine the Date Format between 0 for
MMDDYY, 1 for DDMMYY, or 2 for YYMMDD date
printing format.
MODIFIER:
0:POP UP AFTER ITEM
1:POP UP AFTER SALE
2:STAYDOWN
0
A MODIFIER key alters the next PLU registered, either by
changing the code number of the PLU so that a different item
is registered, or by adding the modifier descriptor and not
changing the code of the subsequent PLU. If you press a
modifier key, you have the option of the modifier applying
only to the next item (0), having the same modifier apply to
any subsequent item registered in the same transaction (1), or
having the same modifier apply to any subsequent item on
any subsequent transaction (2).
282 • Appendix
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Page
7
8
Field
Value
Description
% AND TAX CALCULATION
0:ROUND UP AT 0.50
1:ROUND UP
2:ROUND DOWN
0
Select the digit that represents the appropriate rounding
method for tax and discount calculations: 0 for round up at
0.5 of a penny (0.005), 1 for always round up or 2 for always
round down.
SPLIT PRICE
CALCULATION
0:ROUND UP AT 0.50
1:ROUND UP
2:ROUND DOWN
0
Select the digit that represents the appropriate rounding
method for split pricing (i.e. 2 at 3 for $1.00) calculations: 0
for round up at 0.5 of a penny (0.005), 1 for always round up
or 2 for always round down.
COMPULSORY EAT-IN TOUT D-THRU BEFORE
TENDERING
Y or N
Choose Y if you wish to enforce use of one of the destination
keys (EAT-IN, TAKE OUT, or DRIVE THRU) before the
sale is finalized.
HASH IS
Y:NORMAL N:NON-ADD
Y or N
Y: Hash adds to all totals except the gross and net sales totals
on the financial report.
N: Hash does not add to any totals, except the HASH total on
the financial report.
ALLOW PRINT SCREEN ON Y or N
X/TIME KEY
9
10
11
Choose N if you wish to disable the print screen function of
the X/TIME key.
RESET Z COUNTER
AFTER Z1 REPORT
FINANCIAL REPORT
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
counter after a Z1 of each report listed.
TIME REPORT
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
counter after a Z1 of each report listed.
PLU REPORT
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
counter after a Z1 of each report listed.
CLERK REPORT
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
counter after a Z1 of each report listed.
GROUP REPORT
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
counter after a Z1 of each report listed.
RESET Z COUNTER
AFTER Z2 REPORT
DAILY SALES RPT
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
counter after a Z2 of the daily sales report.
PRINTER PAPER SENSOR
ACTIVE
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine if activate the printer paper
sensor.
DEACTIVATE SPLIT
PRICING
Y or N
If N, both multiplication and split pricing calculations can be
done with the X/TIME key. If Y, only multiplication can be
done with the X/TIME key.
ALLOW DIRECT
MULTPLICATION
Y or N
If Y, you can multiply preset items by simply entering the
quantity, then pressing the preset PLU key.
INVENTORY CNT PGM
Y:ADD CURR. LVL
N:COUNTER REPLACE
CURR LEVEL
Y or N
Choose Y or N to determine whether the quantity of
inventory you enter in the PLU stock program adds to
existing inventory quantity, or whether it replaces the current
inventory quantity.
GLOBAL ENTRY LIMIT
(0 - 14)
0
Enter a digit to determine the number of numeric digits that
can be entered for any register function. Enter 0 for no limit.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Appendix • 283
Page
12
13
14
15
16
Field
Value
Description
DISABLE PRICE LEVEL
KEY
LEVEL 1:
Y or N
You can choose to disable Price Level 1 keys.
LEVEL 2:
Y or N
You can choose to disable Price Level 2 keys.
LEVEL 3:
Y or N
You can choose to disable Price Level 3 keys.
LEVEL 4:
Y or N
You can choose to disable Price Level 4 keys.
LEVEL 5:
Y or N
You can choose to disable Price Level 5 keys.
PRICE LEVEL IS
0:POP UP AFTER ITEM
1:POP UP AFTER SALE
2:STAYDOWN
0
If you press a price level key, you have the option of the
level key applying only to the next item (0), having the same
level key apply to any subsequent item registered in the same
transaction (1), or having the same level key apply to any
subsequent item on any subsequent transaction(2).
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL
Y or N
Select Y to enable the electronic journal. The electronic
journal captures in memory what you would print line by line
on a traditional journal. The four options that follow control
the electronic journal feature. The electronic journal can be
read and printed in the X control lock position or reset and
printed in the Z control lock position.
PROMPT OPERATOR
WHEN EJ BUFFER IS FULL
Y or N
If the electronic journal is enabled above, select Y if you
wish to display a message to notify the operator when the
journal memory is full.
STOP OPERATIONS WHEN
EJ BUFFER IS FULL
Y or N
If the electronic journal is enabled above, select Y if you
wish to stop operations when the journal memory is full.
SEND ONLY NEGATIVE
ENTRIES TO EJ
Y or N
If the electronic journal is enabled above, select Y if you
wish to capture only transactions with negative entries.
X REPORT AND
DECLARATION SEND TO
EJ
Y or N
If the electronic journal is enabled above, select Y if you
wish to capture X report and declaration.
SEND RESET REPORT TO
EJ
Y or N
If the electronic journal is enabled above, select Y if you
wish to capture reset reports.
DIRECT MULTIPLICATION
MORE THAN ONE DIGIT
Y or N
If you allow direct multiplication of a preset PLU, you can
allow only single digit multiplication or multiplication by
more than one digit.
TENDER VALIDATION
Y:AMT TENDERED
N:AMT OF SALE
Y or N
Validation is allowed if an appropriate optional printer is
connected to an RS-232C port. Here you can choose the
content of single line validation
EUROPEAN ROUNDING
Y or N
Select Y to enable European Rounding system.
Rounding Rates
284 • Appendix
Enter the high amount of the first range where you are
prompted. The low amount of the next range will be
computed automatically.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Page
17
Field
Value
Description
DISABLE NOT FOUND PLU
Y or N
Select Y to disable the NOT FOUND PLU function.
EMBEDED PRICE BAR
CODE TYPE 1/2/3/4/7
(0,1,2,3,4 or 7)
1
Enables price embedded bar codes:
1,2,4 = Type 1 embedded bar codes with a price check sum.
3 = Type 3 embedded bar codes without a check sum.
7 = Choose 7 if you are embedding a weight, rather than a
price. Use weight when different items are sold in bulk, such
as nut/bolts in a hardware store. When a weight embedded
bar code is scanned the weight is displayed and must be
extended by a price at the cash register.
18
19
CLERK INTERRUPT
Y or N
When Y, if enter the different clerk number while
registration. At this time save sale information to previous
temporary area of clerk. And then you can additional
registration after recall by same clerk.
PROGRAM DESCRIPTOR
BY CODE
Y or N
When N, program descriptors by pressing the appropriate
key on the program overlay. When Y, program descriptors
by typing the code for each descriptor character.
AUTO CUTTER
Y or N
Select Y to use Auto Cutter.
USE SPOOL
Y or N
Select Y to use Spool.
USE MCR
Y or N
Select code entry clerk system by MCR.
USE
TRACK 1&2:0
TRACK 2&3:1
1
Select the MCR track type.
USE DALLAS
Y or N
Select Y to use Dallas function.
STORE NAME:
Alpha
numeric 8
character
Enter the Store name to use SD Card operation.
MIX & MATCH IS TAXABLE
Y or N
When Mix and Match discount is used, determine if tax
applies before or after Mix and Match discount. Default is N
- not taxable/after Mix and Match discount.
BACK LIGHT COLOR (0-7)
0:ON
1:RED
2:GREEN
3:BLUE
4:RED + GREEN
5:GREEN + BLUE
6:RED + BLUE
7:OFF
0
Select Back light color of display.
SELECT LANGUAGE
0:ENGLISH
1:SPANISH
2:GERMAN
0
Select language which you want to use.
TAX1 SHIFT
Y or N
When pressed before a PLU entry, the tax shift keys reverse
the tax status of the PLU, i.e., a PLU with non-tax status
would become taxable or a PLU with tax status would
become non-taxable.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Appendix • 285
Page
20
Field
Value
Description
ALLOW PRICE LEVEL
ONLY MGR MODE
Y or N
Choose Y to require the X Mode key to operate the Price
Level keys.
DISPLAY ADD PRICE OF
LINKED ITEMS
Y or N
When Y, the customer display shows a total of the item and
linked item. For example, if PLU is $1.00 and is linked to
PLU2 which is $0.25, the customer display will show $1.25.
ALLOW SALE WITH 0
STOCK
Y or N
When N, inventory PLUs cannot be sold when stock reaches
"0".
ALLOW Z STOCK RPT
Y or N
When N, the operator is not allowed to clear (Z) stock.
RESERVED
21
22
23
24
25
MACRO KEY UNDER MGR
MACRO 1 :
Y or N
MACRO 2 :
Y or N
MACRO 3 :
Y or N
MACRO 4 :
Y or N
MACRO 5 :
Y or N
MACRO KEY UNDER MGR
MACRO 6 :
Y or N
MACRO 7 :
Y or N
MACRO 8 :
Y or N
MACRO 9 :
Y or N
MACRO 10 :
Y or N
MACRO KEY UNDER MGR
MACRO 11 :
Y or N
MACRO 12 :
Y or N
MACRO 13 :
Y or N
MACRO 14 :
Y or N
MACRO 15 :
Y or N
MACRO KEY UNDER MGR
MACRO 16 :
Y or N
MACRO 17 :
Y or N
MACRO 18 :
Y or N
MACRO 19 :
Y or N
MACRO 20 :
Y or N
ALLOW Z FINANCIAL
REPORT WITH OPEN CLK
INTERRUPT SALES
Y or N
286 • Appendix
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
Select Y if you do not want the operator use this function in
REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed
only in the X control lock position.
A Z Financial Report will clear transaction detail. Select N if
not allow Z Financial Report before all Clerk Interrupt are
closed.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Print Option Programming (for v01.010 and earlier)
PRINT OPTION
pg 1
PRINT MEDIA TOTALS
ON CLERK REPORT
NÅ
PRINT TAX SYMBOL
Y
PRINT VOID MODE AND RETURN
ON REPORT
Y
PRINT AUDACTION ON REPORT
N
PRINT OPTION
SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON
FINANCIAL REPORT
SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON
CLERK REPORT
PRINT CLERK REPORT AFTER
FINANCIAL REPORT
PRINT SALE ITEM NO.
pg 2
PRINT OPTION
pg 3
PRINT PLU WITH ZERO TOTALS
ON REPORT
NÅ
PRINT SUBTOTAL WHEN PRESSED
N
PRINT % OF SALES ON PLU REPORT
N
PRINT CONSECUTIVE NO.
Y
PRINT OPTION
PRINT DATE
PRINT TIME
PRINT MACHINE NO.
PRINT CLERK NAME
HOME CURRENCY SYMBOL IS
pg 4
PRINT OPTION
pg 5
PRINT RECEIPT WHEN SIGN ON/OFF
YÅ
PRINT GRAND TOTAL
ON X REPORT
Y
ON Z REPORT
Y
PRINT PLU# ON EJ
PRINT OPTION
PRINT TAX AMOUNT
PRINT TAXABLE TOTAL
PRINT TAX % RATE
VAT BREAKDOWN
PRINT TRAIN MODE TITLE
IN TRAINING MODE
N
pg 7
YÅ
Y
N
N
$
PRINT Z COUNTER
PRINT
ON X
ON Z
PRINT
YÅ
Y
Y
Y
Y
PRINT OPTION
pg 6
GROSS TOTAL
REPORT
YÅ
REPORT
Y
SUBTOTAL WITHOUT TAX
N
TAX AMOUNT IS
Y:COMBINE
N:ITEMIZE
N
PRINT OPTION
CURRENCY SYMBOL
CONV.#1
CONV.#2
CONV.#3
CONV.#4
E.J PORT (0-4)
REPORT PORT(0-4)
pg 8
PRINT OPTION
pg 9
PRINT KP ORDER # ON RECEIPT
YÅ
PRINT OPTION
COMBINE LIKE ITEMS ON KP
pg 10
NÅ
PRINT PRICE ON KP
SEND TO KP IN VOID MODE
CONSOLIDATION ON CHECK TRACK
YÅ
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
SEND TO KP IN TRAIN MODE
PRINT OPTION
PRINT PREAMBLE
PRINT POSTAMBLE
MESSAGE ON RECEIPT
PRINT PREAMBLE
PRINT POSTAMBLE
ON THE GUEST CHECK
N
pg 11
YÅ
Y
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
N
N
VOLUME UNIT
0:GAL
1:LTR
▪
▪
▪
▪
Å
0
0
N
1
PRINT OPTION
pg 12
PRINT ON FINANCIAL REPORT
AVG ITEM/CUST
YÅ
AVG $/CUST
Y
BUFFER RECEIPT ISSUE WHEN
RECEIPT IS ON
Y
PRIORITY PRINT BY GROUP
ON KP/KV
N
Appendix • 287
PRINT OPTION
pg 13
GRAND TOTAL IS
NÅ
Y: NET
N: GROSS
PRINT E.J FROM
N
Y: OLDEST N:NEWEST
PRINT JOURNAL IS SMALL
N
SEND ORDER TO KP AT SUBTOTAL N
PRINT PLU# ON REPORT
N
PRINT OPTION
PRINT PLU# ON RECEIPT
PRE-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
POST-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
ON RECEIPT
PRE-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
POST-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
ON THE GUEST CHECK
pg 14
NÅ
Y
N
PRINT OPTION
pg 15
PRE-FEED LINE# RECEIPT (0-5) 0Å
POST-FEED LINE# RECEIPT (0-5) 2
PRINT IN HIGH DENSITY
N
PRINT DATE ON SERVICE
Y
ON HARD CHECK
PRINT TAX CHARGED
Y
FOR LAST SERVICED ITEMS
PRINT OPTION
pg 16
NOT PRINT WHEN POLLING REPORT NÅ
PRINT WHEN PROGRAM UP/DOWN
N
ADJUST CUT (0-70)
40
PRINT LAST LINE OF EJ
0
DISABLE LINE FIND
0
ON SLIP PRINTER
N
N
Print Options - Reference Information
Page
1
2
3
Field
Value
Description
PRINT MEDIA TOTALS ON
CLERK REPORT
Y or N
Select Y to print media totals for each clerk, thus allowing
clerk cash drawer accountability.
PRINT TAX SYMBOL
Y or N
Select N to remove the tax symbol (i.e."T1") from the print
and display.
PRINT VD MODE AND
RETURN ON REPORT
Y or N
Select N to remove the VOID MODE and RETURN totals
from the financial and clerk reports.
PRINT AUDACTION ON
REPORT
Y or N
Select N to remove the AUDACTION total from the
financial and clerk reports.
SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON
FINANCIAL REPORT
Y or N
By default, the register prints only totals with information
other than zero. Select N, if you wish to print the contents of
all the financial report totals, even if the total is zero.
SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON
CLERK REPORT
Y or N
By default, the register prints only totals with information
other than zero. Select N, if you wish to print the contents of
all the clerk report totals, even if the total is zero.
PRINT CLERK REPORT
AFTER FINANCIAL
REPORT
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to include the clerk report information
at the end of the financial report.
PRINT SALE ITEM NO.
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to print sale item no.
PRINT PLU WITH ZERO
TOTALS ON REPORT
Y or N
By default, the register prints only totals with information
other than zero. Select Y, if you wish to print the contents of
all the PLUs, even if the total is zero.
PRINT SUBTOTAL WHEN
PRESSED
Y or N
Select Y if you wish the subtotal to print when the SBTL key
is pressed.
PRINT % OF SALES ON
PLU REPORT
Y or N
The register can calculate the percentage of sales represented
by each PLU. Select Y if you wish to print this percentage on
the PLU report. Note: the percentage will print only on
standalone register reports, not IRC report.
288 • Appendix
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Page
4
5
6
7
8
Field
Value
Description
PRINT CONS. NO.
Y or N
The consecutive number (also referred to as the transaction
counter, or receipt counter) normally prints on each receipt.
Select N if you do not wish to print this counter.
PRINT DATE
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the date.
PRINT TIME
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the time.
PRINT MACHINE NO.
Y or N
If you are using more than one cash register, you can identify
the specific register where a receipt was printed. Enter Y if
you wish to print the register number on the receipt.
PRINT CLERK NAME
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the clerk name
on the receipt.
HOME CURRENCY
SYMBOL IS
$
See following Currency Symbol Programming section for
detail.
PRINT Z COUNTER
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the reset
counter on Z reports.
PRINT RECEIPT WHEN
SIGN ON/OFF
Y or N
Select N if you do not wish to print a receipt when signing
on or off a clerk.
PRINT GRAND TOTAL
ON X REPORT
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the grand total
on the financial report reading (X report).
ON Z REPORT
Y or N
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the grand total
on the financial report resetting (Z report).
PRINT PLU# ON EJ
Y or N
Determines whether PLU# is displayed on the EJ.
PRINT GROSS TOTAL ON X Y or N
REPORT
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the gross sales
total on the financial report reading (X report).
PRINT GROSS TOTAL ON Z Y or N
REPORT
Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the gross sales
total on the financial report resetting (Z report).
PRINT SUBTOTAL W/O TAX Y or N
If you hand write credit card slips, you may find it useful to
print the merchandise subtotal. Select Y if you wish to print
the subtotal without tax on the receipt.
TAX AMOUNT IS
Y:COMBINE
N:ITEMIZE
Y or N
Select Y if you are calculating and reporting more that one
sales tax rate separately and you wish to print just the total of
multiple taxes rather than itemize each tax on the receipt.
PRINT TAX AMOUNT
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to delete the printing of the tax amount
on the receipt.
PRINT TAXABLE TOTAL
Y or N
Select Y if you wish to print the total of merchandise eligible
for each tax on the receipt.
PRINT TAX % RATE
Y or N
If you are calculating a tax percentage (add-on or VAT),
select Y if you wish to print the tax rate on each receipt.
VAT BREAKDOWN
Y or N
If Y, a breakdown of the VAT eligible sale will print, the net
amount and the VAT amount.
PRINT TRAIN MODE TITLE
IN TRAINING MODE
Y or N
When in training mode, the message "TRAIN MODE"
normally prints on each receipt. Select N if you wish to
delete this message.
CURRENCY SYMBOL
CONV.#1
•
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
See following Currency Symbol Programming section for
detail.
Appendix • 289
Page
9
10
11
12
Field
Value
CONV.#2
•
CONV.#3
•
CONV.#4
•
E.J PORT (0-4)
0
Choose a port for a remote printer to print EJ reports.
REPORT PORT (0-4)
0
Choose a port for a remote printer to print Z reports.
PRINT KP ORDER # ON
RECEIPT
Y or N
A system wide counter creates an order number for each
kitchen requisition. Choose Y or N to print the order number
on the kitchen printer requisition.
PRINT PRICE ON KP
Y or N
You can choose to print the item with or without its' price on
the kitchen requisition.
SEND TO KP IN
VOID MODE
Y or N
You can choose whether to print or not print registrations in
void mode on kitchen requisitions.
SEND TO KP IN
TRAIN MODE
Y or N
You can choose whether to print or not print registrations in
training mode on kitchen requisitions.
COMBINE LIKE ITEMS ON
KP
Y or N
If two of the same items are registered in the same
transaction, you can choose the format on the kitchen
requisition. For example, if Y, "2 HAMBURGERS; if N, "1
HAMBURGER" and "1 HAMBURGER".
CONSOLIDATION ON
CHECK TRACK
Y or N
Consolidation of like items can be selected for soft guest
check printing. For example, if three rounds of drinks are
served, the check will print "3 TAP BEER" rather than "1
TAP BEER" three times.
VOLUME UNIT
0:GAL
1:LTR
1
If gallonage is selected in PLU programming, choose gallons
or liters here.
PRINT PREAMBLE MESG
ON RECEIPT
Y or N
Choose whether to print the PREAMBLE on the receipt.
PRINT POSTAMBLE MESG
ON RECEIPT
Y or N
Choose whether to print the POSTAMBLE on the receipt.
PRINT PREAMBLE ON THE
GUEST CHECK
Y or N
Choose whether to print the PREAMBLE on the guest
check.
PRINT POSTAMBLE ON
THE GUEST CHECK
Y or N
Choose whether to print the POSTAMBLE on the guest
check.
PRINT ON FIN RPT - AVG
ITEM/CUST
Y or N
Choose whether to print the average items per customer
(PLU sales counter/Net sales counter).
PRINT ON FIN RPT - AVG
$/CUST
Y or N
Choose whether to print the average sales per customer (Net
Sales/Net Sales counter).
BUFFER RECEIPT ISSUE
WHEN REC IN ON
Y or N
Determine whether you can issue a second receipt for the
same transaction with the CASH key
PRIORITY PRINT BY
GROUP ON KP/KV
Y or N
If Y, the order in which items appear on a kitchen requisition
is determined by the group to which the item is assigned, i.e.
items reported to group 1 will print before items reported to
group 2.
290 • Appendix
Description
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Page
13
14
15
16
Field
Value
Description
GRAND TOTAL IS
Y:NET
N:GROSS
Y or N
Choose Y if you wish the grand total to accumulate daily net
sales totals. Choose N if you wish the grand total to
accumulate daily gross sales totals.
PRINT E.J FROM
Y:OLDEST
N:NEWEST
Y or N
Y: Prints electronic journal from lowest consecutive number
to highest.
PRINT JOURNAL IS SMALL
Y or N
Choose Y to print Journal Printer in small size font. (2Station)
SEND ORDER TO KP AT
SUBTOTAL
Y or N
Choose Y to print orders on the KP when the SUBTOTAL
key is pressed. Choose N to print orders on the KP when the
order is finalized.
PRINT PLU # ON RECEIPT
Y or N
If Y, the PLU number and descriptor will print. If N, only the
PLU number will print.
PRINT PLU # ON REPORT
Y or N
Determines whether PLU# is displayed on the report.
PRE-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
Y or N
Choose Y to print Preamble-Image Logo on receipt
N: Prints electronic journal from highest consecutive number
to lowest.
POST-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO Y or N
ON RECEIPT
Y or N
PRE-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO
Choose Y to print Postamble- Image Logo on receipt
POST-PRN GRAPHIC LOGO Y or N
ON GUEST CHECK
PRE-FEED LINE# RECEIPT 0
(0 - 5)
2
POST-FEED LINE#
RECEIPT (0 - 5)
Y or N
PRINT IN HIGH DENSITY
Choose Y to print Postamble- Image Logo on Guest Check
PRINT DATE ON SERVICE
ON HARD CHECK
Y or N
If Y, the posting date will print at every posting on the hard
check.
PRINT TAX CHARGED FOR
LAST SERVICED ITEMS
Y or N
If Y, the tax printed on the check/receipt is only for the items
since the last service. If N, the tax is for all items on check.
Necessary flag for charge posting.
NOT PRINT WHEN
POLLING REPORTS
Y or N
Choose N if you would like to suppress register printing
when reports are polled.
PRINT WHEN PROGRAM
UP/DOWN
Y or N
Choose Y if you would like to suppress register printing
when program are up/download.
ADJUST CUT (0-70)
40
PRINT LAST LINE OF EJ
(0 - 99)
0
Enter the number for the number of lines of Electronic
Journal you want to print in REG-Mode, Quick EJ
LookUp.
DISABLE LINE FIND ON
SLIP PRINTER
Y or N
Choose Y if you want to disable/override Line Find feature
on a slip printer, or when using a POS printer.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Choose Y to print Preamble-Image Logo on Guest Check.
Enter the # which you want to feed line at the start of receipt.
Enter the # which you want to feed line at the end of receipt.
Appendix • 291
Glossary of Terms
Activity Count
The activity counter keeps track of the number of times an entry is made on a PLU, or function key.
Alpha Keyboard Overlay
The alpha keyboard overlay represents a new set of functions and characters for each key on the
keyboard. When you are programming a field that requires alpha numeric entries, the keyboard
automatically shifts into the alpha keyboard so that you can simply type the message or descriptor
you wish to program. An overlay legend sheet is provided to place on the keyboard while you are
programming.
Audaction
Refers to the total of all sales ending in a negative balance.
Auto Scale
Registrations of PLUs with auto scale status will automatically multiply by the weight placed upon a
scale connected to the register. Use for items such as produce, that are always sold by weight.
Auto Tare
With auto tare status assigned, a pre-programmed tare weight will automatically subtract from the
weight from the scale.
Cancel
Press the CANCEL function to abort a transaction in progress. All current items are removed
(voided).
Check Cash
Use the CHECK CASH function to exchange a check for cash outside of a sale.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Glossary of Terms • 293
Check Endorse
If compulsory check endorsement is set with the CHECK key, use the CHECK ENDORSE function
to print the endorsement message after a check is inserted into the appropriate printer.
Clerks
Sales clerks are individuals who are responsible for selling the merchandise to the customer.
Typically, management wants to know merchandise sales levels for each clerk, in order to monitor
productivity, account for cash and other media, and/or pay commissions.
Compulsory
When an operation is programmed compulsory, a function (i.e. Non-add number entry) must be
performed in order to complete the operation.
Consecutive Number
A count appears at the bottom of each receipt and after each transaction on the journal tape. This
count increases by one with each transaction, report, or scan.
Currency Conversion
Use one of the 4 available currency conversion functions to convert and display the value of the
transaction in foreign currency. Only cash tender is allowed after pressing a CONV key. Change is
calculated and issued in home currency.
Default Program
The original program installed in the SPS-300. The register has a default program which makes it
operational after a RAM clear. Nearly all option, rate, and status programs are set to zero as the
default condition.
Destination
Refers to the destination for the sale i.e. eat-in, take out, drive thru.
Discount (Item)
An item discount (coupon or %) subtracts an amount or percentage from the price of an item. This
subtraction nets the Department or PLU total.
Discount (Sale)
A sale discount (coupon or %) subtracts an amount or percentage from the entire sale.
Electronic Journal
The electronic journal is an area of memory designated to keep a sales journal. The electronic journal
can be printed, if necessary, to provide a traditional record of all register activity.
294 • Glossary of Terms
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Error Condition
An error condition signals that mis-operation has occurred. It is identified by an audible tone and an
error descriptor appearing on the display.
Error Correct
An error correct operation voids the last item entered, it must be used within a sale.
Food Stamps
In the United States, Food Stamps may be used to purchase eligible food items at food stores that
participate in the program. The SPS-300 can assist a retailer in handling food stamp transactions by
sorting food stamp and non-food stamp eligible items within each sale and tracking food stamp
payments for eligible items.
Gallonage
Gallonage is a status that can be assigned to a department or PLU. Gallonage departments or PLUs
accept a price, but print both the price and the quantity of gallons sold. The quantity of gallons is
computed from the price per gallon, which is set as the preset price.
Groups
Groups are totals that collect information from designated PLUs. For example all PLU dessert items
could collect in a group total called "desserts".
HALO
The high amount lock-out (HALO) limits the amount allowed to be entered in a PLU, or function key.
IRC
Inter Register Communications (IRC) is the term used to describe communications within a network
of registers. IRC allows consolidated reporting and down-line programming.
Link PLU
If you wish the registration a PLU to automatically cause the registration of another PLU, enter the
number of the PLU you wish to register automatically in the LINK PLU of the PLU.
Macro
Macros record key sequences for later execution. Up to 10 macros may be recorded and executed by
pressing a function.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Glossary of Terms • 295
Memory Allocation
Memory allocation is a program that determines how the system memory is divided to provide the
correct features for your application. For example, you may require more or less employee memory or
PLUs. Memory allocation allows you to maximize the features you need while minimizing the
features you do not need.
Modifier
Preceding a PLU entry, a modifier key changes a digit of the PLU number, causing a different PLU to
be registered. Modifier keys can be set to change any of the 14 PLU digit positions to any specified
digit (0-9).
NLU
Use any of the NLU keys to categorize merchandise (as you would with traditional department keys.)
NLUs can be programmed to access any PLU number in the register.
No Sale
No sale is an operation to simply open the cash drawer.
Override
Override is an operation used to bypass a programmed price or HALO.
PLUs
Price look-ups (PLUs) are accessed by indexing a code number and pressing the PLU key, or by
pressing a PLU key. PLUs can be programmed with a preset or open price. PLUs record their own
activity count and dollar total on the PLU report.
Post Tendering
The Post Tendering feature allows the operator to use the register to compute change on cash
transactions after the sale has been finalized.
To calculate change due after finalizing the sale, enter the cash amount presented by the customer and
then press CASH. The amount of change due to the customer is then displayed, and the cash drawer
may open.
This is a calculation function only, and no totals or counters are updated by the use of this feature.
Price Level
If memory is allocated for price levels, prices may be assigned at up to five different price levels for
each PLU item. Price level keys can then be used to shift the price of a PLU.
Promo
The PROMO operation allows items to be sold without cost, i.e. buy two, get one free. PROMO
activity will remove the item cost from the sale, but the sales count will include the promo item.
296 • Glossary of Terms
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Receipt
A receipt is a printed tape given to a customer as a record of the sale transaction.
Register Number
The register number is a programmable number which prints on the receipt and journal tapes. It
identifies the electronic cash register the sale or report was performed on.
Stay-Down
When a function is programmed as a Stay-down function, it is valid until changed. For example, a
Stay-down clerk remains signed on until either signed off, or another clerk is signed on.
Stock PLU
Stock PLUs track the quantity of the PLU item in stock. Each time the PLU is registered, a whole unit
subtracts from the stock counter. (Note that if multiplication or decimal multiplication is used when
the PLU is registered, the resulting quantity of activity will subtract from the stock counter. Stock is
maintained increments to the second decimal position, i.e. "X.XX".)
Surcharge (Item)
An item percent surcharge adds a percentage to the price of an item. This addition nets the department
or PLU total.
Surcharge (Sale)
A sale percent surcharge adds a percentage to the entire sale.
Tare Weight
A tare is the amount of weight accounted for by the container or packaging. By entering a tare weight
(as required by law in some areas) the weight of the container is subtracted and only the true weight
of the product is measured on the scale.
Tax Exempt
Tax exempt is used to exclude the tax from an entire sale.
Tax Shift
Tax shift keys are used to reverse the tax status of a PLU entry.
Tender
The method of register operation in which payment is made and the transaction is finalized.
Transaction Number
A count appears at the bottom of each receipt and or journal tape. This count increases by one with
each transaction, report, or scan.
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Glossary of Terms • 297
Void
A void operation will erase a previous item entry. It must be used inside of a sale only.
Waste
The Waste function is used to start and end entries of items that are wasted. Inventory is adjusted.
298 • Glossary of Terms
SAM4S SPS-300 Series Electronic Cash Register AU
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement